2003 pontiac aztek owner manual - GM Canada

2003 Pontiac Aztek Owner Manual M 

Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1 

Front Seats ............................................... 1-2 

Rear Seats ............................................... 1-6 

Safety Belts ............................................. 1-10 

Child Restraints ....................................... 1-36 

Air Bag Systems ...................................... 1-59 

Restraint System Check ............................ 1-68 

Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1 

Keys ........................................................ 2-3 

Doors and Locks ....................................... 2-8 

Windows ................................................. 2-13 

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-15 

Starting and Operating 

Your Vehicle ........................................ 2-18 

Mirrors .................................................... 2-30 

OnStar ® System ...................................... 2-31 

Storage Areas ......................................... 2-32 

Sunroof .................................................. 2-45 

Vehicle Personalization ............................. 2-45 

Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1 

Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4 

Climate Controls ...................................... 3-21 

Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 3-28 

Message Center ....................................... 3-39 

Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 3-49 

Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-59 

Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1 

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..... 4-2 

Towing ................................................... 4-31 

Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1 

Service ..................................................... 5-3 

Fuel ......................................................... 5-4 

Checking Things Under the Hood ................. 5-8 

All-Wheel Drive ........................................ 5-43 

Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-45 

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-49 

Tires ...................................................... 5-50 

Appearance Care ..................................... 5-83 

Vehicle Identification ................................. 5-90 

Electrical System ...................................... 5-91 

Capacities and Specifications ..................... 5-98 

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ...... 5-99 

Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1 

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2 

Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1 

Customer Assistance Information .................. 7-2 

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 7-9 

Index ................................................................ 1

Canadian Owners 

You can obtain a French copy of this manual from your 

dealer or from: 

Helm, Incorporated 

P.O. Box 07130 

Detroit, MI 48207 

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, PONTIAC, 

the PONTIAC Emblem and the name AZTEK are 

registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation. 

This manual includes the latest information at the time it 

was printed. We reserve the right to make changes 

after that time without further notice. For vehicles first 

sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of 

Canada Limited” for Pontiac Division whenever it 

appears in this manual. 

Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be 

there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you 

sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the 

new owner can use it. 

About Driving Your Vehicle 

As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this 

vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an 

accident. See Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle 

on page 4-2. 

How to Use This Manual 

Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning 

to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If 

you do this, it will help you learn about the features and 

controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find 

that pictures and words work together to explain things. 

Litho in U.S.A. 

Part No. 10324206 B First Edition 

© Copyright General Motors Corporation 06/07/02 

All Rights Reserved 

ii

Index 

A good place to look for what you need is the Index in 

back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’s 

in the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it. 

Safety Warnings and Symbols 

You will find a number of safety cautions in this book. 

We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about 

things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the 

warning. 

You will also find a circle 

with a slash through it in 

this book. This safety 

symbol means “Don’t,” 

“Don’t do this” or 

“Don’t let this happen.” 

{CAUTION: 

These mean there is something that could hurt 

you or other people. 

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. 

Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the 

hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you 

or others could be hurt. 

iii

Vehicle Damage Warnings 

Also, in this book you will find these notices: 

Notice: These mean there is something that could 

damage your vehicle. 

A notice will tell you about something that can damage 

your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be 

covered by your warranty, and it could be costly. But the 

notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the 

damage. 

When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION 

and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different 

words. 

You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use 

the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE. 

Vehicle Symbols 

Your vehicle has components and labels that use 

symbols instead of text. Symbols, used on your vehicle, 

are shown along with the text describing the operation 

or information relating to a specific component, control, 

message, gage or indicator. 

If you need help figuring out a specific name of a 

component, gage or indicator, reference the following 

topics: 

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1 

• Features and Controls in Section 2 

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3 

• Climate Controls in Section 3 

• Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators in Section 3 

• Audio System(s) in Section 3 

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5 

iv

These are some examples of vehicle symbols you may find on your vehicle: 

v

✍ NOTES 

vi

Section 1 

Seats and Restraint Systems 

Front Seats ......................................................1-2 

Manual Passenger Seat ..................................1-2 

Six-Way Power Seats .....................................1-2 

Manual Lumbar ..............................................1-3 

Heated Seats .................................................1-3 

Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-4 

Head Restraints .............................................1-5 

Rear Seats .......................................................1-6 

Rear Seat Operation .......................................1-6 

Split Bench Seats ...........................................1-6 

Safety Belts ...................................................1-10 

Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-10 

Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-15 

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-15 

Driver Position ..............................................1-16 

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-24 

Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-25 

Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-26 

Center Rear Passenger Position .....................1-29 

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for 

Children and Small Adults ..........................1-32 

Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-36 

Child Restraints .............................................1-36 

Older Children ..............................................1-36 

Infants and Young Children ............................1-39 

Child Restraint Systems .................................1-43 

Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-46 

Top Strap ....................................................1-47 

Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-48 

Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for 

Children (LATCH System) ...........................1-49 

Securing a Child Restraint Designed for 

the LATCH System ....................................1-51 

Securing a Child Restraint in a 

Rear Outside Seat Position .........................1-52 


Center Rear Seat Position ..........................1-54 

Securing a Child Restraint in the 

Right Front Seat Position ............................1-56 

Air Bag Systems ............................................1-59 

Where Are the Air Bags? ...............................1-62 

When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ....................1-64 

What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .....................1-65 

How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .....................1-66 

What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates? .......1-66 

Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle .........1-68 

Restraint System Check ..................................1-68 

Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-68 

Replacing Restraint System Parts 

After a Crash ............................................1-69 

1-1

Front Seats 

Manual Passenger Seat 

Pull up on the lever, 

located on the front of 

the seat, to unlock 

and move the seat. 

Six-Way Power Seats 

Your vehicle may have 

this feature. If it does, 

the six-way power 

seat control is located 

on the outboard sides 

of the driver’s and 

front passenger’s seats. 

Slide the seat to where you want it and release the 

lever. To make sure the seat is locked into place, try to 

move the seat back and forth with your body. 

• Move the front of the control up or down to adjust 

the front portion of the cushion up or down. 

• Move the rear of the control up or down to adjust 

the rear portion of the cushion up or down. 

• Lift up or push down on the whole control to move 

the entire seat up or down. 

• To move the whole seat forward or rearward, slide 

the control forward or rearward. 

1-2

Manual Lumbar 

Heated Seats 

The knob that controls this 

feature is located on the 

outboard sides of the 

driver’s and front 

passenger’s seats. 

Your vehicle may have 

heated seats. If it does, 

the heated seat switches 

are located in the 

instrument panel 

switchbank. 

Turn the knob toward the front of the vehicle to increase 

lumbar support. Turn the knob toward the rear of the 

vehicle to decrease lumbar support. 

This feature will quickly heat the seat cushions and 

lower back of the driver’s and front passenger’s seat. 

The left switch is for the driver’s seat and the right switch 

is for the front passenger’s seat. 

Press the top of the switch to turn the heater on. Press 

the bottom of the switch to turn the heater off. The 

heated seat switch will turn off when the ignition 

is turned to OFF and will resume operation when the 

ignition is turned to ON, unless the switch is turned off. 

1-3

Reclining Seatbacks 

To adjust the seatback, pull up on the recliner lever 

located on the outboard sides of both the driver’s and 

front passenger’s seats. Release the lever to lock 

the seatback where you want it. Push and pull on the 

seat to make sure it’s locked into position. Pull up on the 

lever, and the seat will go to its original upright 

position. 

But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is 

moving. 

1-4

{CAUTION: 

Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle 

is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you 

buckle up, your safety belts can’t do their job 

when you’re reclined like this. 

The shoulder belt can’t do its job because it 

won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be 

in front of you. In a crash you could go into it, 

receiving neck or other injuries. 

The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash 

the belt could go up over your abdomen. The 

belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic 

bones. This could cause serious internal 

injuries. 

For proper protection when the vehicle is in 

motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit 

well back in the seat and wear your safety belt 

properly. 

Head Restraints 

Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint 

is closest to the top of your head. This position 

reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash. 

The front seat head restraints are adjustable. Slide the 

head restraint up or down to adjust it. 

1-5

On some models, the head restraints tilt forward and 

rearward also. 

The rear seat head restraints in your vehicle may be 

adjustable. They work the same as the front seat head 

restraints, except they do not tilt forward or rearward. 

Rear Seats 

Rear Seat Operation 

The rear seats in your vehicle have seat operating 

features to adjust, fold, remove and reinstall the seats. 

By using the seat operating procedures, in the 

correct order, you can easily remove the seats from 

your vehicle. 

When you put the seats back in the vehicle, be sure to 

follow the label on the back of the seat for proper 

location. 

Split Bench Seats 

The seatbacks can be folded forward or reclined 

individually and the sections can be flipped forward or 

removed individually. 

Folding or Reclining the Seatbacks 

{CAUTION: 

If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move 

forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could 

cause injury to the person sitting there. Always 

press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is 

locked. 

To recline the seatbacks 

lift up on the recliner lever 

located on the outboard 

side of the seatback. 

Move the seatback to the desired position. 

It is easier to raise or lower the seatback if you lean 

forward and take the weight off the seatback. 

1-6

To fold the seatback forward lift up on the recliner lever 

and fold the seatback forward. The seatback will lock 

into place. 

Lift up on the lever again to raise the seatback. The 

seatback will lock into place when you push it back to 

the upright position. 

After raising a seatback to an upright position, push and 

pull on the seatback to check that it is locked upright. 

2. Make sure the seatback is in the upright position. 

3. Lift the seatback recliner lever to fold the seatback 

forward. 

Removing the Split Bench Seat 

Each section of the split bench seat can be flipped 

forward or removed individually. 

4. Pull the lever, located at the base on the outboard 

side of the seat, to release the rear latches from the 

floor pins and flip the seat forward. 

The seat can stay in this position or it can be 

removed from the vehicle by following the next 

steps. 

1. Unlatch the shoulder belt from the lap belt. 

1-7

Replacing the Split Bench Seats 

{CAUTION: 

If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move 

forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could 

cause injury to the person sitting there. Always 

press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is 

locked. 

5. To release the front latches, squeeze the angled 

latch release bar toward the straight crossbar. 

6. Remove the seat by rocking it slightly toward the 

rear of the vehicle and then pulling it out. 

Repeat these steps for the other section of the split 

bench seat. 

{CAUTION: 

A seat that isn’t locked into place properly can 

move around in a collision or sudden stop. 

People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure 

to lock the seat into place properly when 

installing it. 

1-8

{CAUTION: 

A safety belt that is improperly routed, not 

properly attached, or twisted won’t provide the 

protection needed in a crash. The person 

wearing the belt could be seriously injured. 

After installing the seat, always check to be 

sure that the safety belts are properly routed 

and attached, and are not twisted. 

Make sure the seatback is in the folded forward 

position and the safety belts are on the correct section 

of the seat. 

Don’t put the sections of the bench seat in so they face 

rearward because they won’t latch that way. 

The split bench seat sections have seat position labels, 

located on the back of each section, showing where 

the section must go. 

The seat must be placed in the proper location for the 

legs to attach correctly. 

1. Squeeze the angled latch release bar toward the 

straight crossbar while placing the front hooks of 

the bench seat onto the front two floor pins. 

2. Make sure the bench 

seat is angled so that 

the front hooks 

clear the floor pins. 

If the front legs are 

not attached correctly, 

the rear legs will 

not attach to the rear 

set of floor pins. 

1-9

Safety Belts 

Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone 

This part of the manual tells you how to use safety 

belts properly. It also tells you some things you should 

not do with safety belts. 

{CAUTION: 

3. Firmly push the rear hooks onto the rear floor pins 

by pushing down on the rear of the seat. 

4. Try to raise the seat to check that it is locked down. 

5. Lift the seatback recliner lever and raise the 

seatback until it locks upright. 

6. Push and pull on the seatback to check that it is 

locked upright. 

7. Attach the lap belt. 

Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t 

wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a 

crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt, 

your injuries can be much worse. You can hit 

things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it. 

You can be seriously injured or killed. In the 

same crash, you might not be, if you are 

buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt, 

and check that your passengers’ belts are 

fastened properly too. 

1-10

{CAUTION: 

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo 

area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a 

collision, people riding in these areas are more 

likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not 

allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle 

that is not equipped with seats and safety 

belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a 

seat and using a safety belt properly. 

Your vehicle has a light 

that comes on as a 

reminder to buckle up. 

See Safety Belt Reminder 

Light on page 3-32. 

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law 

says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work. 

You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a 

crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one. 

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so 

serious that even buckled up, a person wouldn’t survive. 

But most crashes are in between. In many of them, 

people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk 

away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt 

or killed. 

After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the 

facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does 

matter... a lot! 

1-11

Why Safety Belts Work 

When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as 

it goes. 

Put someone on it. 

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on 

wheels. 

1-12

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider 

doesn’t stop. 

The person keeps going until stopped by something. 

In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield... 

1-13

or the instrument panel... 

or the safety belts! 

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does. 

You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, 

and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why 

safety belts make such good sense. 

1-14

Questions and Answers About 

Safety Belts 

Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an 

accident if I’m wearing a safety belt? 

A: You could be – whether you’re wearing a safety 

belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt, 

even if you’re upside down. And your chance 

of being conscious during and after an accident, 

so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater 

if you are belted. 

Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to 

wear safety belts? 

A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in 

most of them in the future. But they are 

supplemental systems only; so they work with 

safety belts – not instead of them. Every air bag 

system ever offered for sale has required the 

use of safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that 

has air bags, you still have to buckle up to get 

the most protection. That’s true not only in frontal 

collisions, but especially in side and other 

collisions. 

Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from 

home, why should I wear safety belts? 

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an 

accident – even one that isn’t your fault – you and 

your passengers can be hurt. Being a good 

driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your 

control, such as bad drivers. 

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of 

home. And the greatest number of serious injuries 

and deaths occur at speeds of less than 

40 mph (65 km/h). 

Safety belts are for everyone. 

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 

This part is only for people of adult size. 

Be aware that there are special things to know about 

safety belts and children. And there are different 

rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be 

riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-36 

or Infants and Young Children on page 1-39. Follow 

those rules for everyone’s protection. 

First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your 

vehicle has. 

We’ll start with the driver position. 

1-15

Driver Position 

This part describes the driver’s restraint system. 

Lap-Shoulder Belt 

The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear it 

properly. 

1. Close and lock the door. 

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see 

how, see “Front Seats” in the Index. 

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. 

Don’t let it get twisted. 

The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt 

across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt 

go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt 

across you more slowly. 

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. 

Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. 

If the belt isn’t long enough, see Safety Belt 

Extender on page 1-36. 

Make sure the release button on the buckle is 

positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the 

safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 

1-16

5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle 

end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt. 

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on 

the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this 

applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be 

less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, 

the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This 

could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder 

belt should go over the shoulder and across the 

chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt 

restraining forces. 

The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash, 

or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor. 

1-17

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster 

Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt 

adjuster to the height that is right for you. 

To move it down, push down on the button and move 

the height adjuster to the desired position. 

You can move the adjuster up just by pushing up on the 

shoulder belt guide. After you move the adjuster to 

where you want it, try to move it down without pushing 

the button down to make sure it has locked into 

position. 

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt 

is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be 

away from your face and neck, but not falling off your 

shoulder. 

1-18

Q: What’s wrong with this? 

{CAUTION: 

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt 

is too loose. In a crash, you would move 

forward too much, which could increase injury. 

The shoulder belt should fit against your body. 

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly 

as much protection this way. 

1-19


{CAUTION: 

You can be seriously injured if your belt is 

buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash, 

the belt would go up over your abdomen. The 

belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic 

bones. This could cause serious internal 

injuries. Always buckle your belt into the 

buckle nearest you. 

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place. 

1-20


{CAUTION: 

You can be seriously injured if your belt goes 

over an armrest like this. The belt would be 

much too high. In a crash, you can slide under 

the belt. The belt force would then be applied 

at the abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, and 

that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be 

sure the belt goes under the armrests. 

A: The belt is over an armrest. 

1-21


{CAUTION: 

You can be seriously injured if you wear the 

shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your 

body would move too far forward, which would 

increase the chance of head and neck injury. 

Also, the belt would apply too much force to 

the ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder 

bones. You could also severely injure internal 

organs like your liver or spleen. 

A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should 

be worn over the shoulder at all times. 

1-22


{CAUTION: 

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. 

In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of 

the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is 

twisted, make it straight so it can work 

properly, or ask your dealer to fix it. 

A: The belt is twisted across the body. 

1-23

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 

Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant 

women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be 

seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts. 

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle. 

The belt should go back out of the way. 

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the 

way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage 

both the belt and your vehicle. 

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and 

the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, 

below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy. 

1-24

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the 

mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more 

likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For 

pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making 

safety belts effective is wearing them properly. 

Right Front Passenger Position 

To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety 

belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-16. 

The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same 

way as the driver’s safety belt – except for one thing. 

If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the latch 

plate and keep pulling until you can buckle the belt. 

1-25

Rear Seat Passengers 

It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle 

up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the 

rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those 

who are wearing safety belts. 

Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be 

thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike 

others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts. 

Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions 


The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder 

belts. Here’s how to wear one properly. 

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. 

Don’t let it get twisted. 

The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt 

across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt 

go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt 

across you more slowly. 

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. 

1-26

If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the 

latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it. 

Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. 

If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt 

Extender on page 1-36. 

Make sure the release button on the buckle is 



3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle 

end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part. 

1-27

In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic 

bones. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap 

belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at 

your abdomen. This could cause serious or even 

fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the 

shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the 

body are best able to take belt restraining forces. 

The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a 

crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of 

the retractor. 

{CAUTION: 

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and 

snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. 

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt 

is too loose. In a crash, you would move 

forward too much, which could increase injury. 

The shoulder belt should fit against your body. 

1-28

Center Rear Passenger Position 


To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the 

buckle. 

If your vehicle has a bench seat, someone can sit in the 

center position. 

When you sit in the center seating position, you have a 

lap safety belt, which has no retractor. You also 

have a shoulder belt, which has a retractor. In order to 

have the protection of the shoulder belt, you must 

first connect it to the lap belt. 

1-29

1. Remove the shoulder belt from its stowage 

location in the roof and pull it all the way down to 

the lap belt. 

2. Insert the metal knob on the shoulder belt into the 

keyhole on the lap belt buckle as shown. Be sure to 

slide the shoulder belt part into the keyhole until 

it locks into place. 

1-30

3. To make the lap belt longer, tilt the latch plate and 

pull it along the belt. 

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown 

until the belt is snug 

4. Buckle, position and release the lap-shoulder belt 

the same way as the other lap-shoulder belts. If 

the belt isn’t long enough, see Safety Belt Extender 

on page 1-36. 

Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned 

so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt 

quickly if you ever had to. 

1-31


Children and Small Adults 

Your vehicle may have this feature already. If it doesn’t, 

you can get it from any GM dealer. 

Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added 

safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown 

booster seats and for small adults. When installed on 

a shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions 

the belt away from the neck and head. 

There is one guide for each passenger position in the 

rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfort for 

children who have outgrown child restraints and booster 

seats and for smaller adults, the comfort guides may 

be installed on the shoulder belts. Here’s how to install 

a comfort guide and use the safety belt: 

Second Row Outside Positions 

For second row outside positions do the following: 

1. Remove the guide from its storage clip located on 

the sidewall next to the outboard side of each 

outside passenger position seat. 

1-32

2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two 

edges of the belt into the slots of the guide. 

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat. 

The guide must be on top of the belt. 

1-33

4. Buckle, position and release the safety belts as 

described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-26. 

Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the 

shoulder. 

To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the 

belt edges together so that you can take them out of the 

guides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage 

clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn 

the guide and the clip inward leaving only the loop of 

elastic cord exposed. 

Second Row Center Position 

1. Remove the elastic cord from under the driver’s 

side of the head restraint. 

1-34

2. Attach the elastic cord to the comfort guide on the 

center passenger shoulder belt. 

3. Be sure the belt is not twisted and it lies flat. The 

guide must be on top of the belt. 

4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as 

described in Center Rear Passenger Position 

on page 1-29. Make sure that the shoulder belt 

crosses over the shoulder. 

To remove and store the elastic cord, remove it from 

the comfort guide. The elastic cord will go back 

under the driver’s side head restraint. 

1-35

Safety Belt Extender 

If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you 

should use it. 

But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your 

dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go 

in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so 

the extender will be long enough for you. The extender 

will be just for you, and just for the seat in your 

vehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, 

and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear 

it, just attach it to the regular safety belt. 

Child Restraints 

Older Children 

Older children who have outgrown booster seats should 

wear the vehicle’s safety belts. 

1-36

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts? 

A: If possible, an older child should wear a 

lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a 

shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt 

should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt 

should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the 

top of the thighs. It should never be worn over 

the abdomen, which could cause severe or even 

fatal internal injuries in a crash. 

Accident statistics show that children are safer if they 

are restrained in the rear seat. 

In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike 

other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown 

out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety 

belts properly. 

{CAUTION: 

Never do this. 

Here two children are wearing the same belt. 

The belt can’t properly spread the impact 

forces. In a crash, the two children can be 

crushed together and seriously injured. A belt 

must be used by only one person at a time. 

1-37

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt, 

but the child is so small that the shoulder belt 

is very close to the child’s face or neck? 

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window, 

move the child toward the center of the vehicle. 

If the child is sitting in the center rear seat 

passenger position, move the child toward the 

safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that the 

shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so 

that in a crash the child’s upper body would have 

the restraint that belts provide. 

If the child is sitting in a rear seat, see Rear Safety 

Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small 

Adults on page 1-32. 

1-38

{CAUTION: 

Never do this. 

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a 

lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is 

behind the child. If the child wears the belt in 

this way, in a crash the child might slide under 

the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied 

right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause 

serious or fatal injuries. 

The lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug 

on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs. This 

applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. 

Infants and Young Children 

Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes 

infants and all other children. Neither the distance 

traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes 

the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, 

the law in every state in the United States and in 

every Canadian province says children up to some age 

must be restrained while in a vehicle. 

Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles, 

they should have the protection provided by appropriate 

restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s 

adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice. 

Instead, they need to use a child restraint. 

1-39

{CAUTION: 

People should never hold a baby in their arms 

while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh 

much — until a crash. During a crash a baby 

will become so heavy it is not possible to 

hold it. For example, in a crash at only 

25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will 

suddenly become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on a 

person’s arms. A baby should be secured in 

an appropriate restraint. 

1-40

{CAUTION: 

Children who are up against, or very close to, 

any air bag when it inflates can be seriously 

injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder 

belts offer outstanding protection for adults 

and older children, but not for young children 

and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt 

system nor its air bag system is designed for 

them. Young children and infants need the 

protection that a child restraint system can 

provide. 

1-41

Q: What are the different types of add-on child 

restraints? 

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by 

the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic 

types. Selection of a particular restraint should take 

into consideration not only the child’s weight, 

height and age but also whether or not the restraint 

will be compatible with the motor vehicle in 

which it will be used. 

For most basic types of child restraints, there are 

many different models available. When purchasing a 

child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used 

in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a 

label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle 

safety standards. 

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come 

with the restraint state the weight and height 

limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition, 

there are many kinds of restraints available for 

children with special needs. 

{CAUTION: 

Newborn infants need complete support, 

including support for the head and neck. This is 

necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is 

weak and its head weighs so much compared 

with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a 

rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so the 

crash forces can be distributed across the 

strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and 

shoulders. Infants always should be secured in 

appropriate infant restraints. 

1-42

{CAUTION: 

Child Restraint Systems 

The body structure of a young child is quite 

unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom 

the safety belts are designed. A young child’s 

hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s 

regular safety belt may not remain low on the 

hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle 

up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the 

belt would apply force on a body area that’s 

unprotected by any bony structure. This alone 

could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young 

children always should be secured in 

appropriate child restraints. 

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a 

motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed 

to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat 

surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward 

the center of the vehicle. 

1-43

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the 

seating surface against the back of the infant. The 

harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, 

acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint. 

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for 

the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes 

with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields. 

1-44

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to 

improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. 

Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, 

and some high-back booster seats have a five-point 

harness. A booster seat can also help a child to see 

out the window. 

Q: How do child restraints work? 

A: A child restraint system is any device designed for 

use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position 

children. A built-in child restraint system is a 

permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on 

child restraint system is a portable one, which 

is purchased by the vehicle’s owner. 

For many years, add-on child restraints have used 

the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help 

reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be 

secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt 

system secures the add-on child restraint in the 

vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness 

system holds the child in place within the restraint. 

One system, the three-point harness, has straps that 

come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and 

buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness 

system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and a 

crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip 

straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that 

are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the 

child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has 

straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield 

that swings up or to the side. 

1-45

When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child 

restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, 

it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor 

vehicle safety standards. 

Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may 

find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a 

booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system 

in your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured 

within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal 

injury. When securing an add-on child restraint, refer 

to the instructions that come with the restraint which may 

be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and 

to this manual. The child restraint instructions are 

important, so if they are not available, obtain a 

replacement copy from the manufacturer. 

Where to Put the Restraint 

Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are 

restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. General 

Motors, therefore, recommends that child restraints be 

secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a 

rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing 

child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat. 

Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front 

passenger seat. Here’s why: 

{CAUTION: 

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be 

seriously injured or killed if the right front 

passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because 

the back of the rear-facing child restraint 

would be very close to the inflating air bag. 

Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in 

a rear seat. 

You may secure a forward-facing child 

restraint in the right front seat, but before you 

do, always move the front passenger seat as 

far back as it will go. It’s better to secure the 

child restraint in a rear seat. 

Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child 

restraint properly. 

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move 

around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in 

the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint 

in your vehicle – even when no child is in it. 

1-46

Top Strap 

Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.” 

It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision. 

For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored 

to the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints 

are designed for use with or without the top strap 

being anchored. Others require the top strap always to 

be anchored. Be sure to read and follow the 

instructions for your child restraint. If yours requires that 

the top strap be anchored, don’t use the restraint 

unless it is anchored properly. 

If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one 

can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. 

Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a 

kit is available. 

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child 

restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be 

anchored. In the United States, some child restraints 

also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a 

top strap, it should be anchored. 

Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor 

points. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the 

same side of the vehicle as the seating position 

where the child restraint will be placed. If you have an 

adjustable head restraint, route the top strap under it. 

1-47

If you’re using a top strap-equipped child restraint in the 

center rear seat and need to temporarily transport a 

flat tire for repair, move the child restraint to a rear seat 

outboard position. See Securing a Child Restraint in 

a Rear Outside Seat Position on page 1-52 for more on 

this, including important safety information. 

Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready 

to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top 

strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s 

instructions say. 

Top Strap Anchor Location 

Your vehicle has top strap anchors already installed for 

the rear seating positions. An anchor bar for a top 

strap is located at the rear of the seat cushion for each 

second row outboard seating position and the anchor 

bar for the center position bench seat is located on the 

floor behind the second row seats. If your vehicle 

has the sliding rear convenience tray, you need to 

remove a plastic plug and look under the convenience 

tray to find the anchor bar for the center position for the 

bench seat. 

Outside Position Bench Seat 

1-48

Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers 

for Children (LATCH System) 

Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You’ll find 

anchors (A) in both rear seat outside passenger 

positions. 

To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this child 

restraint system, each seating position with the 

LATCH system will have latches between the seatback 

and cushion. 

Center Position Bench Seat 

1-49

In order to use the system, you need either a 

forward-facing child restraint that has attaching 

points (B) at its base and a top tether anchor (C), or a 

rear-facing child restraint that has attaching points (B), 

as shown here. 

With this system, use the LATCH system instead of the 

vehicle’s safety belts to secure a child restraint. 

1-50

{CAUTION: 

If a LATCH-type child restraint isn’t attached to 

its anchorage points, the restraint won’t be 

able to protect a child sitting there. In a crash, 

the child could be seriously injured or killed. 

Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraint is 

properly installed using the anchorage points, 

or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the 

restraint. See ″Securing a Child Restraint in a 

Rear Outside Seat Position″ in the Index for 

information on how to secure a child restraint 

in your vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belts. 

Securing a Child Restraint Designed 

for the LATCH System 

1. Find the anchors for the seating position you want 

to use, where the bottom of the seatback meets the 

back of the seat cushion. 

2. Put the child restraint on the seat. 

3. Attach the anchor points on the child restraint to the 

anchors in the vehicle. The child restraint 

instructions will show you how. 

4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach the top 

strap to the top strap anchor. See Top Strap on 

page 1-47. Tighten the top strap according to 

the child restraint instructions. 

5. Push and pull the child restraint in different 

directions to be sure it is secure. 

To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top 

strap from the top tether anchor and then disconnect the 

anchor points. 

1-51


Rear Outside Seat Position 

If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH 

system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for 

Children (LATCH System) on page 1-49. 

You’ll be using the lap shoulder belt. See Top Strap on 

page 1-47 if the child restraint has one. Be sure to 

follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. 

Secure the child in the child restraint when and as 

the instructions say. 

1. Put the restraint on the seat. 

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder 

portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or 

around the restraint. The child restraint instructions 

will show you how. 

Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed. 

If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face 

or neck, put it behind the child restraint. 

1-52

4. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt 

while you push down on the child restraint. If 

you’re using a forward-facing child restraint, you 

may find it helpful to use you knee to push down on 

the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 



To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s 

safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety 

belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an 

adult or larger child passenger. 

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is 



1-53


Center Rear Seat Position 

See Top Strap on page 1-47 if the child restraint 

has one. 

The center rear seating position has a lap-shoulder belt. 

To secure a child restraint in this position, you’ll use 

only the lap part of the belt. Disconnect the shoulder part 

of the belt and store it before securing child restraint. 

See Center Rear Passenger Position on page 1-29. 

If you’re using a top strap-equipped child restraint in the 

center rear seat and need to temporarily transport a 

flat tire for repair, move the child restraint to a rear seat 

outboard position. See Securing a Child Restraint in 

a Rear Outside Seat Position on page 1-52 for more on 

this, including important safety information. 

Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the 

child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint 

when and as the instructions say. 

1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch 

plate and pulling it along the belt. 


3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the 

restraint. The child restraint instructions will show 

you how. 

1-54

5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push 

down on the child restraint. If you’re using a 

forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful 

to use your knee to push the child restraint as 

you tighten the belt. 




safety belt. When you remove the child restraint, be 

sure to reconnect the lap and shoulder parts of the belt 

so they will be ready to work for an adult or larger 

child passenger. 




1-55


Right Front Seat Position 

Your vehicle has a front passenger air bag. Never put a 

rear facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why: 

{CAUTION: 

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be 

seriously injured or killed if the front 

passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because 

the back of the rear-facing child restraint 

would be very close to the inflating air bag. 

Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in 

a rear seat. 

Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure a 

forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat. 

You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See Top Strap on 

page 1-47 if the child restraint has one. Be sure to 

follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. 

Secure the child in the child restraint when and as 

the instructions say. 

1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger’s 

air bag, always move the seat as far back as it will 

go before securing a forward-facing child restraint. 

See Manual Passenger Seat on page 1-2. 


3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder 

portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or 

around the restraint. The child restraint instructions 

will show you how. 

Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed. 

1-56

If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face 

or neck, put it behind the child restraint. 




1-57

5. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt 

while you push down on the child restraint. You 

may find it helpful to use your knee to push down 

on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 




safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety 

belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an 

adult or larger child passenger. 

1-58

Air Bag Systems 

This part explains the frontal and side impact air bag 

systems. 

Your vehicle has air bags – a frontal air bag for the 

driver and another frontal air bag for the right front 

passenger. Your vehicle may also have a side impact 

air bag. Side impact air bags are available for the driver 

and right front passenger. 

If your vehicle has a side impact air bag for the driver 

and/or the right front passenger, the words AIR BAG will 

appear on the air bag covering on the side of the 

seatback closest to the door. 

Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk 

of injury from the force of an inflating frontal air bag. 

But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do their 

job and comply with federal regulations. 

1-59

Here are the most important things to know about the 

air bag systems: 

CAUTION: 

(Continued) 

{CAUTION: 

You can be severely injured or killed in a crash 

if you aren’t wearing your safety belt — even if 

you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt 

during a crash helps reduce your chance of 

hitting things inside the vehicle or being 

ejected from it. Air bags are designed to work 

with safety belts but don’t replace them. 

Frontal air bags for the driver and right front 

passenger are designed to deploy only in 

moderate to severe frontal and near frontal 

crashes. They aren’t designed to inflate at all 

in rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, 

or in many side crashes. And, for some 

unrestrained occupants, frontal air bags may 

CAUTION: (Continued) 

provide less protection in frontal crashes than 

more forceful air bags have provided in 

the past. 

The side impact air bags for the driver and 

right front passenger are designed to inflate 

only in moderate to severe crashes where 

something hits the side of your vehicle. They 

aren’t designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover 

or in rear crashes. 

Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety 

belt properly — whether or not there’s an air 

bag for that person. 

1-60

{CAUTION: 

Both frontal and side impact air bags inflate 

with great force, faster than the blink of an 

eye. If you’re too close to an inflating air bag, 

as you would be if you were leaning forward, 

it could seriously injure you. Safety belts help 

keep you in position for air bag inflation before 

and during a crash. Always wear your safety 

belt, even with frontal air bags. The driver 

should sit as far back as possible while still 

maintaining control of the vehicle. Front 

occupants should not lean on or sleep against 

the door. 

{CAUTION: 

Anyone who is up against, or very close to, 

any air bag when it inflates can be seriously 

injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder 

belts offer the best protection for adults, but 

not for young children and infants. Neither the 

vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag 

system is designed for them. Young children 

and infants need the protection that a child 

restraint system can provide. Always secure 

children properly in your vehicle. To read how, 

see the part of this manual called “Older 

Children” or “Infants and Young Children.” 

1-61

There is an air bag 

readiness light on the 

instrument panel cluster, 

which shows the air 

bag symbol. 

Where Are the Air Bags? 

The system checks the air bag electrical system for 

malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical 

problem. See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3-32 

for more information. 

The driver’s frontal air bag is in the middle of the 

steering wheel. 

1-62

The right front passenger’s frontal air bag is in the 

instrument panel on the passenger’s side. 

If your vehicle has one, the driver’s side impact 

air bag is in the side of the driver’s seatback closest to 

the door. 

1-63

{CAUTION: 

If something is between an occupant and an 

air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it 

might force the object into that person causing 

severe injury or even death. The path of an 

inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t put 

anything between an occupant and an air bag, 

and don’t attach or put anything on the 

steering wheel hub or on or near any other air 

bag covering. Don’t let seat covers block the 

inflation path of a side impact air bag. 

If your vehicle has one, the right front passenger’s side 

impact air bag is in the side of the passenger’s 

seatback closest to the door. 

When Should an Air Bag Inflate? 

The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags 

are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal 

or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate 

only if the impact speed is above the system’s 

designed “threshold level.” 

If your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn’t 

move or deform, the threshold level is about 12 

to 19 mph (19 to 31 km/h). The threshold level can vary, 

however, with specific vehicle design, so that it can 

be somewhat above or below this range. 

1-64

If your vehicle strikes something that will move or 

deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be 

higher. The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal 

air bags are not designed to inflate in rollovers, rear 

impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation 

would not help the occupant. 

Your vehicle may or may not have a side impact air 

bag. See Air Bag Systems on page 1-59. Side impact air 

bags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe 

side crashes. A side impact air bag will inflate if 

the crash severity is above the system’s designed 

“threshold level.” The threshold level can vary with 

specific vehicle design. Side impact air bags are 

not designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts, 

rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would not 

help the occupant. A side impact air bag will only deploy 

on the side of the vehicle that is struck. 

In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air 

bag should have inflated simply because of the damage 

to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. 

For frontal air bags, inflation is determined by the angle 

of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down 

in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side impact 

air bags, inflation is determined by the location 

and severity of the impact. 

What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? 

In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing 

system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For 

both frontal and side impact air bags, the sensing 

system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which 

inflates the air bag. The inflator, the air bag and 

related hardware are all part of the air bag modules. 

Frontal air bag modules are located inside the steering 

wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with side 

impact air bags, the air bag modules are located in the 

seatback closest to the driver’s and/or right front 

passenger’s door. 

1-65

How Does an Air Bag Restrain? 

In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions, 

even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or 

the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side 

collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside 

of the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protection 

provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of 

the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper 

body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the 

frontal air bags would not help you in many types 

of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many 

side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion 

is not toward the air bag. Side impact air bags would not 

help you in many types of collisions, including frontal 

or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts, 

primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward 

those air bags. Air bags should never be regarded 

as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and 

then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal 

collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s 

frontal air bags, and only in moderate to severe 

side collisions for vehicles with a driver’s and right front 

passenger’s side impact air bag. 

What Will You See After an Air Bag 

Inflates? 

After the air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly 

that some people may not even realize the air bag 

inflated. Some components of the air bag module will be 

hot for a short time. These components include the 

steering wheel hub for the driver’s frontal air bag and the 

instrument panel for the right front passenger’s frontal 

air bag. For vehicles with side impact air bags, the side 

of the seatback closest to the driver’s and/or right 

front passenger’s door will be hot. The parts of the bag 

that come into contact with you may be warm, but 

not too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust 

coming from the vents in the deflated air bags. Air 

bag inflation doesn’t prevent the driver from seeing or 

being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop 

people from leaving the vehicle. 

1-66

{CAUTION: 

When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the 

air. This dust could cause breathing problems 

for people with a history of asthma or other 

breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in 

the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe 

to do so. If you have breathing problems but 

can’t get out of the vehicle after an air bag 

inflates, then get fresh air by opening a 

window or a door. If you experience breathing 

problems following an air bag deployment, you 

should seek medical attention. 

In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag, 

windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. 

Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the 

right front passenger air bag. 

• Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After an 

air bag inflates, you’ll need some new parts for your 

air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air bag 

system won’t be there to help protect you in another 

crash. A new system will include air bag modules 

and possibly other parts. The service manual for your 

vehicle covers the need to replace other parts. 

• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and 

diagnostic module, which records information about 

the frontal air bag system. The module records 

information about the readiness of the system, when 

the system commands air bag inflation and driver’s 

safety belt usage at deployment. The module also 

records speed, engine rpm, brake and throttle data. 

• Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag 

systems. Improper service can mean that an air bag 

system won’t work properly. See your dealer for 

service. 

Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s 

or the right front passenger’s air bag, or the air 

bag covering on the driver’s and right front 

passenger’s seatback, the bag may not work 

properly. You may have to replace the air bag 

module in the steering wheel, both the air bag 

module and the instrument panel for the right front 

passenger’s air bag, or both the air bag module 

and seatback for the driver’s and right front 

passenger’s side impact air bag. Do not open or 

break the air bag coverings. 

1-67

Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped 

Vehicle 

Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced. 

There are parts of the air bag systems in several places 

around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service 

manual have information about servicing your vehicle 

and the air bag systems. To purchase a service manual, 

see Service Publications Ordering Information on 

page 7-10. 

{CAUTION: 

For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is 

turned off and the battery is disconnected, 

an air bag can still inflate during improper 

service. You can be injured if you are close to 

an air bag when it inflates. Avoid yellow 

connectors. They are probably part of the air 

bag system. Be sure to follow proper service 

procedures, and make sure the person 

performing work for you is qualified to do so. 

Restraint System Check 

Checking Your Restraint Systems 

Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light 

and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors 

and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other 

loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see 

anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing 

its job, have it repaired. 

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a 

crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt 

is torn or frayed, get a new one right away. 

Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and 

have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system 

does not need regular maintenance.) 

The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance. 

1-68


After a Crash 

{CAUTION: 

A crash can damage the restraint systems in 

your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may 

not properly protect the person using it, 

resulting in serious injury or even death in a 

crash. To help make sure your restraint 

systems are working properly after a crash, 

have them inspected and any necessary 

replacements made as soon as possible. 

If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts or LATCH 

system parts? 

After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary. 

But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn 

during a more severe crash, then you need new parts. 

If the LATCH system was being used during a more 

severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts. 

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision 

damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH 

system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced. 

New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt 

or LATCH system wasn’t being used at the time of 

the collision. 

If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag 

system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier 

in this section. 

1-69

✍ NOTES 

1-70

Section 2 

Features and Controls 

Keys ...............................................................2-3 

Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-4 

Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-5 

Doors and Locks .............................................2-8 

Door Locks ....................................................2-8 

Power Door Locks ..........................................2-9 

Delayed Locking .............................................2-9 

Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................2-9 

Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-10 

Lockout Protection ........................................2-11 

Leaving Your Vehicle ....................................2-11 

Liftgate/Tailgate ............................................2-11 

Windows ........................................................2-13 

Power Windows ............................................2-14 

Sun Visors ...................................................2-14 

Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-15 

Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-15 

PASS-Key ® III ..............................................2-16 

PASS-Key ® III Operation ...............................2-17 

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-18 

New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-18 

Ignition Positions ..........................................2-19 

Starting Your Engine .....................................2-20 

Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-21 

Automatic Transaxle Operation .......................2-22 

Parking Brake ..............................................2-25 

Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-26 

Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-28 

Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-28 

Engine Exhaust ............................................2-29 

Running Your Engine While 

You Are Parked ........................................2-29 

Mirrors ...........................................................2-30 

Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-30 

Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-30 

Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-31 

OnStar ® System .............................................2-31 

2-1

Section 2 

Features and Controls 

Storage Areas ................................................2-32 

Glove Box ...................................................2-32 

Cupholder(s) ................................................2-33 

Overhead Console ........................................2-33 

Front Door Utility Packs .................................2-34 

Console/Cooler .............................................2-35 

Roof Rack System ........................................2-36 

Rear Storage Area ........................................2-39 

Convenience Net ..........................................2-39 

Cargo Cover ................................................2-40 

Cargo Net System ........................................2-40 

Sliding Rear Convenience Tray .......................2-41 

Sunroof .........................................................2-45 

Vehicle Personalization ...................................2-45 

Entering Programming Mode ..........................2-46 

Headlamp Exit Delay .....................................2-46 

Automatic Door Lock/Unlock ...........................2-47 

Delayed Locking ...........................................2-48 

Remote Driver Unlock Control ........................2-49 

Remote Lock and Unlock Confirmation .............2-50 

Exiting Programming Mode .............................2-51 

2-2

Keys 

{CAUTION: 

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition 

key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or 

others could be badly injured or even killed. 

They could operate the power windows or 

other controls or even make the vehicle move. 

Don’t leave the keys in a vehicle with children. 

2-3

This key can be used for 

the ignition as well as all 

door locks, the 

liftgate/tailgate lock and 

the storage compartments. 

If you need a new key, contact your dealer, who can 

obtain the correct key code. 

Your vehicle has the PASS-Key ® III vehicle theft 

system. The key has a transponder in the key head that 

matches a decoder in the vehicle’s steering column. 

If a replacement key or any additional key is needed, 

you must purchase this key from your dealer. The 

key will have PK3 stamped on it. Keep the bar code tag 

that came with the original keys. Give this tag to your 

dealer if you need a new key made. 

Any new PASS-Key ® III key must be programmed 

before it will start your vehicle. See PASS-Key ® III on 

page 2-16 for more information on programming 

your new key. 

Notice: Your vehicle has a number of features that 

can help prevent theft. You can have a lot of 

trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock 

your keys inside. You may even have to damage 

your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have 

spare keys. 

If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, call the 

Pontiac Roadside Assistance center. See Roadside 

Assistance Program on page 7-6 for more information. 

If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar ® system 

with an active subscription and you lock your keys inside 

the vehicle, OnStar ® may be able to send a command 

to unlock your vehicle. See OnStar ® System on 

page 2-31 for more information. 

Remote Keyless Entry System 

If equipped, the keyless entry system operates on a 

radio frequency subject to Federal Communications 

Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada. 

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. 

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 

1. This device may not cause interference, and 

2. This device must accept any interference received, 

including interference that may cause undesired 

operation of the device. 

2-4

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. 


1. This device may not cause interference, and 

2. This device must accept any interference received, 



Changes or modifications to this system by other than 

an authorized service facility could void authorization to 

use this equipment. 

At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is 

normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the 

transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer 

to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this: 

• Check the distance. You may be too far from your 

vehicle. You may need to stand closer during 

rainy or snowy weather. 

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may 

be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the 

left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and 

try again. 

• Check to determine if battery replacement is 

necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under 

Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on 

page 2-5. 

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a 

qualified technician for service. 

Remote Keyless Entry System 

Operation 

With this feature, you can 

lock and unlock your doors 

from about 3 feet (1 m) 

up to 30 feet (9 m) 

away using the remote 

keyless entry transmitter 

supplied with your vehicle. 

UNLOCK: Press UNLOCK to unlock only the driver’s 

door. If you press UNLOCK again within five seconds, 

the passengers’ doors will unlock. 

If you would like all the doors to unlock the first time 

you press UNLOCK, and your vehicle is equipped with 

the Driver Information Center (DIC), see DIC Vehicle 

Personalization on page 3-52. 

The UNLOCK button on the remote keyless entry 

transmitter will disarm the content theft-deterrent system. 

See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-15 for more 

information. 

2-5

If you would like to program the way the headlamps and 

parking lamps operate with remote unlock confirmation, 

and your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information 

Center (DIC), see DIC Vehicle Personalization on 

page 3-52. 

LOCK: To lock all doors, press LOCK. 

The LOCK button on the remote keyless entry 

transmitter will arm the content theft-deterrent system. 

See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-15 for more 

information. 

If you would like to program the way the headlamps, 

parking lamps and horn operate with remote lock 

confirmation,and your vehicle is equipped with the Driver 

Information Center (DIC), see DIC Vehicle 


REAR: To unlock the liftgate/tailgate, press REAR. 

See Liftgate/Tailgate on page 2-11 for more information. 

Remote Alarm 

L(Horn): Press this button to make the headlamps 

and parking lamps flash and the horn to sound. This will 

allow you to attract attention, if needed. 

Press the horn symbol again to stop the alarm from 

sounding. 

Matching Transmitter(s) to Your 

Vehicle 

Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to 

prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. 

If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can 

be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring 

any remaining transmitters with you when you go to 

your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement 

transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters 

must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the 

new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock 

your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of four 

transmitters matched to it. 

See your dealer to match transmitters to another 

vehicle. 

2-6

Battery Replacement 

Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless 

entry transmitter should last about three years. 

United States 

Canada 

You can tell the battery is weak if the KEY FOB 

BATTERY LOW message appears in the message 

center. If you get this message, the battery in the key 

fob needs to be replaced. 

Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to 

touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body 

transferred to these surfaces may damage the 

transmitter. 

1. Insert a flat object, such as a coin, into the slot on 

the side of the transmitter and twist to separate the 

halves. 

2. Gently pry the battery out of the transmitter. Do not 

use the metal flanges to pop out the battery. 

3. Replace the battery. 

4. Reassemble the transmitter. Make sure the halves 

are snapped together tightly so water will not get in. 

5. Press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons for 

seven seconds to synchronize the transmitter. 

6. Check the transmitter operation. 

2-7

Doors and Locks 

Door Locks 

{CAUTION: 

Unlocked doors can be dangerous. 

• Passengers — especially children — can 

easily open the doors and fall out of a 

moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the 

handle won’t open it. You increase the 

chance of being thrown out of the vehicle 

in a crash if the doors aren’t locked. So, 

wear safety belts properly and lock the 

doors whenever you drive. 

• Young children who get into unlocked 

vehicles may be unable to get out. A child 

can be overcome by extreme heat and can 

suffer permanent injuries or even death 

from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle 

whenever you leave it. 

• Outsiders can easily enter through an 

unlocked door when you slow down or 

stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can 

help prevent this from happening. 

There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle. 

From the outside, use your key or the remote keyless 

entry transmitter. 

To unlock either front door from the outside with the 

key, insert the key and turn it toward the front of 

the vehicle. To lock either front door from the outside 

with your key, insert the key and turn it toward the rear 

of the vehicle. 

From the inside, use the manual or power door locks. 

To unlock either front door from the inside, pull back on 

the manual lever. To lock either front door from the 

inside, push the manual lever forward. 

2-8

Power Door Locks 

The power door lock 

switch is located on the 

driver’s and front 

passenger’s door armrest. 

Press the front of the switch to lock all doors, or press 

the rear of the switch to unlock all doors. 

The rear doors do not have power door lock switches. 

Instead, each rear door has a manual lever that 

works only that door’s lock. 

If your vehicle is equipped with the content 

theft-deterrent system, the power door lock switch may 

cause the system to arm. See Content Theft-Deterrent 

on page 2-15 for more information. 

Delayed Locking 

With the delayed locking feature, the doors will not lock 

immediately when locking the doors using the power 

door lock switch or when LOCK on the remote keyless 

entry transmitter is pressed while any door is open. 

Instead, three chimes will be heard to indicate that the 

delayed locking feature is in operation. Five seconds 

after all doors are closed, the doors will lock 

automatically. 

If the ignition is in ON or ACCESSORY, this feature will 

not lock the doors. 

If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information 


page 3-52 to program the delayed locking feature. 

Programmable Automatic 

Door Locks 

All of the doors will automatically lock when all doors 

are closed, the engine is running and the shift lever 

is shifted out of PARK (P). All of the doors will 

automatically unlock when the shift lever is shifted into 

PARK (P). 

2-9

With the automatic door lock feature, you can still lock 

or unlock the doors at any time, either manually, with the 

power door lock switches or by pressing LOCK on the 

remote keyless entry transmitter. See Remote Keyless 

Entry System Operation on page 2-5 for more 

information. 



page 3-52 to program the automatic door lock feature. 

2. On the inside of the 

rear door will be a 

lock. Push the lever 

up to engage the 

safety lock. 

Rear Door Security Locks 

Your vehicle is equipped with rear door security locks 

that help prevent passengers from opening the rear 

doors on your vehicle from the inside. To use one 

of these locks do the following: 

1. Open one of the rear doors. 

3. Close the door. 

4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for the other rear 

door lock. 

The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened from 

inside the vehicle when this feature is in use. If you 

want to open the rear door when the security lock is on, 

unlock the door from the inside and then open the 

door from the outside. 

2-10

Canceling the Rear Door 

Security Locks 

1. Unlock and open the rear door from the outside. 

2. Push the lever down to disengage the safety lock. 

3. Close the door. 

4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for the other rear 

door lock. 

The rear door locks will now work normally. 

Lockout Protection 

The lockout protection feature may prevent you from 

locking your key in your vehicle. Pressing the power 

door lock switch will lock all doors, then unlock 

the driver’s door, if the key is in the ignition when a door 

is opened. 

If you leave the key in your vehicle but not in the 

ignition or if you use the manual door lock, you could 

still lock the key in the vehicle. Always remember to take 

the key with you. 

Leaving Your Vehicle 

If you are leaving the vehicle, take your key, open your 

door and set the locks from the inside. Then get out 

and close the door. 

Liftgate/Tailgate 

{CAUTION: 

It can be dangerous to drive with the 

liftgate/tailgate open because carbon 

monoxide (CO) gas can come into your 

vehicle. You can’t see or smell CO. It can 

cause unconsciousness and even death. If you 

must drive with the liftgate/tailgate open or if 

electrical wiring or other cable connections 

must pass through the seal between the body 

and the liftgate/tailgate: 

• Make sure all other windows are shut. 

• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling 

system to its highest speed and select the 

control setting that will force outside air 

into your vehicle. See “Climate Control 

System” in the Index. 

• If you have air outlets on or under the 

instrument panel, open them all the way. 

See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index. 

2-11

Liftgate/Tailgate Release 

To open the liftgate from 

the inside of the vehicle, 

press the liftgate release 

button located on the 

instrument panel 

switchbank. 

To open the liftgate from the outside of the vehicle, 

insert the key into the lock and turn it clockwise, or press 

REAR on the remote keyless entry transmitter. 

Your vehicle must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) for 

the liftgate to release. 

The liftgate will lock when closed. You will have to use 

one of the previous options to open the liftgate again. 

The liftgate must be opened to release the tailgate. 

Once the liftgate is opened, reach inside the tailgate to 

lift the handle. Open the tailgate. 

Make sure the tailgate is closed before closing the 

liftgate. 

Notice: Damage or breakage will occur to the 

liftgate if the tailgate is not closed before closing 

the liftgate. 

2-12

Windows 

{CAUTION: 

Leaving children in a vehicle with the windows 

closed is dangerous. A child can be overcome 

by the extreme heat and can suffer permanent 

injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never 

leave a child alone in a vehicle, especially with 

the windows closed in warm or hot weather. 

2-13

Power Windows 

Switches on the driver’s door armrest control each of 

the windows when the ignition is in ON, ACCESSORY, 

or when Retained Accessory Power is active. See 

“Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” under Ignition 

Positions on page 2-19 for more information. In addition, 

each passenger’s door has a window switch. 

The driver’s power window switch has two down 

positions. Push the rear of the switch to the first position 

to lower the window normally. 

Press the rear of any passenger window switch and that 

window will open. Press the front of any switch to 

close the window. 

Express-Down Window 

The driver’s window switch also has an express-down 

feature. This switch is labeled AUTO. To activate 

the express-down feature, push the rear of the driver’s 

window switch to the second position, then release 

it. The window will lower completely. 

To stop the window while it is lowering, press the front 

of the switch. To raise the window, press and hold 

the front of the switch. 

Window Lock Out 

The driver’s window controls also include a lock-out 

switch. Press the right side of the WDO LOCK switch to 

stop rear passengers from lowering their window. 

The driver can still control all of the windows with the 

lock on. Press the other side of the WDO LOCK switch 

for normal window operation. 

Sun Visors 

To block out glare you can swing down the visors. You 

can also remove them from the center mount and 

swing them to the side. There may be an extension on 

the inboard side of the sun visors. Pull the extension 

out to block out glare. 

Visor Vanity Mirror 

Pull down the sun visor. Flip up the cover to expose the 

vanity mirror. 

2-14

Theft-Deterrent Systems 

Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities. 

Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent 

features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it 

impossible to steal. 

Content Theft-Deterrent 

Your vehicle may have a theft-deterrent alarm system. 

A light located on top of 

the instrument panel (near 

the center of the vehicle, 

next to the windshield) will 

flash slowly to let you 

know that the system has 

been armed. 

While armed, the doors will not unlock with the power 

door lock switch. 

Once armed, the alarm will go off if someone tries to 

open one of the doors on the vehicle without the remote 

keyless entry transmitter or the key, or tries to turn 

the ignition without using the correct key. The horn will 

sound and the headlamps and parking lamps will 

flash any time the alarm sounds. 

If you would like to change the way the headlamps, 

parking lamps and horn operate with the content 

theft-deterrent system, and your vehicle is equipped 

with the Driver Information Center (DIC), see DIC 

Vehicle Personalization on page 3-52. 

When the content theft-deterrent system is armed, the 

liftgate/tailgate may be opened by using one of the 

following methods: 

• From the outside, insert the key into the lock and 

turn it clockwise, or 

• press REAR on the remote keyless entry 

transmitter. 

When the content theft-deterrent system is armed, 

pressing the liftgate release button, located on 

the instrument panel switchbank, will cause the alarm 

to sound. 

2-15

Arming with the Power Lock Switch 

Your alarm system will arm when you use either power 

door lock switch to lock the doors while any door or 

the liftgate/tailgate is open and the key is removed from 

the ignition. The security light will start flashing to let 

you know the system is armed. 

Arming with the Remote Keyless Entry 

Transmitter 

Your alarm system will arm when you press LOCK on 

your remote keyless entry transmitter to lock the 

doors. The security light will start flashing to let you 

know the system is armed. 

Disarming with Your Key 

Your alarm system will disarm when you use your key 

to unlock the front doors. The security light will stop 

flashing to let you know the system is no longer armed. 

Disarming with the Remote Keyless 

Entry Transmitter 

Your alarm system will disarm when you press UNLOCK 

on your remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock the 

doors. The security light will stop flashing to let you know 

the system is no longer armed. 

PASS-Key ® III 

Your PASS-Key ® III system operates on a radio 

frequency subject to Federal Communications 

Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada. 

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. 


(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 

(2) this device must accept any interference received, 


operation. 

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. 


(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this 

device must accept any interference received, 



Changes or modifications to this system by other than 

an authorized service facility could void authorization to 

use this equipment. 

PASS-Key ® III uses a radio frequency transponder in 

the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle. 

2-16

PASS-Key ® III Operation 

Your vehicle is equipped 

with the PASS-Key ® III 

(Personalized Automotive 

Security System) 

theft-deterrent system. 

PASS-Key ® III is a passive 

theft deterrent system. 

This means you don’t have 

to do anything different 

to arm or disarm the 

system. It works when you 

insert or remove the key 

from the ignition. 

When the PASS-Key ® III system senses that someone 

is using the wrong key, it shuts down the vehicle’s 

starter and fuel systems. The starter will not work and 

fuel will stop being delivered to the engine. Anyone 

using a trial-and-error method to start the vehicle will be 

discouraged because of the high number of electrical 

key codes. 

When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does not 

start and the SECURITY message comes on, the 

key may have a damaged transponder. Turn the ignition 

off and try again. 

If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to 

be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time, 

you may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses 

and Circuit Breakers on page 5-92. If the engine still 

does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs 

service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may be 

faulty. See your dealer who can service the 

PASS-Key ® III to have a new key made. 

It is possible for the PASS-Key ® III decoder to learn the 

transponder value of a new or replacement key. Up 

to 10 total keys may be programmed for the vehicle. 

This procedure is for learning additional keys only. If all 

the currently programmed keys are lost or do not 

operate, you must see your dealer or a locksmith who 

can service PASS-Key ® III to have keys made and 

programmed to the system. 

See your dealer who can service PASS-Key ® III to get a 

new key blank that is a cut exactly as the ignition key 

that operates the system. 

Canadian Owners: If you lose or damage your keys, 

only a GM dealer can service PASS-Key ® III to 

have new keys made. To program additional keys you 

will need two current driver’s keys (black in color). 

You must add a step to the following procedure. After 

Step 3, repeat Steps 1 through 3 with the second current 

driver’s key. Then continue with Step 4. 

2-17

To program the new PK3 ® key do the following: 

1. Verify the new key has PK3 ® stamped on it. 

2. Insert the current driver’s key in the ignition and 

start the engine. If the engine will not start, see 

your dealer for service. 

3. After the engine has started, turn the key to OFF, 

and remove the key. 

4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to ON 

within 10 seconds of removing the previous key. 

5. The SECURITY message will turn off once the key 

has been programmed. It may not be apparent that 

the SECURITY message went on due to how 

quickly the key is programmed. 

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to 

be programmed. 

If you are ever driving and the SECURITY message 

comes on and stays on, you will be able to restart your 

engine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key ® III system, 

however, is not working properly and must be serviced 

by your dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by the 

PASS-Key ® III system at this time. 

If you lose or damage a PASS-Key ® III key, see your 

dealer who can service PASS-Key ® III to have a 

new key made. 

Starting and Operating Your 

Vehicle 

New Vehicle Break-In 

Notice: Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate 

“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long run 

if you follow these guidelines: 

• If you have all-wheel drive, keep your speed 

at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for the first 500 

miles (805 km). 

• Don’t drive at any one speed — fast or 

slow — for the first 500 miles (805 km). Don’t 

make full-throttle starts. 

• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles 

(322 km) or so. During this time your new 

brake linings aren’t yet broken in. Hard stops 

with new linings can mean premature wear and 

earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in 

guideline every time you get new brake linings. 

• Don’t tow a trailer during break-in. See “Towing 

a Trailer” in the Index for more information. 

2-18

Ignition Positions 

With the key in the ignition, you can turn the key to four 

different positions. 

A (OFF): This is the only position in which you can 

remove the key. This position locks the steering wheel, 

ignition and transaxle. 

Notice: If your key seems stuck in OFF and you 

can’t turn it, be sure you are using the correct key; 

if so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the 

steering wheel left and right while you turn the key 

hard. Turn the key only with your hand. Using a 

tool to force it could break the key or the ignition 

switch. If none of these works, then your vehicle 

needs service. 

B (ACCESSORY): This position allows you to use 

things like the radio and the windshield wipers while the 

engine is off. This position will allow you to turn off 

the engine, but still turn the steering wheel. Use 

ACCESSORY if you must have your vehicle in motion 

while the engine is off, for example, if your vehicle 

is being pushed or towed. 

C (ON): This is the position that the switch returns to 

after you start your engine and release the key. 

The switch stays in ON when the engine is running. But 

even when the engine is not running, you can use 

ON to operate your electrical power accessories, and to 

display some instrument panel warning lights. 

D (START): This position starts the engine. When the 

engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch 

will return to ON for normal driving. 

If the engine is not running, ACCESSORY and ON are 

positions that allow you to operate your electrical 

accessories, such as the radio. 

2-19

Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 

With RAP, the power windows, the audio system, the 

sunroof and the Automatic Level Control will continue to 

work up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned 

to OFF and none of the doors are opened. 

Starting Your Engine 

Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). 

Your engine won’t start in any other position – that’s a 

safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving, 

use NEUTRAL (N) only. 

Notice: Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your 

vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the 

transaxle. Shift to PARK (P) only when your 

vehicle is stopped. 

1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your 

ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let 

go of the key. The idle speed will go down as 

your engine warms up. 

Notice: Holding your key in START for longer 

than 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery 

to be drained much sooner. And the excessive 

heat can damage your starter motor. Wait about 

15 seconds between each try to help avoid 

draining your battery or damaging your starter. 

2. If the engine doesn’t start in 10 seconds, push the 

accelerator pedal about one-quarter of the way 

down while you turn the key to START. Do this until 

the engine starts. As soon as it does, let go of 

the key. 

3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then 

stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline. 

Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the 

floor and holding it there as you hold the key in 

START for a maximum of 15 seconds. This clears 

the extra gasoline from the engine. If the engine 

still won’t start or starts briefly but then stops again, 

repeat Step 1 or 2, depending on the temperature. 

When the engine starts, release the key and 

the accelerator pedal. 

Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the 

electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical 

parts or accessories, you could change the way the 

engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment, 

check with your dealer. If you don’t, your engine 

might not perform properly. 

2-20

Engine Coolant Heater 

Your vehicle may have an engine coolant heater. In 

very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine 

coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting 

and better fuel economy during engine warm-up. 

Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a 

minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. 

At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant 

heater is not required. 

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 

1. Turn off the engine. 

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. 

The electrical cord is located on the driver’s side 

of the engine compartment. 

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet. 

{CAUTION: 

Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet 

could cause an electrical shock. Also, the 

wrong kind of extension cord could overheat 

and cause a fire. You could be seriously 

injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded 

three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord 

won’t reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong 

extension cord rated for at least 15 amps. 

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and 

store the cord as it was before to keep it away 

from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could be 

damaged. 

How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged 

in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the 

kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead 

of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact 

your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your 

vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that 

particular area. 

2-21

Automatic Transaxle Operation 

Maximum engine speed is 

limited when you’re in 

PARK (P) or 

NEUTRAL (N), to protect 

driveline components 

from improper operation. 

There are several different positions for your shift lever. 

PARK (P): This gear position locks your front wheels. 

It’s the best position to use when you start your 

engine because your vehicle can’t move easily. 

Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting 

the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle 

shift lock control system. You have to fully apply 

your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) 

when the ignition key is in ON. As you step on the 

brake pedal, while in PARK (P), you may hear a click 

from the solenoid of the system. This ensures that 

the system is operating properly. 

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on 

the shift lever — push the shift lever all the way 

into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then 

hold the button on the lever and move the shift lever 

into the gear you wish. See Shifting Out of Park (P) on 

page 2-28 in this section for more information. 

{CAUTION: 

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the 

shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the 

parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. 

Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is 

running unless you have to. If you have left the 

engine running, the vehicle can move 

suddenly. You or others could be injured. To 

be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when 

you’re on fairly level ground, always set your 

parking brake and move the shift lever to 

PARK (P). See “Shifting Into Park (P)” in the 

Index. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a 

Trailer” in the Index. 

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up. 

2-22

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle 

is moving forward could damage your transaxle. 

Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is 

stopped. 

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, 

ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see If 

You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on 

page 4-30. 

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t 

connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already 

moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use 

NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed. 

{CAUTION: 

Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is 

“racing” (running at high speed) is dangerous. 

Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, 

your vehicle could move very rapidly. You 

could lose control and hit people or objects. 

Don’t shift into a drive gear while your engine 

is racing. 

Notice: Damage to your transaxle caused by 

shifting into a drive gear with the engine racing isn’t 

covered by your warranty. 

AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for 

normal driving. If you need more power for passing, 

and you’re: 

• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push your 

accelerator pedal about halfway down. 

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the 

accelerator all the way down. 

You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power. 

Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up rather 

slowly, or if it seems not to shift gears as you go 

faster, something may be wrong with a transaxle 

system sensor. If you drive very far that way, your 

vehicle can be damaged. So, if this happens, 

have your vehicle serviced right away. Until then, 

you can use SECOND (2) when you are driving 

less than 35 mph (55 km/h) and AUTOMATIC 

OVERDRIVE (D) for higher speeds. 

Warm-Up Shift 

Your vehicle has a computer controlled transaxle 

designed to warm up the engine faster when the outside 

temperature is 35°F (2°C) or colder. You may notice 

that the transaxle will shift at a higher vehicle speed until 

the engine is warmed up. This is a normal condition 

designed to provide heat to the passenger compartment 

and defrost the windows more quickly. 

2-23

THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving, 

but it offers more power and lower fuel economy than 

AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D). 

Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3) 

instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): 

• When driving on hilly, winding roads. 

• When towing a trailer (so there is less shifting 

between gears). 

• When going down a steep hill. 

SECOND (2): This position gives you more power, but 

lower fuel economy than THIRD (3). You can use 

SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as 

you go down steep mountain roads, but then you 

would also want to use your brakes off and on. 

Notice: Don’t drive in SECOND (2) for more than 

25 miles (40 km), or at speeds over 55 mph 

(90 km/h), or you can damage your transaxle. Use 

THIRD (3) or AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) as 

much as possible. Don’t shift into SECOND (2) 

unless you are going slower than 65 mph (105 km/h) 

or you can damage your engine. 

Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up rather 

slowly, or if it seems not to shift gears as you go 

faster, something may be wrong with a transaxle 

system sensor. If you drive very far that way, your 

vehicle can be damaged. So, if this happens, 

have your vehicle serviced right away. Until then, 

you can use SECOND (2) when you are driving less 

than 35 mph (55 km/h) and THIRD (3) for higher 

speeds. 

FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power, 

but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use 

it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the 

shift lever is put in FIRST (1), the transaxle won’t 

downshift into first gear until the vehicle is going slow 

enough. 

Notice: If your front wheels won’t turn, don’t try to 

drive. This might happen if you were stuck in 

very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid 

object. You could damage your transaxle. Also, 

if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold your 

vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal. This 

could overheat and damage the transaxle. Use your 

brakes to hold your vehicle in position on a hill. 

2-24

Shift Lock Release 

This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock 

release system. The shift lock release is designed to do 

the following: 

• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever is 

in PARK (P) (with the shift lever button fully 

released), and 

• prevent movement of the shift lever out of PARK (P) 

unless the ignition is in a position other than OFF. 

The shift lock release is always functional except in the 

case of a discharged or low voltage (less than 9V) 

battery. 

Parking Brake 

The parking brake is 

located on the driver’s 

side under the 

instrument panel. 

To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal 

down with your right foot and push down on the parking 

brake pedal with your left foot. 

If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will 

come on. See Brake System Warning Light on 

page 3-33. 

2-25

To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake 

pedal down with your right foot while you push down on 

the parking brake pedal with your left foot. (To release 

the tension on the parking brake cable, you will need to 

apply about the same amount of pressure to the 

parking brake pedal as you did when you set the parking 

brake.) When you remove your foot from the parking 

brake pedal, it will pop up to the released position. 

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can cause 

your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to 

replace them, and you could also damage other 

parts of your vehicle. 

If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill, 

see Towing a Trailer on page 4-34. That section shows 

what to do first to keep the trailer from moving. 

Shifting Into Park (P) 

{CAUTION: 

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle 

if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with 

the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can 

roll. If you have left the engine running, the 

vehicle can move suddenly. You or others 

could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t 

move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, 

use the steps that follow. If you’re pulling a 

trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. 

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and 

set the parking brake with your left foot. 

2-26

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this: 

3. Hold in the button on 

the lever. 

Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine 

Running 

{CAUTION: 

• Push the lever all the way toward the front of 

the vehicle. 

4. Turn the ignition key to OFF. 

5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can 

leave your vehicle with the key, your vehicle is in 

PARK (P). 

It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with 

the engine running. Your vehicle could move 

suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in 

PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. 

And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine 

running, it could overheat and even catch fire. 

You or others could be injured. Don’t leave 

your vehicle with the engine running. 

If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine 

running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your 

parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After 

you’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold 

the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can 

move the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first 

pulling it toward you. If you can, it means that the 

shift lever wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P). 

2-27

Torque Lock 

If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your 

transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of 

the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl 

in the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the 

shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” 

To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and 

then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the 

driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P) 

on page 2-26. 

When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of 

PARK (P) before you release the parking brake. 

If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another 

vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the 

pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you 

can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). 

Shifting Out of Park (P) 

Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock 

control system. You have to fully apply your regular 

brakes before you can shift from PARK (P), when 

the ignition is in ON. See Automatic Transaxle Operation 

on page 2-22. 

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on 

the shift lever by pushing the shift lever all the way into 

PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then 

hold the button on the lever and move the shift lever out 

of PARK (P). 

Parking Over Things That Burn 

{CAUTION: 

Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust 

parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park 

over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things 

that can burn. 

2-28

Engine Exhaust 

{CAUTION: 

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas 

carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or 

smell. It can cause unconsciousness and 

death. 

You might have exhaust coming in if: 

• Your exhaust system sounds strange or 

different. 

• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath. 

• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision. 

• Your vehicle was damaged when driving 

over high points on the road or over road 

debris. 

• Repairs weren’t done correctly. 

• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been 

modified improperly. 

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into 

your vehicle: 

• Drive it only with all the windows down to 

blow out any CO; and 

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately. 

Running Your Engine While 

You Are Parked 

It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you 

ever have to, here are some things to know. 

{CAUTION: 

Idling the engine with the climate control 

system off could allow dangerous exhaust into 

your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under 

“Engine Exhaust.” 

Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly 

carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if 

the climate control fan is at the highest setting. 

One place this can happen is a garage. 

Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily. 

NEVER park in a garage with the engine 

running. 

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. 

See “Winter Driving” in the Index. 

2-29

{CAUTION: 

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle 

if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with 

the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can 

roll. Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine 

is running unless you have to. If you’ve left the 

engine running, the vehicle can move 

suddenly. You or others could be injured. To 

be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when 

you’re on fairly level ground, always set your 

parking brake and move the shift lever to 

PARK (P). 

Mirrors 

Manual Rearview Mirror 

To reduce glare from headlamps behind you, pull the 

lever toward you (to the night position). To return the 

mirror to the day position, push the lever away from you. 

Outside Power Mirrors 

The power outside 

rearview mirror knob 

is located on the 

driver’s door. 

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t 

move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-26. 

If you’re pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on 

page 4-34. 

Turn the knob counterclockwise to adjust the driver’s 

side mirror. Turn the knob clockwise to adjust the 

passenger’s side mirror. After selecting which mirror to 

adjust, move the knob in the direction you want the 

mirror to go. 

2-30

If you are not adjusting either mirror, leave the control in 

the center (off) position. This prevents moving the 

mirrors accidentally once you have adjusted them. 

Adjust each mirror so you can see the side of your 

vehicle and the area behind your vehicle. 

Outside Convex Mirror 

Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex 

mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the 

driver’s seat. 

{CAUTION: 

A convex mirror can make things (like other 

vehicles) look farther away than they really are. 

If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you 

could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your 

inside mirror or glance over your shoulder 

before changing lanes. 

OnStar ® System 

OnStar ® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite 

technology, wireless communications, and call centers 

to provide you with a wide range of safety, security, 

information and convenience services. An OnStar ® 

subscription plan is included in the price of your vehicle. 

You can upgrade or extend your OnStar ® services to 

meet your needs. 

A complete OnStar ® user’s guide and the terms and 

conditions of the OnStar ® Subscription Service 

Agreement are included in your vehicle’s glove box 

literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com, 

contact OnStar ® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827), 

or press the blue OnStar ® button to speak to an 

OnStar ® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. 

2-31

OnStar ® Services 

OnStar ® provides a number of service plans. Some of 

the services currently provided by OnStar ® are: 

• Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment 

• Emergency Services 

• Roadside Assistance Stolen Vehicle Tracking 

• AccidentAssist 

• Remote Door Unlock 

• Remote Diagnostics 

• Online and Personal Concierge Services 

• Route Support 

• RideAssist 

• Information and Convenience Services 

OnStar ® Personal Calling 

With OnStar ® Personal Calling, you have a safer way to 

stay connected while driving. It’s a hands-free wireless 

phone that’s integrated into your vehicle. You can place 

calls nationwide using voice-activated dialing with no 

contracts, no roaming charges and no access fees. To 

find out more about OnStar ® Personal Calling, refer 

to the OnStar ® user’s guide in your vehicle’s glove box, 

or call OnStar ® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827). 

OnStar ® Virtual Advisor 

With OnStar ® Virtual Advisor you can listen to the news, 

entertainment and informative topics, such as traffic 

and weather reports. You are able to listen and reply to 

your e-mail through your vehicle’s speakers. 

A completed Subscription Service Agreement is required 

prior to delivery of OnStar ® services and prepaid 

calling minutes are also required for OnStar ® Personal 

Calling and OnStar ® Virtual Advisor use. Terms and 

conditions of the Subscription Service Agreement can be 

found at www.onstar.com. 

Storage Areas 

Glove Box 

If the glove box has a lock, put your key into the lock 

and turn the key counterclockwise. To open the 

glovebox, pull the latch release. 

The glove box door has a detent to prevent the door 

from lowering too far. Open the glove box until the door 

is partway open, then pull the door down if you need 

it fully opened. 

To close the glove box, the door must be pushed up 

past the detent. To lock the glovebox, put your key into 

the lock and turn the key clockwise. 

2-32

Cupholder(s) 

There are cupholders located in the center console next 

to the shift lever. 

The cupholders have liners that remove for larger 

beverage items. Remove the liners by lifting them out. 

Store the liners in the glove box when not in use. 

Your vehicle also has cupholders located in the rear 

passenger doors and the tailgate. 

Overhead Console 

If your vehicle has the overhead console it has a 

storage compartment, a compartment for your garage 

door opener and a compartment for your sunglasses. 

If your vehicle has the OnStar ® System, the OnStar ® 

buttons will replace the front storage compartment. 

See OnStar ® System on page 2-31 for more information. 

Garage Door Opener Compartment 

You can store and operate your garage door opener 

in the third compartment of your overhead console. 

To install your garage door opener, follow these 

instructions: 

1. Open the compartment by pressing the latch 

forward. 

2. Remove the garage door opener button, by pressing 

the tabs and pulling it down. 

3. Remove the piece of self-sticking hook and loop 

fastener from the top of the garage door opener 

compartment. 

2-33

4. Peel the protective backing from the hook and loop 

fastener and press it firmly to the back of your 

garage door opener. 

5. Line up the button on the garage door opener with 

the opening in the storage compartment door. Make 

sure the garage door opener button is facing 

down and then press the opener firmly into the 

garage door opener compartment. 

6. Once the opener is installed, remove the three pegs 

from the garage door opener button. Each peg is a 

different size. 

7. Put the garage door opener button back in by 

inserting the tabs into the slot in the garage 

door opener compartment. 

8. Press the button on the garage door storage 

compartment. If your garage door opener does not 

work you will need to change the pegs until it does. 

Storage Compartment 

To open the storage compartment, located at the front 

of the overhead console, press the release latch 

forward. Then pull the compartment down to the full 

open position. 

Sunglasses Storage Compartment 

To open the sunglasses storage compartment in the 

overhead console, press the release button. Then pull 

the compartment down to the full open position. 

Front Door Utility Packs 

Your vehicle may have front door utility packs. If it does, 

the utility packs are located in the front door pockets 

of your vehicle, and are used for extra storage space. 

2-34

Console/Cooler 

{CAUTION: 

If the cooler storage compartment isn’t 

secured properly, it can move around in a 

collision or sudden stop. People in the vehicle 

could be injured. Be sure to secure the cooler 

storage compartment properly. 

Your vehicle may have a fully insulated food/beverage 

console/cooler located between the driver’s and 

front passenger’s seats. 

To properly secure the console/cooler the handle must 

be latched down. Push the handle toward the driver’s 

seat, until you hear a click. 

To open the console/cooler, have the handle fully down 

toward the passenger’s seat, then lift the lid up. The 

passenger’s seat armrest must be up to be able to open 

the lid completely. 

The console/cooler contains a top tray for storage. 

Remove the top tray to put items in the cooler. 

The cooler also can hold compact discs, cassette tapes, 

and it may have a coinholder. 

To remove the console/cooler from the vehicle, lift the 

handle from the driver’s side to a fully upright position. 

Notice: Your warranty does not cover parts or 

components that fail because of overloading. 

2-35

Roof Rack System 

{CAUTION: 

If you try to carry something on top of your 

vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage 

carrier — like paneling, plywood, a mattress 

and so forth — the wind can catch it as you 

drive along. This can cause you to lose 

control. What you are carrying could be 

violently torn off, and this could cause you or 

other drivers to have a collision, and of course 

damage your vehicle. You may be able to carry 

something like this inside. But, never carry 

something longer or wider than the luggage 

carrier on top of your vehicle. 

If you have the luggage carrier, you can load things on 

top of your vehicle. If you do load things on the top 

of your vehicle, you must load them on the luggage 

carrier crossrails. The luggage carrier has four tie-down 

loops on the inside of each right and left side rail. 

These let you secure cargo placed on the crossrails, 

as long as they are not wider or longer than the 

luggage carrier. 

Notice: Damage may be caused to the roof of your 

vehicle if anything is placed directly on the roof. 

2-36

To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re driving, 

check now and then to make sure the luggage 

carrier and cargo are still securely fastened. 

Loading things onto the luggage carrier can interfere 

with the performance of your XM Satellite Radio 

System. 

Notice: Loading cargo that weighs more than 

220 lbs. (100 kg) on the luggage carrier may damage 

your vehicle. 

When you carry cargo on the luggage carrier of a 

proper size and weight, put it on the slats and distribute 

the weight evenly. Then slide the crossrail up against 

the rear of the load to keep it from moving. You can then 

tie it down. Cargo containers must be loaded on the 

crossrails only. 

Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when 

loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle 

capacity and loading, see Loading Your Vehicle on 

page 4-32. 

Your luggage carrier has release levers within the end 

of each crossrail support. 

2-37

To adjust the crossrails, lift the release levers on each 

side to unlock them. Slide the crossrails forward or 

backward, as needed, to accommodate loads of 

various sizes. 

After repositioning the crossrails, engage the release 

lever. This will lock the crossrails in place. 

Notice: Do not open the sunroof if the crossrails 

are not in the full rear position. This could cause 

damage to the sunroof glass panel and/or the 

crossrails. 

To adjust the crossrail(s), the sunroof stop (A) must be 

removed. 

To remove the sunroof stop, do the following: 

1. Find the tool (B) located in a bag in the glovebox 

labeled “tool kit-acsry.” 

2. Use the tool to remove the screw located in the 

side rail assembly in front of the front crossrail. 

3. Repeat for the other side. 

4. Put the tool and the screws back in the plastic bag 

in the glove box. 

Use the four tie-down 

loops in each of the 

side rails to help 

secure large loads. 

When you are done using the crossrails you must 

replace the sunroof stop. 

2-38

To replace the sunroof stop, do the following: 

1. Put the crossrails in the full rear position. 

2. Using the tool, put the screws back into each side 

rail assembly. Make sure the screws are in the first 

hole in front of the crossrail. 

Rear Storage Area 

There are four small storage compartments in the rear 

of your vehicle. One is on the passenger’s side, two 

are on the driver’s side and one is on the floor by the 

tailgate. To remove the covers, lift up on the tabs. If your 

vehicle has the 10-speaker system, the compartment 

on the passenger’s side and the long compartment 

on the driver’s side will be equipped with speakers. 

Convenience Net 

Your vehicle may have a convenience net. The 

convenience net is designed to help keep small loads, 

like grocery bags, from falling over. Install the 

convenience net at the rear of your vehicle, just inside 

the liftgate/tailgate opening. 

Attach both the upper and lower hooks to the loops on 

either side of the liftgate/tailgate opening. The label 

on the net should be in the upper left corner. 

2-39

Cargo Cover 

If your vehicle has a cargo cover, you can use it to 

cover items in the rear of the vehicle. Pull the cover 

toward the rear if the vehicle and slide the ends into the 

slots to secure it. When it is not in use, take the ends 

out of the slots and allow the cover to roll back up. 

Attach the middle hooks to the metal rings on the floor. 

The convenience net has a maximum capacity of 

100 lbs. (45 kg). It is not designed to hold larger, heavier 

loads. Store such loads on the floor of your vehicle, 

as far forward as you can. 

When not in use, it is recommended that you take down 

the rear convenience net to extend its life and retain 

its elasticity, and to keep the rear exit clear. Store 

the net in one of the storage compartments. 

Cargo Net System 

Your vehicle may have a cargo net system designed to 

help keep larger loads from falling over. The cargo net 

system consists of two side convenience nets, one front 

convenience net and one rear convenience net. 

The front and rear convenience nets have labels for 

proper placement when installing. Attach the upper and 

lower hooks on both sides of the rear of the vehicle. 

The label on the front and rear nets should be in 

the upper left corner and the labels should face 

rearward. 

2-40

The two side nets can go on either side of the vehicle. 

Do one of the following to install the nets: 

• Connect the upper hooks on the side convenience 

nets to the top loops on the sidewall trim. Then 

attach the lower hooks on the side convenience nets 

to the lower hooks on the sidewall trim, or 

• connect the upper hooks on the side convenience 

nets to the top of the front and rear convenience 

nets. Then connect the lower hooks on the 

side convenience nets to the floor retainers on the 

floor of the rear of the vehicle. 

The cargo net system has a maximum capacity of 

100 lbs. (45.4 kg) for the front and rear nets and 

35 lbs. (15.9 kg) for the side nets. It is not designed to 

hold larger, heavier loads. Store such loads on the 

floor of your vehicle, as far forward as you can. 

When not in use, it is recommended that you then take 

down the convenience nets to extend life and retain 

their elasticity, and to keep the rear exit clear. Store the 

net in one of the storage compartments. 

Sliding Rear Convenience Tray 

{CAUTION: 

If any removable convenience item isn’t 

secured properly, it can move around in a 

collision or sudden stop. People in the vehicle 

could be injured. Be sure to secure any such 

item properly. 

Your vehicle may have a sliding rear convenience tray. 

The sliding rear convenience tray can be pulled out 

onto the tailgate making it easier to load or unload items. 

To use the tray, do the following: 

1. Push the release lever located in front of the handle 

of the tray to release the pin from the floor track 

assembly. 

2. Pull the tray toward you without lifting it up. You will 

hear a click when the tray is locked into the 

extended position. 

3. Push the release lever again to roll the tray back 

into the vehicle. You will hear a click when the tray 

is locked into position. 

2-41

The sliding rear convenience tray also has storage 

areas in it. Pull up on the covers to open them. Be sure 

to close the covers once you are done loading or 

unloading them. 

The sliding rear convenience tray has a maximum 

weight capacity of 400 lbs. (181.4 kg) on top. 



Removing the Sliding Rear 

Convenience Tray 

1. Make sure that all items have been removed 

from the top and the inside of the sliding rear 

convenience tray. 

2. Push down on the release lever and pull the 

tray fully rearward onto the tailgate until you 

hear a click. 

3. Disconnect the 

tethered ring from 

the hook and place 

the tethered ring on 

the outer edge of 

the tailgate on each 

side of the vehicle. 

4. Push down on the release lever and roll the tray 

into the vehicle approximately 6 inches (15.24 cm). 

5. Use the handle to lift up on the tray while pulling it 

towards you. Use your other hand to support and 

lift the tray from the bottom. Remove the tray 

from the vehicle. 

The rear of the tray has rollers for you to move it on 

the ground, in an upright position, without having to 

carry it. 

2-42

Removing the Floor Track Assembly 

After the tray is removed, the floor track assembly also 

needs to be removed. Items should not be put onto 

the floor track assembly. 

Replacing the Floor Track Assembly 

Before beginning this procedure make sure that nothing 

is in the rear of the vehicle. 

1. Feed the tethered ring through the rear lower 

sidewall loop on each side of the vehicle. 

2. Unlock the slide locks from the two rear floor 

retainers by pushing the button down and pressing 

them inward. 

3. Disengage the front forks from the retainers by 

lifting and pulling the assembly toward you. 

1. Slide the floor track assembly in while aligning the 

front forks, located on the bottom front of the track 

assembly, so that the forks slide under the two 

front floor retainers. 

2-43

2. Insert the slide locks under the two rear floor 

retainers by pushing the button down and pressing 

them outward. 

You may have to apply downward pressure to the 

floor track assembly to engage the slide locks under 

the floor retainers. 

Double check to ensure that the slide locks are 

engaged under the retainers and locked into place. 

3. Feed the tethered ring upward through the lower 

sidewall loop on each side of the vehicle. 

Make sure that the tethered ring is placed on the 

outer edge of the tailgate, on each side of the 

vehicle, for later attachment to the tray. 

4. Push and pull on the floor track assembly to make 

sure it is locked into place. 

Replacing the Sliding Rear 


The floor track assembly must be installed first for the 

sliding rear convenience tray to stay locked into 

place. See “Replacing the Floor Track Assembly” listed 

previously for more information. 

1. Pick up the tray by the handle and support the tray 

from the bottom with your other hand. 

2. Place the tray onto the floor track assembly. 

Make sure that the two front axles are placed over 

the hooks on the rear of the floor track assembly. 

There are four axles on the bottom of the tray, 

two in front and two in back. 

Make sure the rollers on the bottom of the tray are 

located in the tracks of the floor track assembly. 

3. Roll the tray forward into the vehicle until you hear 

a click. 

4. Press the release lever and pull the tray onto the 

tailgate. Connect the hook to the tethered ring 

located on each side of the sliding rear convenience 

tray. 

5. Push the release lever and roll the tray back into 

the vehicle. 

You will hear a click when the tray is locked into 

position. 

2-44

Sunroof 

If your vehicle has a 

sunroof, the switch is 

located between the 

sun visors. 

The sunroof switch will only work when the ignition is on 

or when the ignition is off and retained accessory 

power is active. See “Retained Accessory Power” under 

Ignition Positions on page 2-19 for more information. 

Notice: Do not open the sunroof if the luggage 

carrier crossrails are not in the full rear position. 

This could cause damage to the sunroof glass panel 

and/or the crossrails. See “Roof Rack System” in 

the Index for more information. 

When vent opening the sunroof, the sunshade must be 

opened by hand. Press the rear of the switch to vent 

open the glass panel. 

Press the rear of the switch a second time and release 

it to express-open the glass panel. The glass panel 

and sunshade will fully open. When the glass panel is 

express opening, pressing the switch in either direction 

will stop it. If you press and hold the rear of the 

switch, the express-open operation will be overridden. 

To close the glass panel, press and hold the front of the 

switch until the glass panel stops. 

Vehicle Personalization 

Some of your vehicle’s features can be reset or 

customized according to your preference. The features 

you can program depend on the options that came 

with your vehicle. 

If your vehicle has a DIC, see DIC Vehicle 

Personalization on page 3-52 to customize your 

features. 

If you do not have the DIC, the following features 

can be customized according to the options that your 

vehicle has. 

2-45

Entering Programming Mode 

To program features, your vehicle must be in the 

programming mode. Follow these steps: 

1. Turn the ignition key to ON. The shift lever must be 

in PARK (P). 

2. Press and hold the trip/reset button, located next to 

the odometer for two seconds while the odometer is 

in the odometer mode. 

You can now program your choices. 

To exit the programming mode, follow the steps listed 

under Exiting Programming Mode on page 2-51. 

Headlamp Exit Delay 

This feature allows you to customize the headlamps and 

parking lamps. 

Programmable Modes 

Mode 1: Off (The headlamps and parking lamps will 

turn off at the same time that the ignition is turned 

to OFF.) 

United States 


3. This message will appear in the message center, 

located in the instrument panel cluster, as an 

indication that your vehicle is ready to begin 

programming. 

If you have the remote keyless entry system, you 

must press the LOCK button. This lets the system 

know which transmitter is being personalized, since 

each can be personalized differently. 

Mode 2: 15-Second Activation (The headlamps and 

parking lamps will stay on for 15 seconds when 

the ignition is turned to OFF.) 







2-46

Your vehicle was originally programmed to Mode 3. 

The mode may have been changed since then. 

To determine the current mode, or to change the mode, 

do the following: 

1. Follow the instructions for Entering Programming 

Mode on page 2-46. 

2. Turn the exterior lamp control from the off position 

to the parking lamp position. 

3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number 

of chimes indicates the vehicle’s current 

programmed mode. If you do not wish to change 

the current mode, you can either exit the 

programming mode by following the instructions 

later in this section or program the next feature 

available on your vehicle. 

4. Turn the exterior lamp control from the off 

position to the parking lamp position to change the 

current mode. 

5. Turn the exterior lamp control from the off position 

to the parking lamp position until you hear the 

number of chimes corresponding to the mode 

selection you want. 

The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit 


later in this section or program the next feature available 

on your vehicle. 

Automatic Door Lock/Unlock 

This feature allows you to lock and unlock your doors 



Mode 2: Automatic Door Locking Only 

• Shift out of PARK (P) with the ignition on and the 

driver’s door closed; all doors will lock automatically. 

• The automatic door unlock feature is turned off. 

Mode 3: Automatic Door Locking with shift out 

of PARK (P)/Driver’s Door Unlocking with shift into 

PARK (P) 



• Shift into PARK (P) with the ignition on; driver’s door 

only will unlock automatically. 

Mode 4: Automatic Door Locking with shift out of 

PARK (P)/All Door Unlocking with shift into PARK (P) 

• Shift out of PARK (P) with the ignition on and 

the driver’s door closed; all doors will lock 


• Shift into PARK (P) with the ignition on; all doors 

will unlock automatically. 

2-47


PARK (P)/Driver’s Door Unlocking with Key Removal 

• Shift out of PARK (P) with the ignition on and 

the driver’s door closed; all doors will lock 


• Remove the key; only the driver’s door will unlock 



PARK (P)/All Door Unlocking with Key Removal 



• Remove the ignition key; all doors will unlock 








2. Press the front of the power door lock switch. 








4. Press the front of the power door lock switch to 

change the current mode. 

5. Press the front of the power door lock switch until 

you hear the number of chimes corresponding to 

the mode selection you want. 


the programming mode by following the instructions 




This feature allows you to delay the locking of your doors. 


Mode 1: Off (Doors will always lock immediately when 

you lock the doors using the power door lock switch 

or the remote keyless entry transmitter.) 

Mode 2: Delayed Locking (If the power door lock 

switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to 

lock the vehicle while any door is open, you will hear 

three chimes. The doors will not lock. Five seconds after 

the last door is closed, all doors will lock.) 

2-48







2. Press the back of the power door lock switch. 








4. Press the back of the power door lock switch to 

change the current mode. 

5. Press the back of the power door lock switch until 

you hear the number of chimes corresponding to 

the mode selection you want. 





Remote Driver Unlock Control 

This feature allows you to customize the UNLOCK 

button on the remote keyless entry transmitter. 


Your vehicle can be programmed to one of the following 

modes. 

Mode 1: Remote All Doors Unlock (When you press 

UNLOCK on your remote keyless entry transmitter, 

all doors will unlock.) 

Mode 2: Remote Driver’s Door Unlock Only (When you 

press UNLOCK on your remote keyless entry transmitter 

once, the driver’s door will unlock. When you press 

UNLOCK on your remote keyless entry transmitter again 

within five seconds, all doors will unlock.) 







2. Press UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry 

transmitter. 

2-49









transmitter to change the current mode. 


transmitter until you hear the number of chimes 

corresponding to the mode selection you want. 





Remote Lock and Unlock 

Confirmation 

This feature allows you to customize the feedback 

received when locking or unlocking your vehicle with the 

remote keyless entry transmitter. 


Mode 1: Both Features Off (Remote lock and unlock 

confirmation are disabled.) 

Mode 2: Exterior Lamps Flash Only 

• When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter 

to lock or unlock your vehicle, your headlamps and 

parking lamps will flash briefly to let you know 

the command has been received. 

Mode 3: Exterior Lamps Flash and Horn Sound 


to lock your vehicle, your headlamps and parking 

lamps will flash briefly on each press and your horn 

will sound briefly on the second or any other 

press to let you know the command has been 

received. 


to unlock your vehicle, your headlamps and parking 

lamps will flash briefly to let you know the 

command has been received. 

2-50







2. Press the LOCK button on the remote keyless entry 

transmitter. 



programmed mode. If you do not wish to change the 

current mode, you can either exit the programming 

mode by following the instructions later in this section 

or program the next feature available on your vehicle. 

4. Press LOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter 

to change the current mode until you hear the 

number of chimes corresponding to the mode 

selection you want. 

The mode you selected is now set. You can now exit 

the programming mode by following the instructions next 


Exiting Programming Mode 

To exit programming mode, do one of the following: 

• Press the odometer button, while in odometer mode 

for two seconds, or 

• turn the ignition key out of ON, or 

• do not program any commands for one minute 

while in programming mode, or 

• shift out of PARK (P). See Shifting Out of Park (P) 

on page 2-28. 

The programming mode message will turn off to let you 

know that you are no longer in the programming mode. 

2-51

✍ NOTES 

2-52

Section 3 

Instrument Panel 

Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4 

Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6 

Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6 

Horn .............................................................3-6 

Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-7 

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7 

Exterior Lamps .............................................3-12 

Interior Lamps ..............................................3-14 

Instrument Panel Switchbank ..........................3-17 

Head-Up Display (HUD) .................................3-18 

Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-20 

Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-21 

Climate Controls ............................................3-21 

Climate Control System .................................3-21 

Dual Climate Control System ..........................3-24 

Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-27 

Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators .............3-28 

Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-29 

Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-30 

Tachometer .................................................3-31 

Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-32 

Air Bag Readiness Light ................................3-32 

Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-33 

Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-34 

Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light ......3-34 

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-35 

Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-35 

Fuel Gage ...................................................3-38 

Message Center .............................................3-39 

Service Traction System Warning Message ......3-39 

Traction Active Message ................................3-40 

Engine Coolant Temperature Warning 

Message ..................................................3-40 

Charging System Indicator Message ................3-41 

Low Oil Pressure Message ............................3-41 

Low Engine Oil Level Message .......................3-42 

Change Engine Oil Message ..........................3-43 

Low Tire Message ........................................3-43 

Door Ajar Warning Message ...........................3-44 

Rear Hatch Ajar Warning Message ..................3-44 

PASS-Key ® III Security Message ....................3-44 

All-Wheel Drive Disable Warning Message .......3-45 

Low Washer Fluid Warning Message ...............3-45 

Low Fuel Warning Message ...........................3-46 

Low Brake Fluid Warning Message .................3-46 

Service Vehicle Soon Message .......................3-47 

Program Mode Message ................................3-47 

Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery 

Low Warning Message ...............................3-48 

Park Lamp Warning Message .........................3-48 

3-1

Section 3 

Instrument Panel 

Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-49 

DIC Controls and Displays .............................3-50 

DIC Vehicle Personalization ............................3-52 

Audio System(s) .............................................3-59 

Setting the Time ...........................................3-60 

Radio with CD ..............................................3-60 

Radio with Cassette and CD ..........................3-70 

Radio with Six-Disc CD .................................3-82 

Rear Seat Entertainment System ....................3-94 

Rear Audio Controller (RAC) .........................3-106 

Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................3-106 

Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................3-107 

DVD Distortion ............................................3-108 

Understanding Radio Reception ....................3-108 

Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ...............3-108 

Care of Your CDs and DVDs ........................3-109 

Care of Your CD and DVD Player .................3-109 

Cleaning Your DVD Player ...........................3-110 

Cleaning the Video Screen ...........................3-110 

Integrated Windshield Antenna ......................3-110 

XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 

(United States Only) .................................3-110 

3-2

✍ NOTES 

3-3

Instrument Panel Overview 

3-4

The main components of the instrument panel are the 

following: 

A. Side Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-27. 

B. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel 

Cluster on page 3-29. 

C. Hazard Warning Flasher Switch. See Hazard 

Warning Flashers on page 3-6. 

D. Head-Up Display Switch and Driver Information 

Center (DIC) Controls or DIC Controls. See Head-Up 

Display (HUD) on page 3-18 and DIC Controls 

and Displays on page 3-50. 

E. Center Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-27. 

F. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-59. 

G. Side Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-27. 

H. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn 

Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7. 

I. Exterior/Interior Lamp Switch. See Exterior Lamps 

on page 3-12 and Interior Lamps on page 3-14. 

J. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio Steering 

Wheel Controls on page 3-107. 

K. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-9. 

L. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-25. 

M. Horn. See Horn on page 3-6. 

N. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on page 2-19. 

O. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio Steering 

Wheel Controls on page 3-107. 

P. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transaxle Operation on 

page 2-22. 

Q. Accessory Power Outlet. See Accessory Power 

Outlets on page 3-20. 

R. Rear Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-27. 

S. Console/Cooler. See Console/Cooler on page 2-35. 

T. Floor Console Fuse Block. See Fuses and Circuit 

Breakers on page 5-92. 

U. Cupholders and Ashtray. See Cupholder(s) on 

page 2-33 and Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter on 

page 3-21. 

V. Instrument Panel Switchbank. See Instrument Panel 

Switchbank on page 3-17. 

W. Cigarette Lighter. See Ashtrays and Cigarette 

Lighter on page 3-21. 

X. Climate Controls. See Climate Control System on 

page 3-21 or Dual Climate Control System on 

page 3-24. 

Y. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-32. 

3-5

Hazard Warning Flashers 

The hazard warning 

flasher button is located 

on top of the steering 

column. 

Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They 

also let police know you have a problem. Your front 

and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off. 

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what 

position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in. 

Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal 

lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to 

turn the flashers off. 

When the hazard warning flashers are on, the turn 

signals won’t work. 

Other Warning Devices 

If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at 

the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your 

vehicle. 

Horn 

You can sound the horn by pressing the horn symbols 

on your steering wheel. 

3-6

Tilt Wheel 

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever 

A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel 

before you drive. You can raise it to the highest level to 

give your legs more room when you exit and enter 

the vehicle. 

The lever on the left side of the steering column 

includes the following: 

• GTurn and Lane-Change Signals 

The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is 

located on the left side of the steering column. To tilt the 

wheel, hold the wheel and pull the lever. Then move 

the wheel to a comfortable position and release the lever 

to lock the wheel in place. 

• 5 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer 

• Flash-to-Pass 

• N Windshield Wipers 

• L Windshield Washer 

• I Cruise Control 

3-7

Turn and Lane-Change Signals 

The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two 

downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you 

to signal a turn or a lane change. 

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down. 

When the turn is finished, the lever will return 


An arrow on the instrument 

panel cluster and the HUD 

display will flash in the 

direction of the turn or lane 

change. 

To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever 

until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you 

complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself 

when you release it. 

As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrow 

flashes faster than normal, a signal bulb may be burned 

out and other drivers won’t see your turn signal. 

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an 

accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal 

a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and check the 

fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-92. 

If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring for 

the trailer lamps, the signal indicator will flash at a 

normal rate even if a turn signal bulb is burned 

out. Check the front and rear turn signal lamps regularly 

to make sure they are working. 

Turn Signal On Chime 

If either turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 mile 

(1.2 km), a chime will sound to let you know to turn it off. 

To turn off the chime, turn off the signal. 

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer 

To change the headlamps from low to high, push the 

turn signal lever away from you and release it. To 

change the headlamps from high to low, pull the lever 

toward you. 

When the high beams are 

on, this light, on the 

instrument panel cluster 

and the HUD display, 

will also be on. 

3-8

Flash-to-Pass 

When the headlamps are off, pull the lever toward you 

to momentarily switch on the high beams (to signal 

that you are going to pass). When you release the lever, 

they will turn off. 

Windshield Wipers 

You control the windshield wipers by turning the band 

marked WIPER. 

MIST: For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to MIST. 

Hold it there until the wipers start, then let go. The 

wipers will stop after one cycle. If you want more cycles, 

hold the band on mist longer. 

Delay: For delayed wiping cycles, you can set the 

wiper speed for a long or short delay between wipes. 

This can be very useful in light rain or snow. Turn 

the band to choose the delay time. The closer to LO, 

the shorter the delay time. 

LO: For steady wiping cycles at low speed, turn the 

band away from you to the LO position. 

HI: For high-speed wiping, turn the band away from 

you to the HI position. 

OFF: To stop the wipers, turn the band to OFF. 

Remember that damaged wiper blades may prevent you 

from seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoid 

damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper 

blades before using them. If they’re frozen to the 

windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades 

do become damaged, get new blades or blade inserts. 

Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers. A circuit 

breaker will stop them until the motor cools. Clear away 

snow or ice to prevent an overload. 

Windshield Washer 

To wash your windshield, press and hold the windshield 

washer paddle. The washers and wipers will operate. 

When you release the paddle, the washers will stop, and 

the wipers will continue to operate for two cycles, unless 

your wipers were already on. In that case, the wipers will 

resume the wiper speed you had selected earlier. 

{CAUTION: 

In freezing weather, don’t use your washer 

until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the 

washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, 

blocking your vision. 

3-9

Cruise Control 

With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about 

25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot 

on the accelerator. This can really help on long trips. 

Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 

25 mph (40 km/h). 

When you apply your brakes, the cruise control 

disengages. 

{CAUTION: 

• Cruise control can be dangerous where 

you can’t drive safely at a steady speed. 

So, don’t use your cruise control on 

winding roads or in heavy traffic. 

• Cruise control can be dangerous on 

slippery roads. On such roads, fast 

changes in tire traction can cause 

needless wheel spinning, and you could 

lose control. Don’t use cruise control on 

slippery roads. 

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction 

control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise 

control will automatically disengage. See Traction 

Control System (TCS) on page 4-10. When road 

conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may 

turn the cruise control back on. 

Setting Cruise Control 

{CAUTION: 

If you leave your cruise control on when you’re 

not using cruise, you might hit a button and go 

into cruise when you don’t want to. You could 

be startled and even lose control. Keep the 

cruise control switch off until you want to use 

cruise control. 

1. Move the cruise control switch to ON. 

2. Get up to the speed you want. 

3. Push in the SET button at the end of the lever and 

release it. 

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. 

3-10

Resuming a Set Speed 

Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed 

and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts 

off the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset 

it. Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, 

you can move the cruise control switch from ON to 

R/A (Resume/Accelerate) briefly. 

You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and 

stay there. 

If you hold the switch at R/A, the vehicle will keep going 

faster until you release the switch or apply the brake. So 

unless you want to go faster, don’t hold the switch at R/A. 

Increasing Speed While Using Cruise 

Control 

There are two ways to go to a higher speed: 

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher 

speed. Push the SET button at the end of the lever, 

then release the button and the accelerator pedal. 

You’ll now cruise at the higher speed. 

• Movethe cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold it there 

until you get up to the speed you want, and then 

release the switch. (To increase your speed in very 

small amounts, move the switch to R/A briefly and 

then release it. Each time you do this, your vehicle 

will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.) 

The accelerate feature will work whether or not you 

have set an initial cruise control speed. 

Reducing Speed While Using Cruise 

Control 

There are two ways to reduce speed while using cruise 

control: 

• Push in the SET button at the end of the lever until 

you reach the lower speed you want, then release 

it. 

• To slow down in very small amounts, push the SET 

button briefly. Each time you do this, you’ll go about 

1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower. 

Passing Another Vehicle While Using 

Cruise Control 

Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. 

When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will 

slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier. 

Using Cruise Control on Hills 

How well your cruise control will work on hills depends 

upon your speed, load and the steepness of the 

hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to step 

on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. 

When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to 

a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course, 

applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many 

drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use 

cruise control on steep hills. 

3-11

Ending Cruise Control 

There are two ways to turn off the cruise control: 

• Step lightly on the brake pedal, or 

• Move the cruise switch to OFF. 

Erasing Cruise Memory 

When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your 

cruise control set speed memory is erased. 

Exterior Lamps 

The control located to 

the left of the steering 

column operates the 

exterior lamps. 

The exterior lamp control has three positions: 

AUTO (Automatic Headlamp Control/Off): Turning 

the control to this position will activate the automatic 

headlamp control when it is dark enough outside 

and turn off all the lamps and lights during the day 

except for the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL). 

< (Parking Lamps): Turning the control to this 

position turns on the parking lamps together with the 

following: 

• Taillamps 

• Instrument Panel Lights 

2 (Headlamps): Turning the control to this position 

turns on the headlamps, together with the previously 

listed lamps and lights. 

Lamps on Reminder 

If the driver’s door is opened and you turn the ignition to 

OFF while leaving the lamps on, you will hear a 

warning chime. 

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) 

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for 

others to see the front of your vehicle during the 

day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving 

conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short 

periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional 

daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles 

first sold in Canada. 

3-12

A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the 

DRL work, so be sure it isn’t covered. The DRL 

system will make your reduced intensity high-beam 

headlamps come on in daylight when: 

• The ignition is on, 

• the exterior lamps control is in AUTO, and 

• the shift lever is not in PARK (P). 

When the DRL are on, only your reduced intensity 

high-beam headlamps will be on. The taillamps 

and other lamps will not be on. Your instrument panel 

won’t be lit up. 

When it’s dark enough outside, the exterior lamps will 

come on automatically. When it’s bright enough outside, 

the exterior lamps will go out and the DRL will turn 

on. Of course, you may still turn on the headlamps any 

time you need to. 

As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular 

headlamp system when you need it. 

Automatic Headlamp System 

When the exterior lamp control is turned to AUTO, the 

headlamps and parking lamps will come on 

automatically when it is dark enough outside. 

The lamps will come on automatically if: 

• It is dark enough outside, 

• the ignition is in ON, 

• the parking brake is released, and 

• the exterior lamp control is in the AUTO position. 

Fog Lamps 

The fog lamp button is 

located on the exterior 

lamp control. 

Push the FOG PUSH button to turn the fog lamps on. 

The FOG light indicates the fog lamps are on. To turn off 

the fog lamps, press the fog lamp button or turn the 

ignition off. 

If you turn on the fog lamps while the DRL are on, the 

parking lamps will turn on automatically. 

Your fog lamps will go off while you switch to high 

beams. Using your high beams in fog is not 

recommended. 

3-13

Interior Lamps 

Instrument Panel Brightness 

Your interior lamp control 

is located below the 

exterior lamp control. 

This feature controls the brightness of the instrument 

panel lights. The knob for this feature is located on the 

interior lamps control. Press the knob to extend it. 

Turn the knob to adjust the instrument panel brightness. 

Press the knob in when not in use. 

Interior Lamps Control 

Turn the interior lamp control to one of the following 

positions: 

OFF: This position turns the interior lamps off. 

DOOR: This position turns on the interior lamps when 

any door is opened and when the ignition key is 

removed from the ignition. 

ON: This position turns the interior lamps on. 


The headlamp exit delay feature will keep the 

headlamps and parking lamps on at night for 

30 seconds if: 

• The ignition is turned to OFF, 

• the exterior lamp control is in the AUTO position, 

• it is dark enough outside. 

After 30 seconds, the headlamps and parking lamps will 

turn off. 

The lamps will turn off before the 30 seconds if: 

• The ignition is turned to ON, or 

• the exterior lamp control is turned out of the AUTO 

position. 

If you would like to program the headlamp exit delay 

feature, and your vehicle is equipped with the Driver 

Information Center (DIC), see DIC Vehicle 


3-14

Entry Lighting 

With entry lighting, the interior of your vehicle will 

illuminate for 25 seconds so you can see inside your 

vehicle before you enter. To activate entry lighting: 

• Unlock a door using the key when the interior lamp 

control is in the DOOR position, and when the 

ignition is in OFF, or 

• press UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry 

transmitter when the interior lamp control is in the 

DOOR position, and when the ignition is in OFF. 

After 25 seconds, the interior lamps will fade out. 

The lamps will turn off before 25 seconds if you: 

• Lock all the doors using the key, or 

• press LOCK on the remote keyless entry 

transmitter, or 

• press the front of the power door lock switch, or 

• turn the ignition to ON. 

When any door is opened, entry lighting is cancelled. 

The interior lamps will stay on while any door or 

the liftgate is open, and fade out when all the doors 

are closed. 

Delayed Lighting 

The delayed lighting feature will continue to illuminate 

the interior for 25 seconds after all doors have been 

closed. The lamps will continue to illuminate when: 

• A door is opened then closed, 

• the interior lamp control is in the DOOR 

position, and 

• the ignition is in OFF. 


The lamps will fade out before the 25 seconds if: 

• The ignition is turned to ON, 

• LOCK is pressed on the remote keyless entry 


• the front of the power door lock switch is pressed. 


Center (DIC), you can program this feature on or 

off. See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-52. 

3-15

Exit Lighting 

With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on for 

about 30 seconds whenever you remove the key from 

the ignition if: 

• The vehicle is in PARK (P), 

• the ignition key is out of the ignition, 

• the interior lamp control is in the DOOR 

position, and 

• all of the doors are closed. 


The interior lamps will fade out before 30 seconds if: 




• the front of the power door lock switch is pressed. 



off. See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-52. 

Perimeter Lighting 

The perimeter lighting feature will turn on the headlamps 

and parking lamps for 25 seconds when: 

• The ignition is turned to OFF, 

• the exterior lamp control is in the AUTO position, 

• UNLOCK is pressed on the remote keyless 

entry transmitter, and 

• it is dark enough outside. 

After 25 seconds, the headlamps and parking lamps will 

turn off. 

The lamps will turn off before the 25 seconds if: 

• The ignition is turned to ON, or 

• the exterior lamp control is turned out of the 

AUTO position. 



off. See “Remote Lock Feedback” under DIC Vehicle 


3-16

Front Reading Lamps 

There are two reading lamps located on the rearview 

mirror. 

To turn either reading lamp on or off, press the button 

located next to each lamp. 

These lamps will come on each time you open the 

doors, if the interior lamp control is in the ON or 

DOOR position. 

Cargo Lamp 

The cargo lamp is located in the rear of the vehicle, 

above the liftgate/tailgate opening. It comes on 

automatically each time you open the doors, if the 

interior lamp control is in the DOOR position. 

Battery Run-Down Protection 

Your vehicle has a feature to help prevent you from 

draining the battery, in case you accidentally leave the 

interior or exterior lamps on. If you leave any interior 

or exterior lamps on while the ignition is in OFF, they will 

automatically turn off after 10 minutes. 

If your vehicle has less than 14 miles (24 km) on the 

odometer, the battery saver will turn off the lamps after 

only three minutes. 

Instrument Panel Switchbank 

There is an instrument panel switchbank located below 

the comfort controls. It contains switches or blanks 

that will vary with the options that are on your vehicle 

and a cigarette lighter/accessory power outlet. 

The switches you may have are: 

• Liftgate/tailgate Release 

• Traction Disable 

• Heated Seats (driver’s and passenger’s) 

If your vehicle has only two switches, there will be a 

storage bin. 

For more information, see each of these features 

in the Index. 

3-17

Head-Up Display (HUD) 

{CAUTION: 

If the HUD image is too bright or too high in 

your field of view, it may take you more time to 

see things you need to see when it’s dark 

outside. Be sure to keep the HUD image dim 

and placed low in your field of view. 

The Head-Up Display also displays a CHECK GAGES 

icon, the following lights and message could appear 

on the instrument panel cluster when CHECK GAGES 

appears: 

• Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Message 

• Low Oil Pressure Message 

• Charging System Indicator Message 

• Low Brake Fluid Warning Message 

See each of these in the Index for more information. 

If your vehicle has the HUD, it can display the 

speedometer reading in English or metric. The current 

radio station, CD number and/or track number or 

tape may also be displayed and will appear as an image 

focused out toward the front of your vehicle. 

The Head-Up Display also displays the following 

messages when they appear on the instrument panel 

cluster: 

• Turn Signal Indicators 

• High-Beam Indicator 

• Low-Fuel Warning Message 

See each of these in the Index for more information. 

Under warning conditions, the CHECK GAGES icon will 

illuminate in the HUD, look at the instrument panel 

cluster for more information. 

Notice: Although the HUD image appears to be 

near the front of the vehicle, do not use it as 

a parking aid. The HUD was not designed for that 

purpose. If you try to use it as such, you may 

misjudge the distance and damage your vehicle. 

3-18

The HUD controls are 

located to the right of the 

instrument panel cluster. 

When the HUD is on, the speedometer reading will be 

displayed continually. The current radio station, cassette 

tape or CD number and track number will only be 

displayed for three seconds after the radio, tape or CD 

track status changes. This will happen whenever 

one of the radio controls is pressed, either on the radio 

or on the optional steering wheel controls. 

To adjust the HUD so you can see it properly: 

1. Start your engine and turn the dimmer knob to the 

desired HUD image brightness. 

The brightness of the HUD image is determined by 

the ambient light conditions in the direction your 

vehicle is facing and where you have the HUD 

dimmer knob set. If you are facing a dark object or 

a heavily shaded area, your HUD may anticipate 

that you are entering a dark area and may begin 

to dim. 

2. Adjust the driver’s seat. If you change your seat 

position you may have to readjust your HUD. 

3. Press the UP or DN buttons until the HUD image is 

easy to see and then press the DN button until the 

HUD image is as low as possible, but, remains 

in full view straight ahead near the front bumper. 

The HUD image can only be adjusted up and down, 

not side-to-side. 

4. To turn the image off, turn the dimmer knob 

counterclockwise to OFF. 

If the sun comes out or it becomes cloudy, you may 

need to adjust the HUD brightness again using 

the dimmer knob. Polarized sunglasses could make the 

HUD image harder to see. 

3-19

Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to remove 

any dirt or film that reduces the sharpness or clarity 

of the HUD image. 

To clean the HUD, spray household glass cleaner on a 

soft, clean cloth. Wipe the HUD lens gently, then dry 

it. Do not spray cleaner directly on the lens because the 

cleaner could leak into the unit. 

If the ignition is on and you can’t see the HUD image, 

check to see if one of the following has occurred: 

• Something is covering the HUD unit. 

• The HUD dimmer knob is adjusted properly. 

• The HUD image is adjusted to the proper height. 

• Ambient light (in the direction your vehicle is facing) 

is low. 

• A fuse is blown. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on 

page 5-92. 

If you ever have to have your windshield replaced, be 

sure to get one that is designed for the HUD or your 

HUD image may look blurred and out of focus. 

Accessory Power Outlets 

With accessory power outlets you can plug in electrical 

equipment such as a cellular telephone or CB radio. 

There is a single front power outlet located on the floor 

console above the climate control system outlets. 

There is one rear power outlet located in the rear of the 

vehicle on the driver’s side. 

To use the outlet, pull the cover down. When not using 

it, cover the outlet with the protective cap. 

Notice: When using an accessory power outlet, 

maximum electrical load must not exceed 20 amps. 

Always turn off any electrical equipment when 

not in use. Leaving electrical equipment on for 

extended periods will drain your battery. 

Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible to 

the accessory power outlet and could result in blown 

vehicle or adapter fuses. 

If you experience a problem, see your dealer for 

additional information on accessory power outlets. 

Notice: Adding some electrical equipment to your 

vehicle can damage it or keep other things from 

working as they should. This wouldn’t be covered by 

your warranty. Check with your dealer before 

adding electrical equipment, and never use anything 

that exceeds the amperage rating. 

When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the 

proper installation instructions included with the 

equipment. 

Notice: Power outlets are designed for accessory 

plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory 

or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of 

the power outlet can cause damage not covered 

by your warranty. 

3-20

Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter 

If your vehicle has an ashtray and cigarette lighter they 

are located in the glove box. 

The ashtray fits into the cupholders. The cigarette 

lighter installs into the accessory power outlet in the 

instrument panel switchbank. 

To use the lighter, push it in all the way and let go. 

When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself. 

Notice: Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your 

hand while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to 

back away from the heating element when it’s 

ready. That can make it overheat, damaging the 

lighter and the heating element. 

Notice: Don’t put papers or other flammable 

items into your ashtrays. Hot cigarettes or other 

smoking materials could ignite them, causing 

a damaging fire. 

Climate Controls 

Climate Control System 

With this system you can control the heating, cooling 

and ventilation for your vehicle. 

Operation 

Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to 

direct the airflow inside of your vehicle. 

To change the current mode, select one of the following: 

H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument 

panel outlets. 

3-21

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air to the 

instrument panel outlets, then directs the remaining 

air to the floor outlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper 

outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets. 

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the 

floor outlets. Use this mode to send air to the rear of the 

vehicle. Keep the area under the front seats free of 

objects that could obstruct airflow to the rear of 

the vehicle. 

The right knob can also be used to select defog or 

defrost mode. For more information, see “Defogging and 

Defrosting” later in this section. 

9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or 

counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. 

Turn the knob to OFF to turn off the fan. The fan 

must be turned on for the air conditioning compressor to 

operate. 

: (Outside Air): Press this button to turn the 

outside air mode on or off. When this mode is on, 

outside air will circulate throughout your vehicle. When 

this mode is on, an indicator light in the button will 

come on to let you know that it is activated. The outside 

air mode can be used with all modes, but it cannot 

be used with the recirculation mode. 

? (Recirculation): This mode keeps outside air 

from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent 

outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or help 

heat or cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly. 

Press this button to turn the recirculation mode on or off. 

When the button is pressed, an indicator light will 

come on. The air-conditioning compressor also comes 

on. The recirculation mode can be used with vent 

and bi-level modes, but it cannot be used with floor, 

defog, defrost or outside air modes. 

Temperature Control: Turn the center knob clockwise 

or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the air 

temperature inside your vehicle. 

# A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn 

the air-conditioning system on or off. When A/C is 

pressed, an indicator light in the button will come on to 

let you know that air conditioning is activated. 

You may notice a slight change in engine performance 

when the air-conditioning compressor shuts off and 

turns on again. This is normal. The system is designed 

to make adjustments to help with fuel economy while 

still maintaining the selected temperature. 

On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air 

escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time 

it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps 

the system to operate more efficiently. 

3-22

For quick cool down on hot days, do the following: 

1. Select the vent mode. 

2. Select the coolest temperature. 

3. Select the highest fan speed. 

4. Select A/C. 

5. Select the recirculation mode. 

Using these settings together for long periods of time 

may cause the air inside of your vehicle to become too 

dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air 

inside of your vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation 

mode off. 

The air-conditioning system removes moisture from the 

air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of 

water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling 

or after turning off the engine. This is normal. 

Defogging and Defrosting 

Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity 

(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This 

can be minimized if the climate controls system is used 

properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost 

from your windshield. Use the defog mode to clear the 

windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers. 

Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost from 

the windshield more quickly. 

Turn the right knob to select the defog or defrost mode. 

- (Defog): This mode directs air to the windshield 

and the floor outlets. When you select this mode, 

the system turns off recirculation and runs the 

air-conditioning compressor unless the outside 

temperature is at or below freezing. The recirculation 

mode cannot be selected while in the defog mode. 

0 (Defrost): Pressing this button directs most of the 

air to the windshield and the side window outlets, 

with some air directed to the floor outlets. In this mode, 

the system will automatically turn off recirculation 

and run the air-conditioning compressor, unless the 

outside temperature is at or below freezing. 

Recirculation cannot be selected while in the 

defrost mode. 

Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear. 

3-23

Rear Window Defogger 

The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to 

remove fog from the rear window. 

< REAR: Press this button to turn the rear window 

defogger on or off. An indicator light in the button 

will come on to let you know that the rear window 

defogger is activated. 

The rear window defogger will turn off about 10 minutes 

after the button is pressed. If turned on again, the 

defogger will only run for about five minutes before 

turning off. The defogger can also be turned off 

by pressing the button again or by turning off the engine. 

Notice: Don’t use anything sharp on the inside of 

the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage 

the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be 

covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary 

vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar 

to the defogger grid. 

Dual Climate Control System 

Your vehicle may have a dual climate control system. 

With this system you can control the heating, cooling 

and ventilation for your vehicle. 

Operation 

Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to 

direct the airflow inside of your vehicle. 

To change the current mode, select one of the following: 

H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument 

panel outlets. 

3-24

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air to the 

instrument panel outlets, then directs the remaining 

air to the floor outlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper 

outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets. 

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the 

floor outlets. Use this mode to send air to the rear of the 

vehicle. Keep the area under the front seats free of 

objects that could obstruct airflow to the rear of 

the vehicle. 

The right knob can also be used to select defog or 

defrost mode. For more information, see “Defogging and 

Defrosting” later in this section. 

9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or 

counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. 

Turn the knob to OFF to turn off the fan. The fan 

must be turned on for the air conditioning compressor to 

operate. 

: (Outside Air): Press this button to turn the 

outside air mode on or off. When this mode is on, 

outside air will circulate throughout your vehicle. When 

this mode is on, an indicator light in the button will 

come on to let you know that it is activated. The outside 

air mode can be used with all modes, but it cannot 

be used with the recirculation mode. 

? (Recirculation): This mode keeps outside air 

from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent 

outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or help 

heat or cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly. 

Press this button to turn the recirculation mode on or off. 

When the button is pressed, an indicator light will 

come on. The air-conditioning compressor also comes 

on. The recirculation mode can be used with vent 

and bi-level modes, but it cannot be used with floor, 

defog, defrost or outside air modes. 

Temperature Control: Use the driver’s and 

passenger’s temperature levers to increase or decrease 

the air temperature inside your vehicle. 

# A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn 

the air-conditioning system on or off. When A/C is 

pressed, an indicator light in the button will come on to 

let you know that air conditioning is activated. 

You may notice a slight change in engine performance 

when the air-conditioning compressor shuts off and 

turns on again. This is normal. The system is designed 

to make adjustments to help with fuel economy while 

still maintaining the selected temperature. 

On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air 

escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time 

it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps 

the system to operate more efficiently. 

3-25

For quick cool down on hot days, do the following: 

1. Select the vent mode. 

2. Select the coolest temperature. 

3. Select the highest fan speed. 

4. Select A/C. 

5. Select the recirculation mode. 

Using these settings together for long periods of time 

may cause the air inside of your vehicle to become too 

dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air 

inside of your vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation 

mode off. 

The air-conditioning system removes moisture from the 

air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of 

water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling 

or after turning off the engine. This is normal. 

Defogging and Defrosting 

Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity 

(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This 

can be minimized if the climate controls system is used 

properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost 

from your windshield. Use the defog mode to clear the 

windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers. 

Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost from 

the windshield more quickly. 

Turn the right knob to select the defog or defrost mode. 

- (Defog): This mode directs air to the windshield 

and the floor outlets. When you select this mode, 

the system turns off recirculation and runs the 

air-conditioning compressor unless the outside 

temperature is at or below freezing. The recirculation 

mode cannot be selected while in the defog mode. 

0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to the 

windshield and the side window outlets, with some 

air directed to the floor outlets. In this mode, the system 

will automatically turn off recirculation and run the 

air-conditioning compressor, unless the outside 

temperature is at or below freezing. Recirculation cannot 

be selected while in the defrost mode. 

Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear. 

3-26

Rear Window Defogger 

The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to 

remove fog from the rear window. 

< REAR: Press this button to turn the rear window 

defogger on or off. An indicator light in the button 

will come on to let you know that the rear window 

defogger is activated. 

The rear window defogger will turn off approximately 10 

minutes after the button is pressed. If turned on 

again, the defogger will only run for approximately five 

minutes before turning off. The defogger can also 

be turned off by pressing the button again or by turning 

off the engine. 

Notice: Don’t use anything sharp on the inside of 

the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage 

the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be 

covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary 

vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar 

to the defogger grid. 

Outlet Adjustment 

Use the knob located in the center of the outlet, to 

change the direction of the air flow. 

Operation Tips 

• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air 

inlets on the hood that may block the flow of air 

into your vehicle. 

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may 

adversely affect the performance of the system. 

• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects 

to help circulate the air inside your vehicle more 

effectively. 

3-27

Warning Lights, Gages and 

Indicators 

This part describes the warning lights and gages that 

may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you 

locate them. 

Warning lights and gages can signal that something is 

wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause 

an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to 

your warning lights and gages could also save you 

or others from injury. 

Warning lights come on when there may be or is a 

problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will 

see in the details on the next few pages, some 

warning lights come on briefly when you start the 

engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are 

familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed 

when this happens. 

Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem 

with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages 

and warning lights work together to let you know when 

there’s a problem with your vehicle. 

When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on 

when you are driving, or when one of the gages 

shows there may be a problem, check the section 

that tells you what to do about it. Please follow this 

manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be 

costly – and even dangerous. So please get to know 

your warning lights and gages. They’re a big help. 

Your vehicle also has a message center that works 

along with the warning lights and gages. See Message 

Center on page 3-39. 

3-28

Instrument Panel Cluster 

Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how 

fast you’re going, how much fuel you’re using, and many other things you’ll need to drive safely and economically. 

The indicator warning lights and gages are explained on the following pages. 

United States uplevel shown, United States base level and Canada similar 

3-29

Speedometer and Odometer 

Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both 

miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). 

Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has 

been driven, in either miles (used in the United States) 

or kilometers (used in Canada). However, a Canadian 

odometer will remain in metric units only. 

Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer. 

You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a 

new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to 

the mileage total of the old odometer, then that will 

be done. If it can’t, then it’s set at zero and a label must 

be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage 

reading when the new odometer was installed. 


Center (DIC), you may toggle the odometer to 

display either miles, available only in the United States, 

or kilometers. See Driver Information Center (DIC) 

on page 3-49. 

Trip Odometer 

In addition to the standard odometer, the cluster can 

also display a trip odometer. The display can be toggled 

between the odometer and the trip odometer by 

quickly pressing and releasing the trip/reset button 

located to the right of the temperature gage. The trip 

odometer will continue to keep track of miles or 

kilometers driven even if they are not currently 

displayed. A Canadian trip odometer will remain in 

metric units only. To reset the trip odometer to zero (0), 

push and hold the trip/reset button for at least one 

and a half seconds, but less than three seconds. The 

trip odometer that is showing in the display will be reset. 

3-30

Retro-Active Reset 

The trip odometer has a feature called retro-active 

reset. This feature can be used to set the trip odometer 

to the number of miles or kilometers driven since the 

ignition was last turned on. This can be used if you 

forget to reset your trip odometer at the beginning of a 

trip. To use the retro-active reset feature, push and 

hold the trip/reset button for at least three seconds. 

The trip odometer will then display the number of miles 

or kilometers driven since the ignition was last turned 

on and you began driving. (If you use the retro-active 

reset feature after you have started the vehicle, but 

before you begin moving, the display will show 

the number of miles or kilometers you drove during the 

last ignition cycle.) Once you begin driving, the trip 

odometer will accumulate mileage. For example, if you 

have driven 5.0 miles (8.0 km) since you started 

your vehicle, and then activate the retro-active reset 

feature, the display will show 5.0 miles (8.0 km). 

As you drive, the display will then increase to 

5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc. 

Tachometer 

The tachometer 

displays the engine 

speed in revolutions 

per minute (rpm). 

Notice: Do not operate the engine with the 

tachometer in the red area, or engine damage 

may occur. 

3-31

Safety Belt Reminder Light 

When the key is turned to ON or START, a chime will 

come on for several seconds to remind people to fasten 

their safety belts. 

Air Bag Readiness Light 

The safety belt light will 

also come on and stay 

on for several seconds. 

If the driver’s belt is 

already buckled, neither 

the chime nor the light 

will come on. 

There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument 

panel, which shows the air bag symbol. The system 

checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. 

The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. 

The system check includes the air bag sensor, the air 

bag modules, the wiring and the diagnostic module. 

For more information on the air bag system, see Air Bag 

Systems on page 1-59. 

This light will come on 

when you start your 

vehicle, and it will flash 

for a few seconds. 

Then the light should go 

out. This means the 

system is ready. 

If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the 

vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air 

bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle 

serviced right away. 

{CAUTION: 

If the air bag readiness light stays on after you 

start your vehicle, it means the air bag system 

may not be working properly. The air bags in 

your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they 

could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid 

injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle 

serviced right away if the air bag readiness light 

stays on after you start your vehicle. 

3-32

The air bag readiness light should flash for a few 

seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the 

light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will 

be ready to warn you if there is a problem. 

Brake System Warning Light 

When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light 

will come on when you set your parking brake. The 

light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release 

fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully 

released, it means you have a brake problem. 

Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two 

parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still 

work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need 

both parts working well. 

If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake 

problem. Have your brake system inspected right away. 

This light should come on briefly when you turn the 

ignition key to ON. If it doesn’t come on then, have it 

fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem. 

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the 

road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is 

harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the 

floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, 

have the vehicle towed for service. See Anti-Lock Brake 

System Warning Light on page 3-34 and Towing Your 

Vehicle on page 4-31. 

{CAUTION: 

Your brake system may not be working 

properly if the brake system warning light is 

on. Driving with the brake system warning light 

on can lead to an accident. If the light is still 

on after you’ve pulled off the road and stopped 

carefully, have the vehicle towed for service. 

United States 


3-33

Anti-Lock Brake System 

Warning Light 

Traction Control System (TCS) 

Warning Light 

United States Canada United States Canada 

Your vehicle may have an anti-lock brake system 

warning light. If it does, the light should come on for a 

few seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the 

anti-lock brake system warning light stays on longer 

than normal after you’ve started your engine, turn 

the ignition off. Or, if the light comes on and stays on 

when you’re driving, stop as soon as possible and turn 

the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset 

the system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again 

while you’re driving, the anti-lock brake system needs 

service and you don’t have anti-lock brakes. 

The anti-lock brake system warning light should come 

on briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON. If 

the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be 

ready to warn you if there is a problem. 

Your vehicle may have a traction control system 

warning light. The traction control system warning light 

may come on for the following reasons: 

• If you turn the system off by pressing the TRAC OFF 

button located in the instrument panel switchbank the 

warning light will come on and stay on. To turn the 

system back on, press the button again. The warning 

light should go off. See Traction Control System 

(TCS) on page 4-10 for more information. 

• If there’s an engine-related and brake system 

problem that is specifically related to traction control, 

the traction control system will turn off and the 

warning light will come on. 

If the traction control system warning light comes on 

and stays on for an extended period of time when the 

system is turned on, your vehicle needs service. 

3-34

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage 

Malfunction Indicator Lamp 

Service Engine Soon Light in the 

United States or Check Engine Light 

in Canada 

United States 


This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. 

If the gage pointer moves into the red area, your engine 

is too hot! 

It means that your engine coolant has overheated. 

If you have been operating your vehicle under normal 

driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your 

vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible. 

See Engine Overheating on page 5-23. 

United States 


Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which 

monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission 

control systems. 

3-35

This system is called OBD II (On-Board 

Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to 

assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the 

life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner 

environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK 

ENGINE light comes on to indicate that there is a 

problem and service is required. Malfunctions often will 

be indicated by the system before any problem is 

apparent. This may prevent more serious damage to 

your vehicle. This system is also designed to assist your 

service technician in correctly diagnosing any 

malfunction. 

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this 

light on, after a while, your emission controls 

may not work as well, your fuel economy may not 

be as good and your engine may not run as 

smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may 

not be covered by your warranty. 

Notice: Modifications made to the engine, 

transaxle, exhaust, intake or fuel system of your 

vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with 

other than those of the same Tire Performance 

Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission 

controls and may cause this light to come on. 

Modifications to these systems could lead to costly 

repairs not covered by your warranty. This may 

also result in a failure to pass a required Emission 

Inspection/Maintenance test. 

This light should come on, as a check to show you it is 

working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not 

running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired. 

This light will also come on during a malfunction in one 

of two ways: 

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been 

detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and 

may damage the emissio control system on your 

vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be required. 

• Light On Steady — An emission control system 

malfunction has been detected on your vehicle. 

Diagnosis and service may be required. 

If the Light Is Flashing 

The following may prevent more serious damage to 

your vehicle: 

• Reducing vehicle speed. 

• Avoiding hard accelerations. 

• Avoiding steep uphill grades. 

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of 

cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible. 

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, 

see “If the Light Is On Steady” following. 

3-36

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so, 

stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle. 

Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart 

the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If 

the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still 

flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealer 

for service as soon as possible. 

If the Light Is On Steady 

You may be able to correct the emission system 

malfunction by considering the following: 

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle? 

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install 

the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-6. The 

diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has 

been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing 

fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. 

A few driving trips with the cap properly installed 

should turn the light off. 

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water? 

If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition 

will usually be corrected when the electrical system 

dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off. 

Have you recently changed brands of fuel? 

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. 

See Gasoline Octane on page 5-4. Poor fuel quality will 

cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed. 

You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling 

when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation 

on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These 

conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.) 

This will be detected by the system and cause the 

light to turn on. 

If you experience one or more of these conditions, 

change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least 

one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off. 

If none of the above steps have made the light turn off, 

your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has 

the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any 

mechanical or electrical problems that may have 

developed. 

3-37

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance 

Programs 

Some state/provincial and local governments have or 

may begin programs to inspect the emission control 

equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this 

inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle 

registration. 

Here are some things you need to know in order to help 

your vehicle pass an inspection: 

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the SERVICE 

ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light is on or not 

working properly. 

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD 

(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical 

emission control systems have not been completely 

diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be 

considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if 

you have recently replaced your battery or if your 

battery has run down. The diagnostic system is 

designed to evaluate critical emission control systems 

during normal driving. This may take several days 

of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle 

still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD 

system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the 

vehicle for inspection. 

Fuel Gage 

United States 


When the indicator nears empty, you still have a little 

fuel left, but you should get more soon. 

If your fuel is low, the warning message in the message 

center will come on. See Low Fuel Warning Message 

on page 3-46 later in this section. 

Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have 

left when the ignition is on. 

3-38

Here are four things that some owners ask about. 

All these things are normal and do not indicate that 

anything is wrong with the fuel gage. 

• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before 

the gage reads full. 

• It takes a little more (or less) fuel to fill up than the 

gage reads. For example, the gage reads half full, 

but it took more (or less) than half of the tank’s 

capacity to fill it. 

• The gage pointer may move while cornering, 

braking or speeding up. 

• The gage may not indicate empty when the ignition 

is turned off. 

Message Center 

The message center is located in the instrument panel 

cluster below the tachometer. It gives you important 

safety and maintenance facts. 

Service Traction System Warning 

Message 

United States 


If your vehicle has the traction control system and this 

message is displayed when you’re driving, there may be 

a problem with your traction control system. Your 

vehicle may need service. 

When this message is displayed, the traction control 

system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving 

accordingly. 

If there’s an engine-related and brake system problem 

that is specifically related to traction control, the 

traction control system will turn off and the warning 

message will come on. 

If the traction control system warning message comes 

on and stays on for an extended period of time when the 

system is turned on, your vehicle needs service. 

3-39

Traction Active Message 

Engine Coolant Temperature 

Warning Message 

United States 


If your vehicle has the traction control system, the 

TRACTION ACTIVE message will appear when the 

traction control system is limiting wheel spin. You may 

feel or hear the system working, but this is normal. 

Slippery road conditions may exist if this message 

appears, so adjust your driving accordingly. The 

message will stay on for a few seconds after the traction 

control system stops limiting wheel spin. 

United States 


This message will come on when your engine gets 

too hot. 

If this message comes on, it means that your engine 

coolant has overheated. If you have been operating your 

vehicle under normal driving conditions, you should 

pull off the road, stop your vehicle and turn off the 

engine as soon as possible. 

See Engine Overheating on page 5-23. 

3-40

Charging System Indicator Message 

Low Oil Pressure Message 

The charging system 

battery symbol will come 

on in the message 

center when you turn on 

the ignition as a check 

to show you it is working. 

It will remain on as long as the engine is not running. 

It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays on, 

or comes on while you are driving, you may have a 

problem with the charging system. It could indicate that 

you have problems with a generator drive belt, or 

another electrical problem. Have it checked right away. 

Driving while this indicator appears in the message 

center could drain your battery. 

If you must drive a short distance with the message on, 

be certain to turn off all your accessories, such as 

the radio and air conditioner. 

United States 


Your vehicle is equipped with a low oil pressure warning 

message. 

Your oil pressure message lets you know when you 

may have a problem with your engine oil pressure. 

3-41

When the engine is running and this message appears, 

the engine oil level may be too low. There may also 

be another problem causing low oil pressure. 

Low Engine Oil Level Message 

{CAUTION: 

Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low. 

If you do, your engine can become so hot that 

it catches fire. You or others could be burned. 

Check your oil as soon as possible and have 

your vehicle serviced. 

Notice: Damage to your engine from neglected oil 

problems can be costly and is not covered by 

your warranty. 

United States 


If this message comes on, it means your engine is low 

on oil. 

You need to check the oil level right away. Have your 

vehicle serviced immediately. 

3-42

Change Engine Oil Message 

Low Tire Message 


If this message comes on and stays on after you started 

the engine, have the oil changed. 

For additional information on when to change the oil 

and resetting the system, see Engine Oil on page 5-11. 

Your vehicle may have a LOW TIRE PRESSURE 

message. If it does, the check tire pressure system can 

alert you to a large change in the pressure of one 

tire. After the system has been properly calibrated, the 

LOW TIRE PRESSURE message will come on and 

a chime will sound if a pressure difference (low 

pressure) is detected in one tire. 

The message will stay on until you turn off the ignition 

or reset (calibrate) the system. See Check Tire Pressure 

System on page 5-51. 

If the anti-lock brake system warning light comes on, 

the check tire pressure system may not be working 

properly. See your dealer for service. Also, see 

Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light on page 3-34. 

3-43

Door Ajar Warning Message 

PASS-Key ® III Security Message 

United States 


United States 


This message will come on when the ignition is turned 

to ON or START and the driver’s or passenger’s 

door is open. 

Rear Hatch Ajar Warning Message 

If you are ever driving and this message comes on and 

stays on, you will be able to restart your engine if 

you turn it off. 

Your PASS-Key ® III system, however, is not working 

properly and must be serviced by your dealer. Your 

vehicle is not protected by the PASS-Key ® III system at 

this time. See PASS-Key ® III on page 2-16 for more 

information. 

United States 


This message will come on when the ignition is turned 

to ON or START and the liftgate is open. 

3-44

All-Wheel Drive Disable Warning 

Message 

Low Washer Fluid Warning Message 

United States 


Your vehicle may have this message. If it does, it will 

come on when there is a spare tire on the vehicle, 

or when the anti-lock brake system warning light comes 

on, or when the rear differential fluid is overheating. 

This message will go out when the differential 

fluid cools. 

The all-wheel-drive system will be disabled until the 

compact spare tire is replaced by a full-size tire. If the 

warning message is still on after putting on the full-size 

tire, you need to reset the warning message. To 

reset the warning message, turn the ignition off and 

then back on again. If the message stays on, see your 

dealer right away. See All-Wheel Drive (AWD) 

System on page 4-11 for more information. 

United States 


If your washer fluid is low, the warning message will 

come on and stay on until you add washer fluid. 

See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-34 for adding 

washer fluid instructions. 

If the warning message is still on after adding fluid, you 

need to reset the warning message. To reset the 

warning message, turn the ignition off and then back on. 

If the message stays on, see your dealer right away. 

3-45

Low Fuel Warning Message 

Low Brake Fluid Warning Message 


If your fuel is low, the warning message will come on 

and stay on until you add fuel. 

If the warning message is still on after adding fuel, you 

need to reset the warning message. To reset the 


If the message stays on, see your dealer. 

If your brake fluid is low, the warning message will 

come on and stay on until you add brake fluid. 

The brake system warning light will also be illuminated. 

If this message appears, the brakes need attention. 

You should have your vehicle serviced immediately. See 

Brake System Warning Light on page 3-33 and Brakes 

on page 5-35. 

If the warning message is still on after adding fluid, you 

may need to reset the warning message. To reset the 


If the message stays on, see your dealer right away. 

3-46

Service Vehicle Soon Message 

Program Mode Message 


This light will come on if your vehicle has certain 

non-emission related problems. 

For example, if the entire electrical system fails to send 

and receive messages from the vehicle’s components, 

this message will come on. 

These problems may not be obvious and may affect 

vehicle performance or durability. Consult a qualified 

dealership for necessary repairs to maintain top vehicle 

performance. 

If you receive this message, your vehicle is in program 

mode. If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver 

Information Center (DIC), you are ready to begin 

programming your vehicle’s customization features. 

See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-52 for more 

information. 

3-47

Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter 

Battery Low Warning Message 

Park Lamp Warning Message 

United States 


If you receive this message, the battery in the remote 

keyless entry needs to be replaced. See “Battery 

Replacement” under Remote Keyless Entry System 

Operation on page 2-5 for instructions. 

United States 


If you receive this message, one or both of the vehicle’s 

parking lamp bulbs needs replacement. See Bulb 

Replacement on page 5-45 for bulb replacement 

instructions. 

3-48

Driver Information Center (DIC) 


Center (DIC), the display is located on the instrument 

panel cluster directly above the steering column. 

The DIC will show information about the vehicle and the 

surroundings. 

The DIC has a compass display to show you which 

direction the vehicle is driving. 

Compass Variance 

Compass variance is the difference between magnetic 

north and geographic north. In some areas of the 

country, the difference is great enough to cause the 

compass to give false readings. If this occurs, the 

compass must be set. 

Automatic Compass Calibration 

The compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the 

need to manually set the compass. When the vehicle is 

new, the calibration process may not be complete. In 

these cases, the calibration symbol C will be displayed 

where the compass reading is normally displayed. 

To calibrate the compass, in an area free from large 

metal objects, make three 360 degree turns. The 

calibration symbol will turn off and the compass reading 

will be displayed. 

Manual Compass Calibration 

If the compass appears erratic and the calibration 

symbol does not appear, you must manually put the 

compass into the calibration mode. To get into this 

mode, do the following: 

1. Turn the ignition on and cycle the DIC to the 

compass/temperature mode. 

2. Press and hold the SET button for longer then 

three seconds. 

3-49

PRESS SET TO CALIBRATE COMPASS: After 

selecting your zone, press the MODE button and this 

will be displayed on the DIC. Press the SET button and 

complete three 360 degree turns in an area free from 

large metal objects. 

The following two messages will toggle in the display 

until you calibrate the compass: 

• DRIVE VEHICLE IN CIRCLE 

• CALIBRATING COMPASS 

When calibration is complete, the display will return to 

its normal mode. 

ZONE # PRESS & HOLD SET TO CHANGE: This 

display mode will be displayed when you are manually 

calibrating the system. The current zone number for 

compass variance will be displayed in place of the 

# symbol. Use the SET button to select the zone number 

from the graphic shown to select the current area of 

the country that you are driving in. 

DIC Controls and Displays 

When the ignition is turned to ON or START, the DIC 

will display the following: 

PONTIAC: PONTIAC will be displayed for 

three seconds. 

DRIVER #: This message will be displayed for three 

seconds after PONTIAC appears in the display. 

This message lets you know which remote keyless entry 

and customization features the vehicle is using. 

3-50

The DIC controls are 

located to the right of the 

instrument panel cluster. 

The DIC will be in the last mode displayed when the 

engine was turned off. To select a different mode, press 

MODE. The display will cycle through its options at 

each press of MODE. 

MODE: This button lets you cycle through the options 

on the display. 

SET: This button is used to select and set the options 

to your preference. 

The DIC will always display the compass reading and 

the outside temperature. If the temperature is below 

38°F (3°C), the temperature reading will toggle between 

displaying the temperature and the word ICE for 

two minutes. 

AVG ECONOMY (Average Economy): Average fuel 

economy is viewed as a long term approximation of your 

overall driving conditions. To learn the average fuel 

economy from a new starting point, press and hold the 

SET button while the average fuel economy is 

displayed on the DIC. The average fuel economy will 

set to zero. 

INST ECONOMY (Instant Economy): Instant fuel 

economy varies with your driving conditions, such as 

acceleration, braking and the grade of the road 

being traveled. 

FUEL RANGE: The fuel range is an estimated distance 

that your vehicle can travel on the remaining fuel. 

The fuel economy used to calculate the range is based 

on your driving history since the last reset of the 

average speed. 

FUEL USED: The fuel used display will show you how 

much fuel has been used since the last time it was 

reset. To reset the fuel used to zero, press and hold the 

SET button while the fuel used is displayed on the 

DIC and until the display goes to zero. 

AVG SPEED (Average Speed): The average speed 

display will show your average speed from when 

you first started your vehicle. To reset the average 

speed, press and hold the SET button while the average 

speed is displayed on the DIC and until the speed 

resets to your current speed. 

3-51

OIL LIFE LEFT HOLD SET TO RESET: This message 

displays the current percentage of the oil life by the 

GM Oil Life System. To reset the oil life, press and hold 

the SET button while this message is displayed. 

When the system is reset 100% will be displayed and 

the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message on the message 

center will go off. 

TIRE PRESSURE: The check tire pressure system can 

alert you to a large change in the pressure of one 

tire. You must begin driving before the system will detect 

a low tire pressure. 

USE SET TO SELECT ENGLISH METRIC: You can 

use this display to select English or metric. Press 

the SET button to toggle between English or metric. 

The odometer, the trip odometer and if your vehicle is 

equipped the head-up display will also change. 

OFF: No driver information will be displayed in this 

mode. If the DIC is left in this mode for more than 

three seconds, the display will turn off. Press the 

MODE button to start the DIC. 

DIC Vehicle Personalization 

The DIC is used to program the choices of two drivers. 

The drivers are recognized as DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2 

on the DIC display. You will let the DIC know which 

driver you are by using your remote keyless entry 

transmitter. Each remote keyless entry transmitter was 

pre-programmed to belong to DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2. 

Each transmitter may be programmed differently for 

each driver’s preferences. 

After you press the LOCK button on your transmitter 

and the ignition key is in ON, the DIC will display 

the identified driver number. The vehicle will also recall 

the vehicle customization features that were last 

programmed to correspond to your transmitter. 

If you unlock your vehicle using your key instead of your 

transmitter, the DIC will not change drivers and your 

vehicle will recall the information from the last 

transmitter used. 

Entering Programming Mode 

To program features, your vehicle must be in the 

programming mode. Follow these steps: 

1. Turn the ignition key to ON with the vehicle in 

PARK (P). 

2. Press and release the MODE button, scrolling 

through the DIC messages, until PRESS SET 

TO BEGIN PERSONALIZATION is displayed. 

3-52

3. Press the SET button and TO SELECT DRIVER 

PRESS REMOTE LOCK will appear. Press the 

LOCK button on the remote keyless entry. 

This identifies which remote keyless entry 

transmitter is being programmed by displaying 

PERSONALIZATION FOR DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2. 

United States 


4. The program mode message will appear in the 

message center as an indication that your vehicle 

is ready to begin programming. 

5. Follow the instructions given by the DIC. 


This feature allows you to customize the headlamps and 

parking lamps. 

OFF: The headlamps and parking lamps will not turn 

on at the same instant that the ignition is turned to OFF. 

15: The headlamps and parking lamps will stay on 

for 15 seconds when the ignition is turned to OFF. 

30: The headlamps and parking lamps will stay on for 

30 seconds when the ignition is turned to OFF. 

60: The headlamps and parking lamps will stay on for 

60 seconds when the ignition is turned to OFF. 

Your vehicle was originally programmed to 30 second 

mode. The mode may have been changed since 

then. To determine the current mode, or to change the 

mode, do the following: 

1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming 

Mode” listed previously. 

2. Press the MODE button until HEADLAMP EXIT 

DELAY appears in the DIC. 

3. Press the SET button until the arrow is before the 

mode you prefer. 





3-53

Interior Lighting Delay 

The interior lighting delay feature can be programmed to 

one of the following modes: 

OFF: This feature will not illuminate the interior of your 

vehicle when all of the doors are closed. 

ON: This feature will continue to illuminate the interior 

lamps for 25 seconds after all doors have been 

closed so that you can find your ignition and buckle 

your safety belt at night. 

Interior lighting delay will not occur while the ignition is 

in ON. After 25 seconds, the interior lamps will fade 

out. The lamps will fade out before the 25 seconds if: 


• all doors are locked using the remote keyless entry 

transmitter, 

• the interior lamp override is turned on, or 

• there is no occupant activity detected for an 

illumination period of 25 seconds. 

Your vehicle was originally programmed to ON. The 

mode may have been changed since then. To determine 

the current mode, or to change the mode, do the 

following: 



2. Press the MODE button until INTERIOR LIGHTING 

DELAY appears on the DIC. 

3. Press the SET button until the arrow is before 

ON or OFF. 





Interior Lighting On 

The interior lighting on feature can be programmed to 


KEY OUT: The interior lamps will come on for about 

25 seconds whenever you remove the key from 

the ignition. 

DOOR: The interior lamps will come on for about 

25 seconds when any door is opened. 

3-54

Interior lighting on will not occur while the ignition is in 

ON. After 25 seconds, the interior lamps will fade 

out. The lamps will fade out before the 25 seconds if: 



transmitter, 

• the interior lamp override is turned on, or 

• there is no occupant activity detected for an 

illumination period of 25 seconds. 

Your vehicle was originally programmed to DOOR. 






2. Press the MODE button until INTERIOR LIGHTING 

ON appears on the DIC. 


KEY OUT or DOOR. 

The mode you selected is now set. You can either 

exit programming mode by following the instructions 



Auto Door Lock/Unlock 

The doors will automatically lock when the vehicle is 

shifted out of PARK ( P). For automatic unlocking, you 

can program your vehicle to one of the following modes: 

OFF: When the shift lever is put in PARK (P), 

your doors will not unlock automatically. 

DRIVER: When the shift lever is put in PARK (P), 

only your driver’s door will unlock. 

ALL: When the shift lever is put in PARK (P), 

all doors will unlock. 

Your vehicle was originally programmed to ALL. 






2. Make sure that the AUTO DOOR LOCK feature is 

programmed to ON. 

3. Press the MODE button until AUTO DOOR 

UNLOCK appears on the DIC. 

4. Press the SET button until the arrow is before OFF, 

DRIVER or ALL. 

3-55

If the auto door unlock feature has been programmed to 

DRIVER or ALL, the automatic door unlock feature 

can also be programmed to one of the following modes: 

PARK: All doors will unlock when the shift lever is 

put in PARK (P). 

KEY OUT: All doors will unlock when the ignition key is 

removed. 

Your vehicle was originally programmed to PARK. 






2. Follow the instructions for programming AUTO 

DOOR UNLOCK to DRIVER or ALL listed 

previously. 

3. Press the MODE button until AUTO DOOR 

UNLOCK/PARK KEYOUT appears on the DIC. 


PARK or KEY OUT. 






The delayed locking feature can be programmed to one 

of the following modes: 

ON: Lock your vehicle using the power door lock switch 

or the remote keyless transmitter while any door is 

opened, you will hear three chimes and the doors will 

not lock. Five seconds after the last door is closed, 

all doors will lock. 

Once delayed locking is programmed to ON, you can do 


• Cancel the delayed locking by pressing unlock 

using the power door lock switch or by fully inserting 

the key in the ignition, 

• override the delayed locking feature by pressing 

lock immediately using the power door lock 

switch, or 

• let the delayed locking feature complete the locking 

of the vehicle. 

OFF: The doors will always lock immediately when you 

lock the doors using the power door lock switch or 

press LOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter. 

3-56

Your vehicle was originally programmed to ON. 






2. Press the MODE button until DELAYED LOCKING 

appears on the DIC. 


ON or OFF. 





Remote Door Unlock 

The remote door unlock feature can be programmed to 


DRIVER/ALL: With the first press of UNLOCK on the 

remote keyless entry transmitter, the driver’s door 

will unlock, and with the second press of UNLOCK, 

within five seconds of the first press, all passenger’s 

doors will unlock. 

ALL: All doors will unlock with every press of UNLOCK 

on the remote entry transmitter. 

Your vehicle was originally programmed to ALL. 






2. Press the MODE button until REMOTE DOOR 

UNLOCK appears on the DIC. 


DRIVER/ALL or ALL. 





3-57

Unlock Feedback 

The unlock feedback feature can be programmed to 


LIGHTS: This mode does the following: 

• During the day, when the ignition is in OFF and 

UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter 

is pressed, the headlamps and parking lamps 

will flash. 

• During the night, when the ignition is in OFF, the 

headlamps and parking lamps will be activated 

for 30 seconds when UNLOCK is pressed on the 

remote keyless entry transmitter. If you would like to 

change the amount of time the lamps stay on, 

change the headlamp exit delay feature. 

OFF: The headlamps and parking lamps will not flash 

when UNLOCK is pressed on the remote keyless 

entry transmitter. 

Your vehicle was originally programmed to LIGHTS. 






2. Follow the instructions for programming HEADLAMP 

EXIT DELAY earlier in this section, to make sure 

which mode it is programmed to. 

3. Press the SET button until UNLOCK FEEDBACK 


4. Press the MODE button until the arrow is before 

LIGHTS or OFF. 

5. Press the SET button once you have determined 

which mode you prefer. 





Lock Feedback 

The lock feedback feature can be programmed to one 

of the following modes: 

OFF: When LOCK is pressed on the remote keyless 

entry transmitter, the headlamps and parking lamps will 

not flash and the horn will not sound. 

LIGHTS: When LOCK is pressed on the remote 

keyless entry transmitter, the headlamps and parking 

lamps will flash briefly. 

HORN: When LOCK is pressed on the remote keyless 

entry transmitter, the headlamps and parking lamps 

will flash briefly and the horn will sound. 

3-58

Your vehicle was originally programmed to HORN. 






2. Press the MODE button until LOCK FEEDBACK 


3. Press the SET button until the arrow is before OFF, 

LIGHTS or HORN. 

The mode you selected is now set. You can now exit 

programming mode by following the instructions next in 

this section. 

Exiting Programming Mode 

To exit programming mode, do one of the following: 

• shift out of PARK (P), 

• turn the ignition key out of ON, or 

• do not program any commands for one minute 

while in the programming mode. 

The programming mode message will turn off to let you 

know that you are no longer in the programming mode. 

Once you have reached the end of the personalization 

features, PERSONALIZATION SELECTION IS 

DONE will appear briefly. Then PRESS SET TO EXIT 

MODE TO CONTINUE will appear. Pressing SET 

will exit you out of the DIC. Pressing MODE will take 

you to the beginning of personalization. 

Audio System(s) 

Notice: Before you add any sound equipment to 

your vehicle — like a tape player, CB radio, mobile 

telephone or two-way radio — be sure you can add 

what you want. If you can, it’s very important to do it 

properly. Added sound equipment may interfere with 

the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio or other 

systems, and even damage them. Your vehicle’s 

systems may interfere with the operation of sound 

equipment that has been added improperly. 

So, before adding sound equipment, check with 

your dealer and be sure to check federal rules 

covering mobile radio and telephone units. 

Your audio system has been designed to operate easily 

and to give years of listening pleasure. You will get 

the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with 

it first. Figure out which radio you have in your vehicle, 

find out what your audio system can do and how to 

operate all of its controls to be sure you’re getting the 

most out of the advanced engineering that went into it. 

3-59

Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory 

Power (RAP). With RAP, you can play your audio 

system even after the ignition is turned off. See 

“Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” under Ignition 

Positions on page 2-19. 

Setting the Time 

Your radio may have a button marked with an H or HR 

to represent hours and an M or MIN to represent 

minutes. 

Press and hold the hour button until the correct hour 

appears on the display. AM will also appear for morning 

hours. Press and hold the minute button until the 

correct minute appears on the display. The time may be 

set with the ignition on or off. 

To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting 

Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and 

hold the hour and minute buttons at the same time until 

UPDATED appears on the display. If the time is not 

available from the station, NO UPDATE will appear on 

the display. 

Radio with CD 

Radio Data System (RDS) 

Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data 

System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only 

on FM stations that broadcast RDS information. 

With RDS, your radio can do the following: 

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of 

programming, 

• receive announcements concerning local and 

national emergencies, 

• display messages from radio stations, and 

• seek to stations with traffic announcements. 

3-60

This system relies upon receiving specific information 

from these stations and will only work when the 

information is available. In rare cases, a radio station 

may broadcast incorrect information that will cause 

the radio features to work improperly. If this happens, 

contact the radio station. 

While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station name 

or the call letters will appear on the display instead of the 

frequency. RDS stations may also provide the time of 

day, a program type (PTY) for current programming and 

the name of the program being broadcast. 

XM Radio Satellite Service 

(USA Only) 

XM is a continental U.S. based satellite radio service 

that offers 100 coast to coast channels including 

music, news, sports, talk and children’s programming. 

XM provides digital quality audio and text information, 

including song title and artist name. A service fee is 

required in order to receive the XM service. For more 

information, contact XM at www.xmradio.com or 

call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). 

Playing the Radio 

PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system 

on and off. 

VOL (Volume): Turn the knob to increase or to 

decrease volume. 

SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): With SCV, 

your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for 

road and wind noise as you drive. 

Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to 

select MIN, MED or MAX. Each higher choice allows 

for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. 

Then, as you drive, SCV automatically increases the 

volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any speed. 

The volume level should always sound the same to 

you as you drive. If you don’t want to use SCV, 

select OFF. 

RCL (Recall): Push this knob to switch the display 

between the radio station frequency and the time. 

Pushing this knob with the ignition off will display 

the time. 

For XM (USA only, if equipped), pressing this button 

while in XM mode to retrieve various pieces of 

information related to the current song or channel. By 

pressing and releasing the RCL button, you may retrieve 

four different categories of information: Artist, Song Title, 

Category or PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name. 

To change the default on the display, push the knob 

until you see the display you want, then hold the knob 

until the display flashes. The selected display will 

now be the default. 

3-61

Finding a Station 

BAND: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1, 

FM2, or XM1, XM2 (USA only, if equipped). The 

display will show your selection. 

TUNE: Turn this knob to choose radio stations. 

w SEEK x: Press the up or the down arrow to go to 

the next or to the previous station and stay there. 

The radio will seek only to stations that are in the 

selected band and only to those with a strong signal. 

w SCAN x: Press and hold one of the SCAN arrows 

for two seconds until SCAN appears on the display 

and you hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play 

for a few seconds, then go on to the next station. 

Press one of the SCAN arrows again to stop scanning. 

To scan preset stations, press and hold one of the 

SCAN arrows for more than four seconds until PSCAN 

and the preset number appear on the display. You 

will hear a double beep. The radio will go to the first 

preset station stored on your pushbuttons, play for a few 

seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press 

one of the SCAN arrows again to stop scanning presets. 

The radio will scan only to stations that are in the 


Setting Preset Stations 

The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your 

favorite stations. You can set up to 30 stations (six AM, 

six FM1 and six FM2, six XM1 and six XM2 (USA 

only, if equipped), by performing the following steps: 

1. Turn the radio on. 

2. Press BAND to select AM, FM1, FM2, or XM1, 

or XM2. 

3. Tune in the desired station. 

4. Press EQ to select the equalization. 

5. Press and hold one of the six numbered 

pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you 

press that numbered pushbutton, the station 

you set will return and the equalization that you 

selected will also be automatically selected for that 

pushbutton. 

6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. 

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) 

TONE: Press and release this button until BASS, MID 

or TREB appears on the display. The SELECT LED 

indicator will light to show that the tone control can be 

adjusted. Turn the SELECT knob to increase or to 

decrease. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to 

decrease the treble. 

3-62

To adjust all of the tone controls to the middle position, 

press and hold TONE until FLAT appears on the 

display. 

EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to select customized 

bass, mid and treble equalization settings. 

You can set up to six customized equalization settings 

by performing the following steps: 


2. Use the TONE button and the SELECT knob to 

create the desired equalization. 

3. Press and hold the EQ button for two seconds. 

SELECT EQ # will appear on the display and the 

EQ symbol will flash. 

4. Press EQ or turn the SELECT knob to select the 

desired EQ number. 

5. Press and hold the EQ button or push the SELECT 

knob to store the equalization setting and the 

number. You will hear a beep and EQ SAVED will 

appear on the display. 

6. Repeat the steps for the other EQ settings and 

numbers. 

EQ 5 has been programmed at the factory for use with 

talk radio, but it can be preset to a different tone. 

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) 

BAL (Balance): Press and release this button until 

BAL appears on the display. The SELECT LED indicator 

will light to show that the speakers can be adjusted. 

Turn the SELECT knob to move the sound toward the 

left or the right speakers. 

FADE: Press and release this button until FADE 

appears on the display. The SELECT LED indicator will 

light to show that the speakers can be adjusted. 


front or the speakers. 

Pressing and holding the BAL FADE button for two 

seconds will return all speaker settings to the middle 

position. 

Finding a PTY Station (RDS and XM) 

To select and find a desired PTY perform the following: 

1. Press PROG TYPE. The PTY symbol will be 

displayed on the screen. 

2. Select a category by turning the SELECT knob. 

3. Once the desired category is displayed, press either 

SEEK arrow to select the category and take you to 

the category’s first station. 

3-63

4. If you want to go to another station within that 

category and the category is displayed, press 

either SEEK arrow once. If the category is not 

displayed, press either SEEK arrow twice to display 

the category and then to go to another station. 

5. Press PROG TYPE to exit program type mode. 

SCAN: You can also scan through the channels within 

a category by performing the following: 




3. Once the desired category is displayed, press and 

hold either SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin 

scanning within your chosen category. 

4. Press either SCAN arrow again to stop at a 

particular station. 

BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency 

allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the 

same programming. Press and hold BAND for two 

seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON 

will appear on the display. The radio may switch to 

stronger stations. Press and hold BAND again for two 

seconds to turn alternate frequency off. AF OFF 

will appear on the display. The radio will not switch to 

other stations. 

This function does not apply for XM. 

Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only) 


favorite program types (PTYs). These pushbuttons have 

factory PTY presets. You can set up to 12 PTYs 

(six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the following steps: 

1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2. 

2. Press PROG TYPE, if it is not already on. 

3. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY. 



press that numbered pushbutton, the PTY you 

set will return. 


RDS Messages 

ALERT!: Alert warns of national or local emergencies. 

When an alert announcement comes on the current 

radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will 

hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted 

or a compact disc is playing. If the compact disc player 

is playing, play will stop during the announcement. 

You will not be able to turn off alert announcements. 

ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency 

broadcast system. This feature is not supported by 

all RDS stations. 

3-64

INFO (Information): If the current station has a 

message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this 

button to see the message. The message may display 

the artist and song title, call in phone numbers, etc. 

If the whole message is not displayed, parts of it 

will appear every three seconds. To scroll through the 

message at your own speed, press the INFO button 

repeatedly. A new group of words will appear on 

the display with each press. Once the complete 

message has been displayed, INFO will disappear from 

the display until another new message is received. 

The old message can be displayed by pressing 

the INFO button until a new message is received or a 

different station is tuned to. 

TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, the 

tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements. 

To receive the traffic announcement from the tuned 

station, press this button. Brackets will be displayed 

around TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes 

on the tuned radio station you will hear it. 

If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic 

announcements, press this button and the radio 

will seek to a station that does. When the radio finds a 

station that broadcasts traffic announcements, it will 

stop and brackets will be displayed around TRAF. 

When a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio 

station you will hear it. If no station is found, NO 

TRAFFIC will appear on the display. 

If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not, you 

can then press the TRAF button to remove the 

brackets or use the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to 

go to a station that supports traffic announcements. 

If no station is found, NO TRAFFIC will appear on the 

display. 

Your radio will play the traffic announcements even if 

the volume is muted or interrupt the play of a CD if the 

last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements. 

This function does not apply to XM Satellite Radio 

Service. 

Radio Messages 

CALIBRATE: Your audio system has been calibrated 

for your vehicle from the factory. If CALIBRATE appears 

on the display, it means that your radio has not been 

configured properly for your vehicle and must be 

returned to the dealership for service. 

3-65

Radio Display 

Message 

XL (Explicit Language 

Channels) 

Updating 

Condition 

XL on the radio display, 

after the channel name, 

indicates content with 

explicit language. 

Updating 

encryption code 

XM Radio Messages 

Action Required 

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a 

customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). 

The encryption code in your receiver is being updated, and 

no action is required. This process should take no longer 

than 30 seconds. 

No Signal Loss of signal Your system is functioning correctly, but you are in a 

location that is blocking the XM signal. When you move into 

an open area, the signal should return. 

Loading XM 

Acquiring channel audio 

(after 4 second delay) 

Your radio system is acquiring and processing audio and 

text data. No action is needed. This message should 

disappear shortly. 

CH Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another 

channel. 

CH Unavail 

No Info 

No Info 

3-66 

Channel no longer 

available 

Artist Name/Feature not 

available 

Song/Program Title not 

available 

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned. 

Tune to another station. If this station was one of your 

presets, you may need to choose another station for that 

preset button. 

No artist information is available at this time on this channel. 

Your system is working properly. 

No song title information is available at this time on this 

channel. Your system is working properly.

Radio Display 

Message 

No Info 

No Info 

Not Found 

XM Radio Messages (cont’d) 

Condition 

Category Name not 

available 

No Text/Informational 

message available 

No channel available for 

the chosen category 


No category information is available at this time on this 

channel. Your system is working properly. 

No text or informational messages are available at this time 

on this channel. Your system is working properly. 

There are no channels available for the category you 

selected. Your system is working properly. 

XM Locked Theft lock active The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been 

in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers 

cannot be swapped between vehicles. If you receive this 

message after having your vehicle serviced, check with the 

servicing facility. 

Radio ID 

Unknown 

Radio ID label 

(channel 0) 

Radio ID not known 

(should only be if 

hardware failure) 

If you tune to channel 0, you will see this message 

alternating with your XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. 

This label is needed to activate your service. 

If you receive this message when you tune to channel 0, 

you may have a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer. 

Chk XMRcvr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time, 

your receiver may have a fault. Consult with your retail 

location. 

3-67

Playing a Compact Disc 

With the ignition on, insert a disc partway into the slot, 

label side up. The player will pull it in and the disc 

should begin playing. If you want to insert a CD when 

the ignition is off, first press the eject symbol or push the 

RCL knob. If you insert a CD with the radio off and 

the ignition on, it will start to play. 

When the disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be 

displayed. If you select an EQ setting for your CD, it will 

be activated each time you play a CD. 

As each new track starts to play, the track number will 


The integral CD player can play the smaller 8 cm single 

discs with an adapter ring. Full-size compact discs 

and the smaller discs are loaded in the same manner. 

If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced due 

to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality 

of the music that has been recorded and the way 

the CD-R has been handled. You may experience an 

increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks and/or 

difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur 

try a known good CD. 

Do not add paper labels to discs, they could get caught 

in the CD player. 

Do not play 3 inch discs without a standard adapter disc. 

If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc 

Messages” later in this section. 

\1 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to 

advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a 

reduced volume. Release it to play the passage. The 

display will show elapsed time. 

RDM 3 (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the 

tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. 

RDM and the track number will appear on the display. 

4s (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton 

to reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at 

a reduced volume. Release it to play the passage. 

The display will show elapsed time. 

EQ (Equalizer): Press EQ to select the desired 

customized equalization setting while playing a compact 

disc. The equalization will be automatically set 

whenever you play a compact disc. See “EQ” listed 


w SEEK x: Press the down arrow while playing a 

CD to go to the start of the current track if more 

than eight seconds have played. Press the up arrow to 

go to the next track. If you hold the button or press 

it more than once, the player will continue moving 

backward or forward through the disc. 

3-68

w SCAN x: Press and hold one of the arrows for 

more than two seconds until SCAN and the track 

number appear on the display and you hear a beep. 

The disc will go to the next track, play for a few seconds, 

then go on to the next track. Press this button again 

to stop scanning. 

RCL (Recall): Push this button to see how long the 

current track has been playing. To change the default on 

the display (track and elapsed time), push the knob 


until the display flashes. The selected display will 

now be the default. While elapsed time is showing, 

CD TIME will appear on the display. 

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a 

CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely 

inside the radio for future listening. 

CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a 

compact disc when listening to the radio. CD will appear 

on the display when a compact disc is loaded. 

Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject 

may be activated with either the ignition or radio off. 

CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this 

button is pressed first. 

Compact Disc Messages 

CHECK CD: If this message appears on the radio 

display and the disc comes out, it could be for one of 

the following reasons: 

• You’re driving on a very rough road. When the road 

becomes smoother, the disc should play. 

• The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down. 

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and 

try again. 

• There may have been a problem while burning 

the CD. 

• The label may be caught in the CD player. 

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason, 


If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be 

corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an 

error message, write it down and provide it to your 

dealer when reporting the problem. 

3-69

Radio with Cassette and CD 







programming, 











While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station name 

or the call letters will appear on the display instead of the 

frequency. RDS stations may also provide the time of 

day, a program type (PTY) for current programming and 

the name of the program being broadcast. 


(USA Only) 








call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). 


PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system 

on and off. 



3-70

SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): With SCV, your 

audio system adjusts automatically to make up for 



select MIN, MED or MAX. Each higher choice allows for 

more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. 

Then, as you drive, SCV automatically increases the 

volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any speed. 

The volume level should always sound the same to you 

as you drive. If you don’t want to use SCV, select OFF. 



Pushing this knob with the ignition off will display the time. 

For XM (USA only, if equipped), pressing this button 

while in XM mode to retrieve various pieces of 

information related to the current song or channel. By 

pressing and releasing the RCL button, you may retrieve 

four different categories of information: Artist, Song Title, 

Category or PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name. 

To change the default on the display, push the knob until 

you see the display you want, then hold the knob until the 

display flashes. The selected display will now be the 

default. 


BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2, 

AM, or XM1, or XM2 (USA only, if equipped). The 


TUNE: Turn this knob to choose radio stations. 

w SEEK x: Press the up or the down arrow to go to 




w SCAN x: Press and hold one of the SCAN arrows 

for two seconds until SCAN appears on the display 

and you hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play 

for a few seconds, then go on to the next station. 

Press one of the SCAN arrows again to stop scanning. 

To scan preset stations, press and hold one of the 

SCAN arrows for more than four seconds until PSCAN 

and the preset number appear on the display. You 

will hear a double beep. The radio will go to the first 

preset station stored on your pushbuttons, play for a few 

seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press 

one of the SCAN arrows again to stop scanning presets. 



3-71



favorite stations. You can set up to 30 stations (six FM1, 

six FM2, and six AM, six XM1 and six XM2 (USA 



2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1, 

or XM2. 


4. Press EQ to select the equalization. 

5. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons 

until you hear a beep. Whenever you press that 

numbered pushbutton, the station you set will return 

and the equalization that you selected will also be 

automatically selected for that pushbutton. 



TONE: Press and release this button until BASS, MID 

or TREB appears on the display. The SELECT LED 

indicator will light to show that the tone control can be 

adjusted. Turn the SELECT knob to increase or to 

decrease. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to 

decrease the treble. 

To adjust all of the tone controls to the middle position, 

press and hold TONE until FLAT appears on the 

display. 

EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to select customized 

bass, mid and treble equalization settings. 

You can set up to six customized equalization settings 

by performing the following steps: 


2. Use the TONE button and the SELECT knob to 

create the desired equalization. 

3. Press and hold the EQ button for two seconds. 

SELECT EQ # will appear on the display and the 

EQ symbol will flash. 

4. Press the EQ button or turn the SELECT knob to 

select the desired EQ setting number. 

5. Press and hold the EQ button or push the SELECT 

knob to store the equalization setting and the 

number. You will hear a beep and EQ SAVED will 


6. Repeat the steps for the other EQ settings and 

numbers. 

EQ 5 has been programmed at the factory for use with 

talk radio, but it can be set to a different tone. 

3-72


BAL (Balance): Press and release this button until 

BAL appears on the display. The SELECT LED indicator 

will light to show that the speakers can be adjusted. 


left or the right speakers. 

FADE: Press and release this button until FADE 

appears on the display. The SELECT LED indicator will 

light to show that the speakers can be adjusted. 


front or the rear speakers. 

Pressing and holding the BAL FADE button for two 

seconds will return all tone settings to flat regardless of 

tone selected. FLAT will appear on the display. 














5. Press PROG TYPE to exit program type mode. 













same programming. Press and hold BAND for two 






other stations. 


3-73



favorite program types (PTYs). These pushbuttons have 

factory PTY presets. You can set up to 12 PTYs 

(six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the following steps: 


2. Press PROG TYPE, if it is not already on. 

3. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY. 






RDS Messages 

ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies. 

When an alert announcement comes on the current radio 

station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will hear 

the announcement, even if the volume is muted or a 

cassette tape or a compact disc is playing. If the cassette 

tape or compact disc player is playing, play will stop 

during the announcement. You will not be able to turn off 

alert announcements. 


broadcast system. This feature is not supported by all 

RDS stations. 















TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, 

the tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements. 





3-74






When a traffic announcement comes on the tuned 

radio station you will hear it. If no station is found, 

NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display. 

If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not, you 

can then press the TRAF button to remove the brackets 

or use the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to go to a 

station that supports traffic announcements. If no station 

is found, NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display. 

Your radio will play the traffic announcements even if the 

volume is muted or interrupt the play of a cassette tape or 

CD if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic 

announcements. 


Service. 


CALIBRATE: Your audio system has been calibrated 

for your vehicle from the factory. If CALIBRATE appears 

on the display, it means that your radio has not been 

configured properly for your vehicle and must be 

returned to the dealership for service. 

3-75

Radio Display 

Message 


Channels) 

Updating 

Condition 





Updating 












Loading XM 







channel. 

CH Unavail 

No Info 

No Info 

3-76 


available 


available 


available 









Radio Display 

Message 

No Info 

No Info 

Not Found 


Condition 


available 

















Radio ID 

Unknown 


(channel 0) 











location. 

3-77

Playing a Cassette Tape 

Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are 

up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes 

longer than that are so thin they may not work well in 

this player. The longer side with the tape visible should 

face to the right. If the ignition is on, but the radio is 

off, the tape can be inserted and will begin playing. If 

you hear nothing but a garbled sound, the tape may not 

be in squarely. Press the eject button to remove the 

tape and start over. 

While the tape is playing, use the VOL, BAL, FADE, 

TONE, EQ and SEEK controls just as you do for 

the radio. The display will show TAPE and an arrow 

showing which side of the tape is playing. The 

tape player automatically begins playing the other side 

when it reaches the end of the tape. 

Your tape bias is set automatically when a metal or 

chrome tape is inserted. If you want to insert a 

tape while the ignition is off, first press the eject button 

or push the RCL knob. 

If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette Tape 


\1 (Forward): Press this pushbutton to advance 

quickly to another part of the tape. Press this pushbutton 

again to return to playing speed. The radio will play 

while the tape advances. You may select stations during 

forward operation by using TUNE. 

While in forward mode, the display will show FREQ and 

FWD and two right arrows. If the radio is playing a 

RDS station, the display will only show FREQ. 

y2 (Side): Press this pushbutton to play the other 

side of the tape. 

4s (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to reverse the 

tape rapidly. Press it again to return to playing speed. 

The radio will play the tape reverses. You may 

select stations during reverse operation by using TUNE. 


customized equalization setting while playing a cassette. 

The equalization will be automatically set whenever 

you play a cassette tape. See “EQ” listed previously for 

more information. 

w SEEK x: Your tape must have at least three 

seconds of silence between each selection for seek to 

work. Press the up or the down arrow to search for 

the next or the previous selection on the tape. You can 

skip as many as nine selections up or down on the 

tape. Choose how many selections you want to skip, 

then press the SEEK arrow that many times. The 

number of selections to be skipped will appear on the 

display. 

3-78


more than two seconds until SCAN appears on 

the display and you hear a beep. The tape will go to the 

next selection, play for a few seconds, then go on to 

the next selection. The tape will scan in forward 

only. Press this button again to stop scanning. 


tape is playing. The inactive tape or CD will remain 

safely inside the radio for future listening. 

CD TAPE: Press this button to switch between playing 

a cassette tape and a compact disc, if both are 

loaded, when listening to the radio. The display will 

show tape and CD symbols. 

Z (Eject): Press this button, located next to the 

cassette tape slot, to eject a tape. Eject may be 

activated with either the ignition or radio off. Cassettes 

may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this 

button is pressed first. 

Cassette Tape Messages 

If an error occurs while trying to play a cassette tape, 

it could be for one of the following reasons: 

TIGHT TAPE: This message is displayed when the 

tape is tight and the player can’t turn the tape hubs. 

Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the open end 

down and try to turn the right hub counterclockwise 

with a pencil. Turn the tape over and repeat. 

If the hubs do not turn easily, your tape may be 

damaged and should not be used in the player. Try a 

new tape to make sure your player is working properly. 

BROKEN TAPE: This message is displayed when 

the tape is broken. Try a new tape. 

WRAPPED TAPE: This message is displayed when the 

tape is wrapped around the tape head. Attempt to get 

the cassette out. Try a new tape. 

CLEAN PLAYER: If this message appears on the 

display, the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. 

It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as 

possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player. 

See Care of Your Cassette Tape Player on page 3-108. 





CD Adapter Kits 

It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit 

with your cassette tape player after disabling the 

tight/loose tape sensing feature on your tape player. 

To disable the feature, use the following steps: 

1. Turn the ignition on. 

2. Turn the radio off. 

3-79

3. Press and hold the CD TAPE button. The radio will 

display READY and flash the cassette symbol. 

4. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot. It will 

power up the radio and begin playing. 

The override feature will remain active until the eject 

button is pressed. 


With the ignition on, insert a disc partway into the slot, 

label side up. The player will pull it in and the disc 

should begin playing. If you want to insert a CD when 

the ignition is off, first press the eject symbol or push the 

RCL knob. If you insert a CD with the radio off and 

the ignition on, it will start to play. 

When the disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be 

displayed. If you select an EQ setting for your CD, 

it will be activated each time you play a CD. 















Do not play 3 inch discs without a standard 

adapter disc. 



\1 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to 




RDM 3 (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the 

tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. 

RDM and the track number will appear on the display. 

4s (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton 

to reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at 

a reduced volume. Release it to play the passage. 



customized equalization setting while playing a compact 

disc. The equalization will be automatically set 

whenever you play a compact disc. See “EQ” listed 


3-80

w SEEK x: Press the down arrow while playing a 

CD to go to the start of the current track if more 

than eight seconds have played. Press the up arrow to 

go to the next track. If you hold the button or press 

it more than once, the player will continue moving 

backward or forward through the disc. 


more than two seconds until SCAN and the track 

number appear on the display and you hear a beep. 

The disc will go to the next track, play for a few seconds, 

then go on to the next track. Press this button again 

to stop scanning. 

RCL (Recall): Push this knob to see how long the 

current track has been playing. To change the default 

on the display (track or elapsed time), push the 

knob until you see the display you want, then hold the 

knob until the display flashes. The selected display 

will now be the default. While elapsed time is showing, 

CD TIME will appear on the display. 


CD is playing. 

CD TAPE: Press this button to switch between playing 

a cassette tape and a compact disc if both are 

loaded, when listening to the radio. The inactive tape or 

CD will remain safely inside the radio for future 

listening. The display will show tape and CD symbols. 

Z (Eject): Press this button, located next to the CD 

slot, to eject a CD. Eject may be activated with either 

the ignition or radio off. CDs may be loaded with 

the radio and ignition off if this button is pressed first. 



display and the disc comes out, it could be for one of 

the following reasons: 

• You’re driving on a very rough road. When the road 

becomes smoother, the disc should play. 


• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and 

try again. 


the CD. 








3-81

Radio with Six-Disc CD 







programming, 











While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station 

name or the call letters will appear on the display instead 

of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the 

time of day, a program type (PTY) for current 

programming and the name of the program being 

broadcast. 


(USA Only) 








call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). 

3-82


PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on 

and off. 



AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): Your system has a 

feature called automatic volume. With this feature, 

your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for 



select MIN, MED or MAX. Each higher setting will 

allow for more volume compensation at faster vehicle 

speeds. Then, as you drive, automatic volume increases 

the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any 

speed. The volume level should always sound the same 

to you as you drive. If you don’t want to use automatic 

volume, select OFF. 



Pushing this knob with the ignition off will display the time. 

For XM (USA only, if equipped), press this button while 

in XM mode to retrieve four different categories of 

information related to the current song or channel: 

Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel Number/ 

Channel Name. 

To change the default on the display, push the knob 


until the display flashes. The selected display will now be 

the default. 


BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2, 

AM, or XM1, or XM2 (USA only, if equipped). The 


TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations. 

sSEEK t: Press the right or the left arrow to go to 




3-83

sSCAN t: Press and hold either SCAN arrow for 

two seconds until SC appears on the display and 

you hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play for 

a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press 

either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning. 

To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCAN 

arrow for more than four seconds. PRESET SCAN will 

appear on the display. You will hear a double beep. 

The radio will go to a preset station stored on your 

pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to the 

next preset station. Press either SCAN arrow again 

to stop scanning presets. 





favorite stations. You can set up to 30 stations (six FM1, 

six FM2, and six AM, six XM1 and six XM2 (USA 



2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1, 

or XM2. 


4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization. 



press that numbered pushbutton, the station 

you set will return and the equalization that you 

selected will also be automatically selected for that 

pushbutton. 



AUDIO: Push the AUDIO knob until BASS, MID or 

TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to increase 

or to decrease. If a station is weak or noisy, you may 

want to decrease the treble. 

To adjust bass, midrange or treble to the middle 

position, select BASS, MID or TREB and push and hold 

the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce one beep 

and adjust the display level to zero. 

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle 

position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone 

or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce 

one beep and CENTERED will appear on the display. 

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button 

to choose between bass, midrange and treble 

equalization settings designed for country, jazz, talk, 

pop, rock and classical program types. 

3-84

To return to the manual mode (CUSTOM), press the 

AUTO EQ button until CUSTOM appears on the display. 

Then you will be able to manually adjust the bass, 

midrange and treble using the AUDIO knob. 


AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right 

and the left speakers, push the AUDIO knob until BAL 

appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the 

sound toward the left or the right speakers. 

To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers, 

push and hold the AUDIO knob until FAD appears on 

the display. Turn the knob to move the sound toward the 

front or the rear speakers. 

To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle 

position, select balance or fade and push and hold the 

AUDIO knob. The radio will beep once and will 

adjust the display level to the middle position. 

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle 

position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone 

or speaker controls are displayed. The radio will 

produce one beep and CENTERED will appear on the 

display. 



1. Press the P-TYPE button. P-TYPE and the last 

selected PTY will be displayed on the screen. 

2. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE knob. 









5. If PTY times out and is no longer on the display, go 

back to Step 1. 

If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will search 

for stations with the selected PTY and traffic 

announcements. 

To use the PTY interrupt feature, press and hold the 

P-TYPE button until you hear a beep on the PTY 

you want to interrupt with. When selected, an asterisk 

will appear beside that PTY on the display. You 

may select multiple interrupts if desired. When you are 

listening to a compact disc, the last selected RDS 

station will interrupt play if that selected program type 

format is broadcast. 

3-85



1. Press the P-TYPE button. P-TYPE and the last 

selected PTY will be displayed on the screen. 

2. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE knob. 








same program type. Press and hold BAND for two 






other stations. When you turn the ignition off and then on 

again, the alternate frequency feature will automatically 

be turned on. 




favorite PTYs. These buttons have factory PTY presets. 

You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2) by 

performing the following steps: 


2. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program type 

select mode. 

3. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY. 






RDS Messages 

ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies. 

When an alert announcement comes on the current 

radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will 

hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted 

or a compact disc is playing. If the compact disc player 

is playing, play will stop during the announcement. 

You will not be able to turn off alert announcements. 


broadcast system. This feature is not supported by 

all RDS stations. 

3-86















TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, 

the tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements. 










When a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio 

station you will hear it. If no station is found, NO 

TRAFFIC will appear on the display. 

If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not, 

you can then press the TRAF button to remove 

the brackets or use the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows 

to go to a station that supports traffic announcements. 

If no station is found, NO TRAFFIC will appear on 

the display. 

Your radio will also interrupt the play of a CD if the last 

tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements and 

the brackets are displayed. 


Service. 


CAL ERR (Calibration Error): This message is 

displayed when the radio has not been calibrated 

properly for the vehicle. You must return to the 

dealership for service. 

LOCKED: This message is displayed when the 

THEFTLOCK ® system has locked up. You must return 

to the dealership for service. 

3-87

Radio Display 

Message 


Channels) 

Updating 

Condition 





Updating 












Loading XM 







channel. 

CH Unavail 

No Info 

No Info 

3-88 


available 


available 


available 









Radio Display 

Message 

No Info 

No Info 

Not Found 


Condition 


available 

















Radio ID 

Unknown 


(channel 0) 











location. 

3-89














Do not play 3 inch discs without a standard adapter disc. 



LOAD CD Z: Press the LOAD side of this button to 

load CDs into the compact disc player. This compact 

disc player will hold up to six discs. 

To insert one disc, do the following: 


2. Press and release the LOAD side of the LOAD 

CD button. 

3. Wait for the light, located to the right of the slot, 

to turn green. 

4. Load a disc. Insert the disc partway into the slot, 

label side up. The player will pull the disc in. 

When a disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be 

displayed. If you select an equalization setting for your 

disc, it will be activated each time you play a disc. 

If the radio is on or off, the disc will begin to play 


To insert multiple discs, do the following: 


2. Press and hold the LOAD side of the LOAD CD 

button for two seconds. 

You will hear a beep and the light, located to the 

right of the slot, will begin to flash. 

3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green, load 

a disc. Insert the disc partway into the slot, label 

side up. The player will pull the disc in. 

Once the disc is loaded, the light will begin flashing 

again. Once the light stops flashing and turns green 

you can load another disc. The disc player takes up 

to six discs. Do not try to load more than six. 

To load more than one disc but less than six, complete 

Steps 1 through 3. When you have finished loading 

discs, with the radio on or off, press the LOAD side of 

the LOAD CD button to cancel the loading function. 

The radio will begin to play the last CD loaded. 

3-90

When a disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be 

displayed. If more than one disc has been loaded, a 

number for each disc will be displayed. If you select an 

equalization setting for your disc, it will be activated 

each time you play a disc. 

If the radio is on or off, the last disc loaded will begin to 

play automatically. 



Playing a Specific Loaded Compact 

Disc 

For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the radio 

display. To play a specific CD, first press the CD AUX 

button to start playing a CD. Then press the numbered 

pushbutton that corresponds to the CD you want to 

play. A small bar will appear under the CD number that 

is playing, and the track number will appear. 

If an error appears on the radio display, see “Compact 

Disc Messages” later in this section. 

LOAD CD Z (Eject): Pressing the CD eject side of 

this button will eject a single disc or multiple discs. 

To eject the disc that is currently playing, press 

and release this button. To eject multiple discs, press 

and hold this button for two seconds. You will hear 

a beep and the light will flash to let you know when a 

disc is being ejected. 

REMOVE CD will be displayed. You can now remove 

the disc. If the disc is not removed, after 25 seconds, the 

disc will be automatically pulled back into the receiver. 

If you try to push the disc back into the receiver, 

before the 25 second time period is complete, the 

receiver will sense an error and will try to eject the disc 

several times before stopping. 

Do not repeatedly press the CD eject side of the 

LOAD CD eject button to eject a disc after you have 

tried to push it in manually. The receivers 25-second 

eject timer will reset at each press of eject, which 

will cause the receiver to not eject the disc until the 

25-second time period has elapsed. 

Once the player stops and the disc is ejected, remove 

the disc. After removing the disc, press the PWR 

knob off and then on again. This will clear the 

disc-sensing feature and enable discs to be loaded into 

the player again. 

{ REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to 

reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a 

reduced volume. Release it to play the passage. 


FWD | (Forward): Press and hold this button to 




3-91

RPT (Repeat): With repeat, you can repeat one track 

or an entire disc. To use repeat, do the following: 

• To repeat the track you are listening to, press and 

release the RPT button. RPT will appear on the 

display. Press RPT again to turn it off. 

• To repeat the disc you are listening to, press and 

hold the RPT button for two seconds. RPT will 

appear on the display. Press RPT again to turn it off. 

RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to 

the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order, on 

one disc or on all of the discs. To use random, do one of 


• To play the tracks on the disc you are listening to in 

random order, press and release the RDM button. 

RANDOM ONE will appear on the display. Press 

RDM again to turn it off. 

• To play the tracks on all of the discs that are 

loaded in random order, press and hold RDM 

for more than two seconds. You will hear a beep 

and RANDOM ALL will appear on the display. 

Press RDM again to turn it off. 

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQ 

to select the desired equalization setting while playing 

a compact disc. The equalization will be automatically 

set whenever you play a compact disc. For more 

information on AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ” listed 

previously in this section. 

sSEEK t: Press the left arrow to go to the start of 

the current track, if more than ten seconds have passed. 

Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If you 

press the button more than once, the player will continue 

moving backward or forward through the disc. 

sSCAN t: To scan one disc, press and hold either 

SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN 

appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this 

feature to listen to 10 seconds of each track of the 

currently selected disc. SCAN will appear on the display. 

Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning. 

To scan all loaded discs, press and hold either SCAN 

arrow for more than four seconds until DISC SCAN 

appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this 

feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first tracks of each 

disc loaded. Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop 

scanning. 

RCL (Recall): Push this knob to see how long the 

current track has been playing. To change the default 

on the display (track and elapsed time), push the 

knob until you see the display you want, then hold the 

knob until the display flashes. The selected display 

will now be the default. 

BAND: Press this button to play the radio when a 

disc(s) is in the player. 

CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a 

compact disc when listening to the radio. 

3-92

Using Song List Mode 

The integrated six-disc CD changer has a feature called 

song list. This feature is capable of saving 20 track 

selections. 

To save tracks into the song list feature, perform the 

following steps: 

1. Turn the disc player on and load it with at least one 

disc. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this 

section for more information. 

2. Check to see that the disc changer is not in song 

list mode. S-LIST should not appear in the display. 

If S-LIST is present, press the SONG LIST 

button to turn it off. 

3. Select the desired disc by pressing the numbered 

pushbutton and then use the SEEK SCAN right 

arrow button to locate the track that you want 

to save. The track will begin to play. 

4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two or 

more seconds to save the track into memory. 

When SONG LIST is pressed a beep will be heard 

immediately. After two seconds of pressing 

SONG LIST continuously, two beeps will sound to 

confirm that the track has been saved. 

5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections. 

If you attempt to save more than 20 selections, 

S-LIST FULL will appear on the display. 

To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button. 

One beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on the 

display. The recorded tracks will begin to play in 

the order that they were saved. 

You may seek through the song list by using the SEEK 

SCAN arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will 

return you to the first saved track. 

To delete tracks from the song list, perform the following 

steps: 

1. Turn the disc player on. 

2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on. 

S-LIST will appear on the display. 

3. Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to select the desired 

track to be deleted. 

4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two 

seconds. When pressing SONG LIST, one beep 

will be heard immediately. After two seconds 

of pressing the SONG LIST button continuously, 

two beeps will be heard to confirm that the track has 

been deleted. 

After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks are 

moved up the list. When another track is added to the 

song list, the track will be added to the end of the list. 

3-93

To delete the entire song list, perform the following steps: 

1. Turn the disc player on. 

2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on. 

S-LIST will appear on the display. 

3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more 

than four seconds. A beep will be heard, followed 

by two beeps after two seconds and a final beep will 

be heard after four seconds. S-LIST EMPTY will 

appear on the display indicating that the song 

list has been deleted. 

If a disc is ejected, and the song list contains saved 

tracks from that disc, those tracks are automatically 

deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the song 

list again are added to the bottom of the list. 

To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST button. 

One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed from 

the display. 



display, it could be due to one of the following reasons: 

• You’re driving on a very rough road. When the 

road becomes smoother, the disc should play. 


• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour 

and try again. 


the CD. 








Rear Seat Entertainment System 

Your vehicle may have a Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) 

system. The Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) includes a 

DVD player, a video display screen, two sets of 

cordless headphones and a remote control. 

Before You Drive 

The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only. 

The driver cannot safely view the video screen 

while driving and should not try to do so. 

Your DVD system is designed to be inoperable when 

the vehicle is exposed to extremely low or high 

temperatures, in order to protect your system from 

damage. Operate your DVD system under normal or 

comfortable cabin temperature ranges. 

3-94

Headphones 

The entertainment system includes two cordless 

headphones. 

The cordless headphones have an ON/OFF switch, and 

a volume control. To use the headphones turn the 

switch to ON. An indicator light on the headphones will 

illuminate. If the light does not illuminate, the batteries 

may need to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement” 

later in this section for more information. Switch the 

headphones to OFF when not in use. 

If the DVD system is shut off, or if the headphones are out 

of range of the transmitters, located below the overhead 

RSE control panel, for more than three minutes, the 

headphones will shut off automatically to save the battery 

power. If you move too far forward or step out of the 

vehicle, the headphones will lose the audio signal. 

To adjust the volume on the cordless headphones, 

use the volume control. 

Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or 

direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones 

and repairs would not be covered by your warranty. 

Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place. 

If there is a decreased audio signal during CD or DVD 

play, you may hear a low “hissing” noise through the 

speakers and/or headphones. If the hissing sound in the 

wireless headphones seems excessive, make sure 

that the headphone batteries are fully charged. Some 

amount of hissing is normal. 


To change the batteries, do the following: 

1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartment door 

located on the left side of the headphone earpiece. 

2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment. 

Make sure that they are installed correctly using the 

diagram on the inside of the battery compartment. 

3. Tighten the screw on the battery compartment door. 

If the headphones are to be stored for a long period 

of time, remove the batteries, and keep them in a cool, 

dry place. 

Stereo RCA Jacks 

The RCA jacks are located behind the video screen on 

the DVD console. The RCA jacks allow you to connect 

audio and video signals from an auxiliary device such as 

a camcorder or a video game unit to your RSE just as you 

would to a standard television. The yellow RCA jack is 

used for video, the red RCA jack for right audio, and the 

white RCA jack for left audio inputs. The system requires 

standard RCA cables (not included) to connect your 

auxiliary device to the RCA jacks. Refer to the 

manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage. 

3-95

To use the auxiliary audio and video inputs on the 

entertainment system, connect an external auxiliary 

device such as a camcorder to the RCA jacks and turn 

on both the auxiliary device power and the power on 

the front of the RSE player. 

If a disc is present when the RSE power is turned on, 

the player will automatically begin playing the disc 

and the user will need to press the SRCE button on the 

remote control or on the DVD player faceplate to 

switch to the auxiliary input signals. Pressing the SRCE 

button on the remote control or on the DVD player 

faceplate will toggle the system between DVD player 

and auxiliary device. See “DVD Player”, and “Remote 

Control” later in this section for more information. 

Audio Speakers 

Audio from the DVD Player or auxiliary devices can be 

heard through the following possible sources: 

• Cordless Headphones 

• Vehicle’s Speakers 

• Wired Headphones (Not included) 

Only one audio source can be heard through the 

vehicles speakers at a time. 

You can listen to the entertainment system or an 

auxiliary device through all of the vehicles speakers 

when the following occurs: 

• A DVD or auxiliary device is playing, and 

• the front audio system is on and the CD AUX button 

is pressed to enable the entertainment system. 

The front audio system will display RSE when the 

entertainment system is on and RSE OFF when it is off. 

To turn the vehicles speakers on and off, press the 

CD AUX button on the front audio system. The audio 

from the entertainment system can be heard through 

both the wireless headphones and the vehicles speakers 

at the same time. 

The volume on the audio system may vary when 

switching between a radio station, CD, DVD, cassette or 

auxiliary device. 

If there is a decreased audio signal during CD or DVD 

play, you may hear a low “hissing” noise through 

the speakers and/or headphones. If the hissing sound in 

the wireless headphones seems excessive, make 

sure that the headphone batteries are fully charged. 

Some amount of hissing is normal. 

3-96

Video Screen 

The video screen is located in the overhead console. 

To use the video screen, do the following: 

1. Push forward on the release button and the screen 

will fold down. 

2. Push the screen away from you and adjust its 

position as desired. 

When the video screen is not in use, push it up into its 

stowed and latched position. 

The DVD player and display will continue to operate 

when the video screen is in either the up or down 

positions. 

The video screen contains the transmitters for the 

cordless headphones and the receiver for the remote 

control. If the screen is in the closed position, the signals 

will not be available for the operation of the headphones 

or the remote control. 

Notice: Avoid directly touching the video screen, 

as damage may occur. See Cleaning the Video 

Screen on page 3-110 for more information. 

DVD Player 

The DVD player is located in the overhead console. 

The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on the 

DVD player, and/or by the buttons on the remote control. 

See “Remote Control” later in this section for more 

information. 

The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of the 

appropriate region code for the country that the vehicle 

was sold in. On some DVD jackets, you will see the 

region displayed. Standard audio CDs can also 

be played by the DVD player. The video screen will 

default to off when an audio CD is played. 

If an error message appears on the video screen, see 

DVD Messages later in this section. 

DVD Player Buttons 

Y (Eject): Press this button to eject a DVD or CD. 

SRCE (Source): Press this button to toggle the system 

between the DVD player and an auxiliary source. 

3-97

y (Main Menu): Press this button to view the media 

menu. The media menu is different on every DVD. 

Use the up, down, right and left arrow buttons to move 

the cursor around the media menu. After making a 

selection press enter. This button only operated when 

using a DVD. 

O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVD player 

on and off. 

T (Power Light): Shows if power is on or off. 

o (Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding 

or fast forwarding. Press this button twice to return 

to the beginning of the DVD. 

s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play of 

a DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or 

CD is playing to pause it. Press it again to continue play 

of a DVD or CD. 

z (Display Control Button): Press this button to 

adjust color, tint, brightness, contrast, and display mode 

(normal, full or zoom). The dynamic range compression 

feature can be used to reduce the loud audio produced 

by some DVDs and to improve the audio quality. 

nu,qt,pr,o[(Directional Control 

Circle): Press these buttons to move through menu 

choices, or move forward or back in a movie. 

These controls can also be used to move forward or 

backward through a CD. 

r (Enter): Press this button to select choices 

highlighted in any menu. 

Playing a Disc 

To play a disc, gently insert the disc (with the label side 

up) into the loading slot. The DVD player will continue 

loading the disc and the player will automatically start if 

the vehicle is in run, accessory or RAP. 

If a disc is already in the player, make sure that the 

DVD player is on, then press the play/pause button on 

the player faceplate or on the remote control. 

Some DVDs will not allow you to fast forward or skip 

the copyright information or previews. Some DVDs will 

begin playing after the previews have finished. If the 

DVD does not begin playing at the main title, refer to the 

on-screen instructions. 

Stopping and Resuming Playback 

To stop playing a disc, press and release the stop button 

on the DVD player faceplate or the remote control. 

To resume playback, press the play/pause button on 

the DVD player faceplate or the remote control. As long 

as the disc has not been ejected, and the stop button 

has not been pressed twice on the remote control or the 

DVD player faceplate, the movie should resume play 

from where it was last stopped. 

3-98

If the disc has been ejected, or if the stop button has 

been pressed twice on the remote control or the 

DVD player faceplate, the disc will resume play at the 

beginning of the disc. 

Ejecting a Disc 

Press the eject button on the DVD player faceplate to 

eject the disc. There is not an eject button on the remote 

control. 

If a disc is ejected from the player, but not removed, the 

DVD player will reload the disc after a short period of 

time. The disc will be stored in the DVD player. The DVD 

player will not resume play of the disc automatically. 

DVD Messages 

The following errors may be displayed on the video 

screen. 

Disc Format Error: This message will be displayed if a 

disc is inserted upside down, if the disc is not readable or 

if the disc format is not compatible with the DVD player. 

Disc Play Error: This message will be displayed if the 

mechanism can not play the disc. Scratched or 

damaged discs will cause this error. 

Region Code Error: This message will be displayed if 

the region code of the DVD is not compatible with 

the region code of the DVD player. 

Load/Eject Error: This message will be displayed if the 

disc is not properly loaded or ejected. 

No Disc: This message will be displayed when the play 

button is pressed without a disc in the player. 

Remote Control 

To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter 

window below the video screen and press the desired 

button. Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect the 

ability of the entertainment system to receive signals 

from the remote control. Be sure the remote control’s 

batteries are not weak or discharged, as this will 

also affect the function of the remote control. Objects 

blocking the line of sight will affect the function of 

the remote control. 

Notice: Do not store the remote control in heat or 

direct sunlight. This could damage the remote 

control and would not be covered by your warranty. 

Keep the remote control stored in a cool, dry place. 

3-99

Remote Control Buttons 

Press the down arrow twice to take you to the previous 

chapter or track. The right arrow will fast forward and the 

left arrow will reverse through a chapter or track. 

z (Display Control Button): Press this button to 

adjust color, tint, brightness, contrast, and display mode 

(normal, full or zoom). The dynamic range compression 

feature can be used to reduce the loud audio produced 

by some DVDs, and to improve the audio quality. 

e (Sound): This button moves to next the language 

or commentary. Press this button to call-up a menu that 

will operate only when a DVD is playing. The format 

and content of this function will vary from disc to disc. 

O(Power): Press this button to turn the DVD player 

on or off. 

v (Title): Press this button to go back to the title 

screen, if there is one. 

n, q, p, o (Directional Arrows): Press these 

buttons to move through DVD menus. The up arrow will 

skip to the next chapter or track, the down arrow will 

take you to the beginning of the current chapter or track. 

r (Rewind): Press this button to reverse the DVD. 

To stop reversing, press this button again. This 

button may not work when the DVD is playing the 

copyright information or the previews. 

SRCE (Source): Press this button to toggle the system 

between the DVD player and an auxiliary source. 

c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding 

or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this button 

twice to return to the beginning of the DVD. 

3-100

t (Prior Chapter/Track): Press this button to go to 

the beginning of the next chapter or track. Press 

this button again to return to the previous chapter or 

track. This button may not work when the DVD is playing 

the copyright information or previews. 

1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad 

provides you with the capability of direct chapter title 

and track number selection. Press the button located on 

the bottom right of the numeric key pad to select 

chapter, title and track numbers greater than 9. 

P (Backlight): This button turns on backlighting on 

the remote for use at night. 

y (Main Menu): Press this button to view the media 

menu. The media menu is different on every disc. 

Use the up, down, right and left arrow buttons to move 

the cursor around the media menu. After making a 

selection, press the enter button. 

r (Enter): Press this button to select choices 

highlighted in any menu. 

q (Return): Press this button to take you back one 

step in any menu. Press this button to exit the current 

menu to move to the previous menu. This button 

will operate only when a DVD is playing and/or a menu 

is active. 

| (Camera): This button changes camera angles on 

DVDs that have this feature. Press this button to 

call-up a menu that will operate only when a DVD is 

being played. The format and content of this function will 

vary from disc to disc. 

{ (Subtitles): This button turns on subtitles and 

moves through subtitle options (English, Spanish, 

French, etc., if available). Press this button to call-up a 

menu that will operate only when a DVD is being 

played. The format and content of this function will vary 

from disc to disc. 

[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast forward 

the DVD. To stop fast forwarding, press this button 

again. This button may not work when the DVD 

is playing the copyright information or the previews. 

s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play of a 

DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD is playing 

to pause it. Press it again to continue playing the DVD 

or CD. 

u (Next Chapter/Track): Press this button to go to 

the beginning of the next chapter or track. This 

button may not work when the DVD is playing the 

copyright information or the previews. 

3-101

Setup Menu 

To access the setup menu, ensure that a DVD disc is in 

the player and the video is stopped. Press the main menu 

button. Once the menu is activated, use the directional 

arrows and the enter button to navigate the screen. 

The setup menu allows the user to select default 

preferences for Menu Language, Subtitle Language, 

Audio Language, TV Aspect, TV Mode, and Dynamic 

Range Compression. 

Not all DVDs support all the feature defaults in the setup 

menus. In the event a particular feature is not supported, 

defaults will be provided by the DVD media. 

Exit the setup menu by pressing the return button on 

the remote control or the DVD player. If you make 

changes to the system setup defaults, the disc 

will resume play from its beginning and not where it 

previously left off. 


To change the remote control batteries, do the following: 

1. Unclip the battery door located on the back of the 

remote control. 

2. Replace the two AA batteries in the compartment. 

Make sure that they are installed correctly, using the 

diagram on the inside of the battery compartment. 

3. Close the battery door. 

If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of 

time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool, 

dry place. 

3-102

Tips and Trouble 

Problem 

No power. 

Disc will not play. 

Recommended Action 

The ignition may not be in 

run, accessory or RAP. 

The parental control 

button might have been 

pressed. (The power 

indicator light will flash). 

The system might be off. 

The parental control 

button might have been 

pressed. (The power 

indicator light will flash). 

The system might be in 

auxiliary source mode. 

Press the SRCE button to 

toggle between the DVD 

player and the auxiliary 

source. The disc is upside 

down or is not compatible. 

Problem 

No sound. 

The picture is distorted 

during fast forward or 

reverse. 

The picture does not fill the 

screen. There are black 

borders on the top and 

bottom or on both sides or 

it looks stretched out. 

I ejected the disc and tried 

to take it out, but it was 

pulled back into the slot. 


The volume on the 

headphones could be too 

low. Adjust the volume on 

the right earpiece on the 

cordless headphones. If 

the DVD system is being 

heard through the vehicle 

speakers, adjust the 

volume from the radio. 

The radio must have the 

RSE channel enabled by 

using the CD/AUX button. 

This is normal for this 

operation. 

Quickly press and release 

the display control button 

on the remote control or 

the DVD player and 

choose Display Mode. 

Then select Full. This will 

fill the screen. If there are 

borders on the top and 

bottom, the movie may 

have been made that way 

for a standard screen. 

Eject the disc again. 

3-103

Problem 

The language in the audio 

or on the screen is wrong. 

The remote control does 

not work. 

How do I get subtitles on 

or off? 

After stopping the player, I 

push the play button but 

sometimes the DVD starts 

where I left off, and 

sometimes at the 

beginning. 


Press the main menu 

button on the DVD player 

or the remote control and 

change the audio or 

language selection on the 

DVD menu. 

Point the remote control 

directly at the transmitter 

window. The batteries 

could be weak or put in 

wrong. The parental 

control button might have 

been pressed. (The power 

indicator light will flash.) 

Press the subtitle button 

on the remote control to 

go to the DVDs main 

menu. Then follow the 

screen prompts. 

Press the stop button on 

the remote control to 

resume where the DVD 

left off. Press the stop 

button twice to start the 

DVD at the beginning. If 

the power is off and the 

DVD is still in the player, 

press the play button. 

Problem 

The DVD is playing but 

there is no picture or 

sound. The auxiliary 

source is running but 

there is no picture or 

sound. 

The audio or video skips 

or jumps. 

When I return to the DVD 

from the system menu, 

sometimes it plays from 

the beginning and 

sometimes from where it 

left off. 


Press and release the 

SRCE button on the 

remote control or the DVD 

player to get to auxiliary 

input. Check to make sure 

that the auxiliary source is 

connected to the inputs 

properly. 

The DVD could be dirty or 

scratched. Try cleaning 

the DVD. 

If the stop button was 

pressed once, it resumes 

play from where it left off. 

If the stop button was 

pressed twice, it will start 

at the beginning of the 

DVD. However, if a 

change was made to the 

menu the DVD will start 

from where it left off, even 

if the stop button was only 

pressed once. 

3-104

Problem 

The fast forward, reverse, 

previous and next 

functions do not work. 

My disc is stuck in the 

player. The eject button 

does not work. 

I lost the remote control 

and/or the headphones. 

What is the best way to 

clean the screen? 


Some commands that do 

one thing for DVDs will 

not always work or 

perform the same function 

for audio, CDs or games. 

These functions may also 

be disabled when the 

DVD is playing the 

copyright information or 

previews. 

Press the eject button on 

the DVD player. Turn the 

power off, then on again, 

then press the eject 

button on the DVD player. 

Do not attempt to force or 

remove the disc from the 

player. If the problem 

persists, return to your 

dealer for further 

assistance. 

Contact your dealer for 

assistance. 

Wipe the video screen 

with a soft cloth that is 

slightly damp with water. 

Problem 

Sometimes the cordless 

headphone audio cuts out 

or buzzes for a moment, 

then it comes back. 

DVD System inoperable. 

The cordless headphones 

have audio distortion. 

In auxiliary mode, the 

picture moves or scrolls. 


This could be caused by 

interference from cell 

towers or by using your 

cellular telephone or other 

radio transmitter device in 

the vehicle. 

In severe or extreme 

temperatures your DVD 

system might not be 

operable. Temperatures 

below −4°F (−20°C) or 

above 140°F (60°C) could 

damage your DVD 

system. Please operate 

your DVD system under 

normal or comfortable 

cabin temperature ranges. 

Verify that the headphones 

are facing to the front of 

the vehicle (left and right 

sides are indicated on the 

headphones to ensure that 

the signal is received 

properly. 

Check the signal coming 

from the auxiliary device 

and make sure that the 

connection and the signal 

are good. 

3-105

Rear Audio Controller (RAC) 

If your vehicle has this option, you can control certain 

radio functions using the buttons on your Rear 

Audio Controller (RAC). 

Q SEEK R: Press the up or the down arrow to tune 

to the next or the previous radio station. If the 

cassette tape or the compact disc player is playing, the 

player will advance with the up arrow and reverse 

with the down arrow. 

BAND: Press this button to choose AM, FM1, FM2, 

or XM1 or XM2 (USA only, if equipped). Press this 

button when a cassette tape or a compact disc 

is playing, to listen to the radio. 

PRESET: Press this button to scan through the preset 

radio stations set on the pushbuttons on the main 

radio. The radio will go to a preset station stored on 

your pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to 

the next preset station. Press this button again to 

stop scanning presets. 

PLAY: Press this button to play a cassette tape or a 


MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. Press it 

again, or any other radio button, to turn on the sound. 

Q VOL (Volume) R: Press the up or the down arrow 

to increase or to decrease volume. 

Theft-Deterrent Feature 

THEFTLOCK ® is designed to discourage theft of your 

radio. The feature works automatically by learning 

a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). 

If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it will 

not operate and LOCKED will be displayed. 

With THEFTLOCK activated, your radio will not operate 

if stolen. 

3-106

Audio Steering Wheel Controls 

If your vehicle has this feature, you can control certain 

radio and remote playback functions using the 

buttons on your steering wheel. 

If your vehicle has the six-disc compact disc audio 

system and multiple discs are loaded, each press of 

PRESET will take you to the next disc. 

BAND: Press this button to choose AM, FM1, FM2, 

or XM1 or XM2 (USA only, if equipped). If a cassette 

tape or a compact disc is playing, it will stop and 

the radio will play. 

Q SEEK R: Press the up or the down arrow to 

tune to the next or to the previous radio station. If a 

cassette tape or a compact disc is playing, the tape or 

the CD, will advance with the up arrow and reverse 

with the down arrow. 

Q VOL (Volume) R: Press the up or the down arrow 

to increase or to decrease volume. 

PRESET: Press this button to play a station you have 

programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons. The radio 

will go to a preset station, play for a few seconds, then go 

to the next station. Press this button again to stop 

scanning the preset stations. If a cassette tape is playing, 

press this button to play the other side of the tape. 

PLAY: Press this button to play a cassette tape or 


MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. Press it 

again, or any other radio button, to turn mute off. 

3-107

DVD Distortion 

You may experience video distortion when operating 

cellular phones, scanners, CB radios, Global Position 

Systems (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or 

walkie talkies. 

It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player when 

operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle. 

*Excludes the OnStar ® System. 

Understanding Radio Reception 

AM 

The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM, 

especially at night. The longer range, however, can 

cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick 

up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try 

reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it. 

FM Stereo 

FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals 

will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). 

Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, 

causing the sound to come and go. 

XM Satellite Radio Service 

(USA Only) 

XM Satellite Radio gives you digital radio reception 

from coast to coast. Just as with FM, tall buildings 

or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing 

the sound to come and go. Your radio may display 

NO SIGNAL to indicate interference. 

Care of Your Cassette Tape Player 

A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause 

reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged 

mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their 

cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and 

extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate 

properly or may cause failure of the tape player. 

Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every 

50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLEAN PLAYER 

to indicate that you have used your tape player for 

50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer. If this 

message appears on the display, your cassette tape 

player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you 

should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to 

your tapes and player. If you notice a reduction in sound 

quality, try a known good cassette to see if the tape or the 

tape player is at fault. If this other cassette has no 

improvement in sound quality, clean the tape player. 

3-108

For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasive 

cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape 

head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. The 

recommended cleaning cassette is available through 

your dealership. 

The cut tape detection feature of your cassette tape 

player may identify the cleaning cassette as a damaged 

tape, in error. To prevent the cleaning cassette from 

being ejected, use the following steps: 


2. Turn the radio off. 

3. Press and hold the CD TAPE button for five 

seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash 

for two seconds. 

4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette. 

5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s 

recommended cleaning time. 

After the cleaning cassette is ejected, the cut tape 

detection feature will be active again. 

You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type 

cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to 

clean the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will 

not eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner 

may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type 

cleaner. The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type 

cleaning cassette is not recommended. 

After you clean the player, press and hold the eject 

button for five seconds to reset the CLEAN PLAYER 

indicator. The radio will display --- to show the indicator 

was reset. 

Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality 

may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette 

tape is in good condition before you have your tape 

player serviced. 

Care of Your CDs and DVDs 

Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases 

or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight 

and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen 

a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution 

and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge. 

Be sure never to touch the side without writing when 

handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer 

edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge. 

Care of Your CD and DVD Player 

The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to 

the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics 

with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism. 

3-109

Cleaning Your DVD Player 

When cleaning the outside DVD cabinet face and 

buttons, use only a clean cloth dampened with 

clean water. 

Cleaning the Video Screen 

When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean cloth 

dampened with clean water. Use care when directly 

touching or cleaning the screen, as damage may result. 

Integrated Windshield Antenna 

The antenna in your vehicle is a very thin, metal layer 

in the windshield. If you look near the edges of the 

windshield, you can see the outline of the antenna. 

The connector is at the top of the windshield, where the 

headliner ends. 

If you experience difficulty with remote transmitters, 

such as a garage door opener, try pointing the device 

through the very top of the windshield. 

XM Satellite Radio Antenna 

System (United States Only) 

Your XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the 

roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of 

snow and ice build up for clear radio reception. 

The performance of your XM system may be affected 

if your sunroof is open. 

Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere 

with the performance of your XM system. Make 

sure that the XM satellite antenna is not obstructed. 

3-110

Section 4 

Driving Your Vehicle 

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2 

Driver Behavior ..............................................4-2 

Driving Environment ........................................4-2 

Vehicle Design ...............................................4-2 

Defensive Driving ...........................................4-3 

Drunken Driving .............................................4-3 

Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-6 

Braking .........................................................4-7 

Traction Control System (TCS) .......................4-10 

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System .......................4-11 

Steering ......................................................4-12 

Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-14 

Passing .......................................................4-14 

Loss of Control .............................................4-15 

Driving at Night ............................................4-17 

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-18 

City Driving ..................................................4-21 

Freeway Driving ...........................................4-22 

Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-23 

Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-24 

Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-24 

Winter Driving ..............................................4-26 

If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ........4-30 

Towing ..........................................................4-31 

Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-31 

Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-31 

Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-32 

Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-34 

4-1

Your Driving, the Road, and 

Your Vehicle 

Whenever we drive, we’re taking on an important 

responsibility. This is true for any motor 

vehicle — passenger car, van, truck, sport utility. 

Driver behavior, the driving environment, and the 

vehicle’s design all affect how well a vehicle performs. 

But statistics show that the most important factor, 

by far, is how we drive. 

Knowing how these three factors work together can help 

you understand how your vehicle handles and what 

you can do to avoid many types of crashes, including a 

rollover crash. 

Driver Behavior 

The single most important thing is this: everyone in the 

vehicle, including the driver, should buckle up. See Safety 

Belts: They Are for Everyone on page 1-10. In fact, most 

serious injuries and fatalities to unbelted occupants can 

be reduced or prevented by the use of safety belts. In a 

rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more 

likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. In addition, 

avoiding excessive speed, sudden or abrupt turns and 

drunken or aggressive driving can help make trips safer 

and avoid the possibility of a crash, especially a rollover 

crash. This section provides many useful tips to help you 

drive more safely. 

Driving Environment 

You can also help avoid a rollover or other type of crash 

by being prepared for driving in inclement weather, at 

night, or during other times where visibility or traction 

may be limited (such as on curves, slippery roads or hilly 

terrain). Unfamiliar surroundings can also have hidden 

hazards. 

To help you learn more about driving in different 

conditions, this section contains information about city, 

freeway and off-road driving, as well as other hints 

for driving in various weather conditions. 

Vehicle Design 

According to the U.S. Department of Transportation, 

utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover 

rate than other types of vehicles. Utility vehicles do 

have higher ground clearance and a narrower track or 

shorter wheelbase than passenger cars, to make 

them more capable for off-road driving. Specific design 

characteristics like these give the driver a better 

view of the road, but also give utility vehicles a higher 

center of gravity than other types of vehicles. This 

means that you shouldn’t expect a utility vehicle 

to handle the same way a vehicle with a lower center of 

gravity, like a car, would in similar situations. 

4-2

But driver behavior factors are far more often the cause 

of a utility vehicle rollover than are environmental or 

vehicle factors. Safe driver behavior and understanding 

the environment in which you’ll be driving can help 

avoid a rollover crash in any type of vehicle, including 

utility vehicles. 

Defensive Driving 

The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive 

defensively. 

Please start with a very important safety device in your 

vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for 

Everyone on page 1-10. 

Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.” 

On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means 

“always expect the unexpected.” 

Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to 

be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what 

they might do. Be ready for their mistakes. 

Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of 

accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following 

distance. It’s the best defensive driving maneuver, in both 

city and rural driving. You never know when the vehicle in 

front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly. 

Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on 

the driving task. Anything that distracts from the 

driving task — such as concentrating on a cellular 

telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on 

the floor — makes proper defensive driving more difficult 

and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury. 

Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull off the 

road in a safe place to do them yourself. These simple 

defensive driving techniques could save your life. 

Drunken Driving 

Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is 

a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to 

the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims 

every year. 

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a 

vehicle: 

• Judgment 

• Muscular Coordination 

• Vision 

• Attentiveness. 

Police records show that almost half of all motor 

vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases, 

these deaths are the result of someone who was 

drinking and driving. In recent years, more than 

16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been 

associated with the use of alcohol, with more than 

300,000 people injured. 

4-3

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult 

population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they 

never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, 

it’s against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol. 

There are good medical, psychological and 

developmental reasons for these laws. 

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway 

safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and 

then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too 

much” if someone plans to drive? It’s a lot less 

than many might think. Although it depends on each 

person and situation, here is some general information 

on the problem. 

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone 

who is drinking depends upon four things: 

• The amount of alcohol consumed 

• The drinker’s body weight 

• The amount of food that is consumed before and 

during drinking 

• The length of time it has taken the drinker to 

consume the alcohol. 

According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb 

(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml) 

bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC 

of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the 

same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses 

of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces 

(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin or vodka. 

It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if 

the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces 

or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s 

BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person 

who consumes food just before or during drinking will 

have a somewhat lower BAC level. 

There is a gender difference, too. Women generally 

have a lower relative percentage of body water 

than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this 

4-4

means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC 

level than a man of her same body weight will when 

each has the same number of drinks. 

The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, and 

throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. 

In some other countries, the limit is even lower. For 

example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany. 

The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United 

States is 0.04 percent. 

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six 

drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it 

depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how 

quickly the person drinks them. 

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of 

0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills 

of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching 

0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All 

drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent. 

Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision 

increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 

0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of 

0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a 

collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance 

of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a 

level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater! 

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol 

in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold 

showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the right 

answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to 

take sudden action, as when a child darts into the 

street? A person with even a moderate BAC might not 

be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision. 

4-5

There’s something else about drinking and driving that 

many people don’t know. Medical research shows 

that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash 

injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal 

cord or heart. This means that when anyone who 

has been drinking — driver or passenger — is in a 

crash, that person’s chance of being killed or 

permanently disabled is higher than if the person had 

not been drinking. 

Control of a Vehicle 

You have three systems that make your vehicle go where 

you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and 

the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at 

the places where the tires meet the road. 

{CAUTION: 

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. 

Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and 

judgment can be affected by even a small 

amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or 

even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking. 

Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a driver 

who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if 

you’re with a group, designate a driver who will 

not drink. 

Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s 

easy to ask more of those control systems than the 

tires and road can provide. That means you can lose 

control of your vehicle. Also see Traction Control System 

(TCS) on page 4-10. 

4-6

Braking 

Braking action involves perception time and 

reaction time. 

First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal. 

That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your 

foot and do it. That’s reaction time. 

Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But 

that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver 

and as long as two or three seconds or more with 

another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination 

and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and 

frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving 

at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That 

could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping 

enough space between your vehicle and others is 

important. 

And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly 

with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement 

or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire 

tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of 

the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied. 

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in 

spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy 

braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is 

a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool 

between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out 

much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you 

keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic 

following distances, you will eliminate a lot of 

unnecessary braking. That means better braking and 

longer brake life. 

If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake 

normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, 

the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine 

stops, you will still have some power brake assist. 

But you will use it when you brake. Once the power 

assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and 

the brake pedal will be harder to push. 

4-7

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) 

Your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes. ABS is an 

advanced electronic braking system that will help 

prevent a braking skid. 

United States 


If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, this warning light on 

the instrument panel will come on briefly when you 

start your vehicle. 

When you start your engine, or when you begin to drive 

away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself. 

You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while 

this test is going on, and you may even notice that 

your brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal. 

Let’s say the road is wet and you’re driving safely. 

Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam 

on the brakes and continue braking. Here’s what 

happens with ABS: 

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If 

one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer 

will separately work the brakes at each wheel. 

4-8

The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure 

faster than any driver could. The computer is 

programmed to make the most of available tire and road 

conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle 

while braking hard. 

As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates 

on wheel speed and controls braking pressure 

accordingly. 

Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need 

to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always 

decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the 

vehicle in front of you, you won’t have time to apply 

your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. 

Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even 

though you have anti-lock brakes. 

Using Anti-Lock 

Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down 

firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel a 

slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise, but 

this is normal. 

Braking in Emergencies 

At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation 

that requires hard braking. 

If you have anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the 

same time. However, if you don’t have anti-lock, 

your first reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard and 

hold it down — may be the wrong thing to do. Your 

wheels can stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle can’t 

respond to your steering. Momentum will carry it in 

whatever direction it was headed when the wheels 

stopped rolling. That could be off the road, into the very 

thing you were trying to avoid, or into traffic. 

4-9

If you don’t have anti-lock, use a “squeeze” braking 

technique. This will give you maximum braking while 

maintaining steering control. You can do this by pushing 

on the brake pedal with steadily increasing pressure. 

In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze the 

brakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear or 

feel the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal. 

This will help you retain steering control. If you do have 

anti-lock, it’s different. See “Anti-Lock Brake System” 


In many emergencies, steering can help you more than 

even the very best braking. 

Traction Control System (TCS) 

Your vehicle may have a traction control system that 

limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery 

road conditions. The system operates only if it senses 

that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or 

beginning to lose traction. When this happens, 

the system works the front brakes and reduces engine 

power to limit wheel spin. 

The TRACTION ACTIVE message will come on when 

the traction control system is limiting wheel spin. 

See Traction Active Message on page 3-40. You may 

feel or hear the system working, but this is normal. 

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction 

control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise 

control will automatically disengage. When road 

conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may 

reengage the cruise control. See “Cruise Control” under 

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7. 

United States 


If this message comes on and stays on or comes on 

while you are driving, there’s a problem with your 

traction control system. 

See Service Traction System Warning Message on 

page 3-39. When this warning message is on, the TRAC 

OFF light will come on to remind you that the system 

will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. 

The traction control system automatically comes on 

whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel 

spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you should 

always leave the system on. But you can turn the 

traction control system off if you ever need to. 

4-10

You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets 

stuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle 

is required. 

To turn the system off, 

press the TRAC OFF 

button located on 

the instrument panel 

switchbank. 

If the system is limiting wheel spin when you press the 

button, the message will go off, but the system will 

not turn off until there is no longer a current need to limit 

wheel spin. The TRAC OFF light will come on to 

remind you the system is off. You can turn the system 

back on at any time by pressing the button again. 

The traction control system warning message should 

go off. 

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System 

If your vehicle has all-wheel drive (AWD), the AWD 

system operates automatically without any action 

required by the driver. If the front drive wheels begin to 

slip, the rear wheels will automatically begin to drive 

the vehicle as required. There may be a slight 

engagement noise during hard use but this is normal. 

During heavy AWD applications, the engine torque may 

be reduced to protect AWD system components. If 

the vehicle is exposed to extended heavy AWD usage, 

the AWD system will shut itself off to protect the 

system from overheating. When the system cools down, 

the AWD system will activate itself again automatically; 

this cool-down can take up to 20 minutes depending 

on outside temperature and vehicle use. See All-Wheel 

Drive Disable Warning Message on page 3-45. 

4-11

Steering 

Power Steering 

If you lose power steering assist because the engine 

stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but 

it will take much more effort. 

Steering Tips 

Driving on Curves 

It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed. 

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on 

the news happen on curves. Here’s why: 

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to 

the same laws of physics when driving on curves. 

The traction of the tires against the road surface makes 

it possible for the vehicle to change its path when 

you turn the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia 

will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If 

you’ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll 

understand this. 

The traction you can get in a curve depends on the 

condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at 

which the curve is banked, and your speed. While 

you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you can 

control. 

Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. 

Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both control 

systems — steering and braking — have to do their work 

where the tires meet the road. Unless you have 

four-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hard braking can 

demand too much of those places. You can lose control. 

The same thing can happen if you’re steering through a 

sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Those two 

control systems — steering and acceleration — can 

overwhelm those places where the tires meet the road 

and make you lose control. See Traction Control System 


What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on 

the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way 

you want it to go, and slow down. 

Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should 

adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds 

are based on good weather and road conditions. Under 

less favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower. 

If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a 

curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front 

wheels are straight ahead. 

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the 

curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to 

accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then 

accelerate gently into the straightaway. 

4-12

Steering in Emergencies 

There are times when steering can be more effective 

than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find 

a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls 

out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between 

parked cars and stops right in front of you. You 

can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop 

in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room. 

That’s the time for evasive action — steering around the 

problem. 

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like 

these. First apply your brakes. 

See Braking on page 4-7. It is better to remove as much 

speed as you can from a possible collision. Then 

steer around the problem, to the left or right depending 

on the space available. 

An emergency like this requires close attention and a 

quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at 

the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you 

can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without 

removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer 

quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel 

once you have avoided the object. 

The fact that such emergency situations are always 

possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving 

at all times and wear safety belts properly. 

4-13

Off-Road Recovery 

You may find that your right wheels have dropped off 

the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re 

driving. 

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the 

pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the 

accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, 

steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of 

the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to 

one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts 

the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go 

straight down the roadway. 

Passing 

The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a 

two-lane highway waits for just the right moment, 

accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then 

goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver? 

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane 

highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the 

passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming 

traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in 

judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger 

can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the 

worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision. 

So here are some tips for passing: 

• “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides 

and to crossroads for situations that might affect 

your passing patterns. If you have any doubt 

whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait 

for a better time. 

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and 

lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might 

indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass. 

A broken center line usually indicates it’s all 

right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear). 

Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or 

a double solid line, even if the road seems empty 

of approaching traffic. 

4-14

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to 

pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For 

one thing, following too closely reduces your area 

of vision, especially if you’re following a larger 

vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space if the 

vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep 

back a reasonable distance. 

• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up, 

start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and 

don’t get too close. Time your move so you will be 

increasing speed as the time comes to move 

into the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you 

will have a “running start” that more than makes 

up for the distance you would lose by dropping 

back. And if something happens to cause you to 

cancel your pass, you need only slow down 

and drop back again and wait fo another 

opportunity. 

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, 

wait your turn. But take care that someone isn’t 

trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow 

vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder 

and check the blind spot. 

• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and 

start your left lane change signal before moving out 

of the right lane to pass. When you are far 

enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front 

in your inside mirror, activate your right lane 

change signal and move back into the right lane. 

(Remember that your right outside mirror is convex. 

The vehicle you just passed may seem to be 

farther away from you than it really is.) 

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on 

two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the 

next vehicle. 

• Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly. 

Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it 

may be slowing down or starting to turn. 

• If you’re being passed, make it easy for the 

following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you 

can ease a little to the right. 

Loss of Control 

Let’s review what driving experts say about what happens 

when the three control systems (brakes, steering and 

acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the tires 

meet the road to do what the driver has asked. 

In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer 

and constantly seek an escape route or area of 

less danger. 

4-15

Skidding 

In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle. 

Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable 

care suited to existing conditions, and by not 

“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are always 

possible. 

The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s 

three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels 

aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too 

much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip 

and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration 

skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels 

to spin. 

A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off 

the accelerator pedal. 

If you have the Traction Control System, remember: It 

helps avoid only the acceleration skid. If you do not have 

this system, or if the system is off, then an acceleration 

skid is also best handled by easing your foot off the 

accelerator pedal. 

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the 

accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want 

the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, 

your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready 

for a second skid if it occurs. 

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice, 

gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll 

want to slow down and adjust your driving to these 

conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery 

surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and 

vehicle control more limited. 

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try 

your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration 

or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a 

lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires 

to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery 

until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning 

clues — such as enough water, ice or packed snow 

on the road to make a “mirrored surface” — and slow 

down when you have any doubt. 

If you have the anti-lock braking system, remember: It 

helps avoid only the braking skid. If you do not have 

anti-lock, then in a braking skid (where the wheels are 

no longer rolling), release enough pressure on the 

brakes to get the wheels rolling again. This restores 

steering control. Push the brake pedal down steadily 

when you have to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels 

are rolling, you will have steering control. 

4-16

Driving at Night 

Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. 

One reason is that some drivers are likely to be 

impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision 

problems, or by fatigue. 

Here are some tips on night driving. 

• Drive defensively. 

• Don’t drink and drive. 

• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the 

glare from headlamps behind you. 

• Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slow 

down and keep more space between you and 

other vehicles. 

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your 

headlamps can light up only so much road ahead. 

• In remote areas, watch for animals. 

• If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place 

and rest. 

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. 

But as we get older these differences increase. 

A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much 

light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old. 

What you do in the daytime can also affect your 

night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright 

sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your 

eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if 

you’re driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may 

cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also 

make a lot of things invisible. 

4-17

You can be temporarily blinded by approaching 

headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several 

seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When 

you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver 

who doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with 

misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring 

directly into the approaching headlamps. 

Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle 

clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much 

worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass 

can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes 

lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would, 

making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly. 

Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a 

roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep 

your eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly 

lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be 

checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes 

be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from 

night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and 

aren’t even aware of it. 

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads 

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet 

road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well 

because your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on 

dry roads. And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, 

you’ll get even less traction. It’s always wise to go 

slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are 

driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your 

reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement. 

4-18

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your 

windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy 

rain can make it harder to see road signs and 

traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road 

and even people walking. 

It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape 

and keep your windshield washer tank filled with 

washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts 

when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on 

the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to 

separate from the inserts. 

Driving too fast through large water puddles or even 

going through some car washes can cause problems, 

too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid 

puddles. But if you can’t, try to slow down before you 

hit them. 

{CAUTION: 

Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t 

work as well in a quick stop and may cause 

pulling to one side. You could lose control of 

the vehicle. 

After driving through a large puddle of water 

or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly 

until your brakes work normally. 

4-19

Hydroplaning 

Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up 

under your tires that they can actually ride on the 

water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and 

you’re going fast enough. When your vehicle is 

hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road. 

Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if 

your tires do not have much tread or it the pressure in 

one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is 

standing on the road. If you can see reflections 

from trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, and 

raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could be 

hydroplaning. 

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There 

just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. 

The best advice is to slow down when it is raining. 

Driving Through Deep Standing Water 

Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep 

puddles or standing water, water can come in 

through your engine’s air intake and badly damage 

your engine. Never drive through water that is 

slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. 

If you can’t avoid deep puddles or standing 

water, drive through them very slowly. 

Driving Through Flowing Water 

{CAUTION: 

Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces. 

If you try to drive through flowing water, as you 

might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can 

be carried away. As little as six inches of 

flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle. 

If this happens, you and other vehicle 

occupants could drown. Don’t ignore police 

warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious 

about trying to drive through flowing water. 

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips 

• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following 

distance. And be especially careful when you 

pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear 

room ahead, and be prepared to have your 

view restricted by road spray. 

• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires 

on page 5-50. 

4-20

City Driving 

Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving: 

• Know the best way to get to where you are 

going. Get a city map and plan your trip into 

an unknown part of the city just as you would for a 

cross-country trip. 

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross 

most large cities. You’ll save time and energy. 

See the next part, “Freeway Driving.” 

• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic 

light is there because the corner is busy enough 

to need it. When a light turns green, and just before 

you start to move, check both ways for vehicles 

that have not cleared the intersection or may 

be running the red light. 

One of the biggest problems with city streets is the 

amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for 

what the other drivers are doing and pay attention 

to traffic signals. 

4-21

Freeway Driving 

Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways, 

expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the 

safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules. 

The most important advice on freeway driving is: 

Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the 

same speed most of the other drivers are driving. 

Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. 

Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane. 

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the 

freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you 

drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check 

traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with 

the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the 

prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your 

mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as 

necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow. 

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the 

posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower. 

Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass. 

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use 

your turn signal. 

Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your 

shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in 

your “blind” spot. 

Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you 

allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to 

move slightly slower at night. 

When you want to leave the freeway, move to the 

proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do 

not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive 

on to the next exit. 

4-22

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply. 

The exit speed is usually posted. 

Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not 

to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance 

at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are 

going slower than you actually are. 

Before Leaving on a Long Trip 

Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you 

must start when you’re not fresh — such as after a day’s 

work — don’t plan to make too many miles that first 

part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes 

you can easily drive in. 

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it 

serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs 

service, have it done before starting out. Of course, 

you’ll find experienced and able service experts in GM 

dealerships all across North America. They’ll be 

ready and willing to help if you need it. 

Here are some things you can check before a trip: 

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? 

Are all windows clean inside and outside? 

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape? 

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked 

all levels? 

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean? 

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe, 

trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for 

long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the 

recommended pressure? 

• Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook 

along your route? Should you delay your trip a 

short time to avoid a major storm system? 

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps? 

4-23

Highway Hypnosis 

Is there actually such a condition as “highway 

hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? 

Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or 

whatever. 

There is something about an easy stretch of road with 

the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the 

road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the 

wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t 

let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave 

the road in less than a second, and you could crash and 

be injured. 

What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be 

aware that it can happen. 

Then here are some tips: 

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a 

comfortably cool interior. 

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and 

to the sides. Check your mirrors and your 

instruments frequently. 

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, 

service or parking area and take a nap, get some 

exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness 

on the highway as an emergency. 

Hill and Mountain Roads 

Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from 

driving in flat or rolling terrain. 

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re 

planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make 

your trips safer and more enjoyable. 

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid 

levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system 

and transaxle. These parts can work hard on 

mountain roads. 

4-24

• Know how to go down hills. The most important 

thing to know is this: let your engine do some of 

the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go 

down a steep or long hill. 

{CAUTION: 

If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get 

so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would 

then have poor braking or even none going 

down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let 

your engine assist your brakes on a steep 

downhill slope. 

{CAUTION: 

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the 

ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have 

to do all the work of slowing down. They could 

get so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You 


CAUTION: 

(Continued) 

would then have poor braking or even none 

going down a hill. You could crash. Always 

have your engine running and your vehicle in 

gear when you go downhill. 

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down 

to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your 

engine and transaxle, and you can climb the 

hill better. 

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane 

roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or 

cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds 

that let you stay in your own lane. 

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There 

could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or 

an accident. 

• You may see highway signs on mountains that 

warn of special problems. Examples are long 

grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks 

area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take 

appropriate action. 

4-25

Winter Driving 

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a 

supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter 

outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red 

cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if 

you will be driving under severe conditions, include a 

small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of 

burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you 

properly secure these items in your vehicle. 

Driving on Snow or Ice 

Most of the time, those places where your tires meet 

the road probably have good traction. 

However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and 

the road, you can have a very slippery situation. 

You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to 

very careful. 

Here are some tips for winter driving: 

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter. 

• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in 

your vehicle. 

4-26

What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold 

snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet 

ice can be even more trouble because it may offer 

the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s 

about freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins 

to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand 

crews can get there. 

Whatever the condition – smooth ice, packed, blowing 

or loose snow – drive with caution. 

If you have traction control, keep the system on. It will 

improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a 

slippery road. But you can turn the traction system off if 

your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice or 

snow. See If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow 

on page 4-30. Even though your vehicle has a traction 

system, you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving 

to the road conditions. See Traction Control System 


If you don’t have a traction system, accelerate gently. 

Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too 

fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface 

under the tires even more. 

Unless you have the anti-lock braking system, you’ll 

want to brake very gently, too. (If you do have anti-lock, 

see Braking on page 4-7. This system improves your 

vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a 

slippery road.) Whether you have the anti-lock braking 

system or not, you’ll want to begin stopping sooner than 

you would on dry pavement. Without anti-lock brakes, 

if you feel your vehicle begin to slide, let up on the 

brakes a little. Push the brake pedal down steadily to 

get the most traction you can. 

4-27

Remember, unless you have anti-lock, if you brake so 

hard that your wheels stop rolling, you’ll just slide. 

Brake so your wheels always keep rolling and you 

can still steer. 

• Whatever your braking system, allow greater 

following distance on any slippery road. 

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine 

until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On 

an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in 

shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around 

clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges. 

Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass 

may remain icy when the surrounding roads 

are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, 

brake before you are on it. Try not to brake 

while you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden 

steering maneuvers. 

If You’re Caught in a Blizzard 

If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a 

serious situation. You should probably stay with 

your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near 

help and you can hike through the snow. Here are 

some things to do to summon help and keep yourself 

and your passengers safe: 

• Turn on your hazard flashers. 

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that 

you’ve been stopped by the snow. 

4-28

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you. 

If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make 

body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, 

floor mats — anything you can wrap around 

yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm. 

{CAUTION: 

Snow can trap exhaust gases under your 

vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon 

monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could 

overcome you and kill you. You can’t see it or 

smell it, so you might not know it is in your 

vehicle. Clear away snow from around the 

base of your vehicle, especially any that is 

blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around 

again from time to time to be sure snow 

doesn’t collect there. 

Open a window just a little on the side of the 

vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will 

help keep CO out. 

You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful. 

Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves 

fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little 

faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator 

slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and 

it keeps the battery charged. You will need a 

well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly 

for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the 

heater run for a while. 

4-29

Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost 

all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine 

again and repeat this only when you feel really 

uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as 

possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help 

keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do 

some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until 

help comes. 

If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, 

Ice or Snow 

In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will 

need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin your 

wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking” can 

help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must 

use caution. 

{CAUTION: 

If you let your tires spin at high speed, they 

can explode, and you or others could be 

injured. And, the transaxle or other parts of the 

vehicle can overheat. That could cause an 

engine compartment fire or other damage. 

When you’re stuck, spin the wheels as little as 

possible. Don’t spin the wheels above 35 mph 

(55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer. 

Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of 

your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the 

wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back 

and forth, you can destroy your transaxle. See 

“Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out.” 

For information about using tire chains on your vehicle, 

see Tire Chains on page 5-59. 

4-30

Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out 

First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will 

clear the area around your front wheels. If your vehicle 

has traction control, you should turn your traction 

control system off. See Traction Control System (TCS) 

on page 4-10. Then shift back and forth between 

REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels 

as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal 

while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal 

when the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning your 

wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you 

will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle. 

If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may 

need to be towed out. If you do need to be towed out, 

see “Towing Your Vehicle” following. 

Towing 

Towing Your Vehicle 

Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if 

you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See 

Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6. 

If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle 

for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome), 

see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following. 

Recreational Vehicle Towing 

Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle 

behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome. 

The two most common types of recreational vehicle 

towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle 

with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing” 

(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and 

two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”). 

With the proper preparation and equipment, many 

vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy 

Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following. 

Here are some important things to consider before you 

do recreational vehicle towing: 

• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle? 

Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s 

recommendations. 

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have 

restrictions on how far and how long they can tow. 

• Do you have the proper towing equipment? 

See your dealer or trailering professional for 

additional advice and equipment recommendations. 

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you 

would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll 

want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be 

towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on 

page 4-23. 

4-31

Dinghy Towing 

Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all of its 

wheels on the ground. If you have a two-wheel-drive 

vehicle, it can be towed with two of its wheels on 

the ground. See “Dolly Towing” following. If you have an 

all-wheel-drive vehicle, it cannot be towed with any of 

its wheels on the ground. It can be towed with the 

car carrier equipment. 

Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all 

four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of 

its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain 

components. Don’t tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if 

any of its wheels will be on the ground. 

Dolly Towing 

If you have a two-wheel-drive vehicle, it can be towed 

with two of its wheel on the ground. To dolly tow 

your vehicle, do the following: 

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly. 

2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P). 

3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key. 

4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead 

position with a clamping device designed for towing. 

5. Release the parking brake. 

If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, it cannot be 

towed with any of its wheels on the ground. It can be 

towed with car carrier equipment. 

Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all 

four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of 

its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain 

components. Don’t tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if 

any of its wheels will be on the ground. 

Loading Your Vehicle 

The Certification/Tire Label is found on the rear edge of 

the driver’s door. 

4-32

The label shows the size of your original tires and the 

inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight 

capacity of your vehicle. This is called the Gross Vehicle 

Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the 

weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. 

The Certification/Tire Label also tells you the maximum 

weights for the front and rear axles, called the Gross 

Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads 

on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a 

weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can 

help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load 

equally on both sides of the centerline. 

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the GAWR 

for either the front or rear axle. 

{CAUTION: 

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the 

GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear 

GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can 

break, and it can change the way your vehicle 

handles. These could cause you to lose 

control and crash. Also, overloading can 

shorten the life of your vehicle. 



If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases, 

tools, packages, or anything else — they will go as fast 

as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn 

quickly, or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going. 

{CAUTION: 

Things you put inside your vehicle can strike 

and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, 

or in a crash. 

• Put things in the cargo area of your 

vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly. 

• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, 

inside the vehicle so that some of them 

are above the tops of the seats. 

• Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in 

your vehicle. 

• When you carry something inside the 

vehicle, secure it whenever you can. 

• Don’t leave a seat folded down unless you 

need to. 

4-33

Automatic Level Control 

On vehicles equipped with the level control, the rear of 

the vehicle is automatically kept level as you load or 

unload your vehicle. However, you should still not 

exceed the GVWR or the GAWR. See Loading Your 

Vehicle on page 4-32. 

If the ignition key is in ACCESSORY, ON or when RAP 

is active, you may hear the compressor operating 

when you load your vehicle or shortly after you start 

your vehicle, and periodically as the system self-adjusts. 

This is normal. See “Retained Accessory Power” 

under Ignition Positions on page 2-19. 

The compressor should operate for brief periods of time. 

If the sound continues for an extended period of time 

(longer than one minute) or occurs many times 

within one trip, your vehicle needs service. 

Using heavier suspension components to get added 

durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your 

dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way. 

Towing a Trailer 

{CAUTION: 

If you don’t use the correct equipment and 

drive properly, you can lose control when you 

pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too 

heavy, the brakes may not work well — or 

even at all. You and your passengers could be 

seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have 

followed all the steps in this section. Ask your 

dealer for advice and information about towing 

a trailer with your vehicle. 

Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage 

your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered 

by your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow 

the advice in this part, and see your dealer for 

important information about towing a trailer with 

your vehicle. Additional rear axle maintenance 

is required for a vehicle used to tow a trailer. See 

“Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index. 

4-34

Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify what the 

vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you should 

read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that 

appears later in this section. But trailering is different 

than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means 

changes in handling, durability and fuel economy. 

Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and 

it has to be used properly. 

That’s the reason for this section. In it are many 

time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. 

Many of these are important for your safety and that of 

your passengers. So please read this section carefully 

before you pull a trailer. 

Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle, 

wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder 

against the drag of the added weight. The engine 

is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and 

under greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more, 

the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance, 

increasing the pulling requirements. 

If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer 

If you do, here are some important points: 

• There are many different laws, including speed limit 

restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure 

your rig will be legal, not only where you live 

but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for 

this information can be state or provincial police. 

• Consider using a sway control if your trailer will 

weigh 2,000 lbs. (900 kg) or less. You should 

always use a sway control if your trailer will weigh 

more than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg). You can ask a 

hitch dealer about sway controls. 

• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 

(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine, 

axle or other parts could be damaged. 

• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you 

tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) 

and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your 

engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at 

the heavier loads. 

• You can use THIRD (3) (or, as you need to, a lower 

gear) when towing a trailer. Operating your vehicle 

in THIRD (3) when towing a trailer will minimize 

heat buildup and extend the life of your transaxle. 

Three important considerations have to do with weight: 

• the weight of the trailer, 

• the weight of the trailer tongue 

• and the weight on your vehicle’s tires. 

4-35

Weight of the Trailer 

How heavy can a trailer safely be? 

It should never weigh more than 1,400 lbs. (630 kg) with 

up to five occupants in the vehicle or more than 

2,000 lbs. (900 kg) with up to two occupants. If you 

have the optional trailer towing package, your vehicle 

can tow up to 2,900 lbs. (1 300 kg) with up to five 

occupants or up to 3,500 lbs. (1 575 kg) with up to two 

occupants. But even that can be too heavy. 

It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For 

example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside 

temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull 

a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend 

on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle. 

You can ask your dealer for our trailering information 

or advice, or you can write us at: 

Pontiac-GMC Customer Assistance Center 

P.O. Box 33172 

Detroit, MI 48232-5172 

In Canada, write to: 

General Motors of Canada Limited 

Customer Communication Centre, 163-005 

1908 Colonel Sam Drive 

Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 

Weight of the Trailer Tongue 

The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight 

to measure because it affects the total or gross weight 

of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) 

includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you 

may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in 

the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you must add 

the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be 

carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle 

on page 4-32 for more information about your vehicle’s 

maximum load capacity. 

4-36

If you’re using a weight-carrying or a weight-distributing 

hitch, the trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent 

to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B). 

Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight 

for your vehicle. 

After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and 

then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights 

are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them 

right simply by moving some items around in the 

trailer. 

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires 

Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit 

for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the 

Certification/Tire Label at the rear edge of the driver’s 

door, or see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32. 

Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your 

vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue. 

Hitches 

It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment. 

Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are 

a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here 

are some rules to follow: 

• If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will 

weigh more than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg), be sure to 

use a properly mounted, weight-carrying hitch and 

sway control of the proper size. This equipment 

is very important for proper vehicle loading 

and good handling when you’re driving. 

• Will you have to make any holes in the body of 

your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? 

If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when 

you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, 

deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust 

can get into your vehicle. See Engine Exhaust 

on page 2-29. Dirt and water can, too. 

4-37

Safety Chains 

You should always attach chains between your vehicle 

and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the 

tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from 

contacting the road if it becomes separated from 

the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be 

provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer 

manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s 

recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not 

attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough 

slack so you can turn with your rig. Never allow 

safety chains to drag on the ground. 

Trailer Brakes 

If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg) 

loaded, then it needs its own brakes – and they must be 

adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions 

for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, 

adjust and maintain them properly. 

Because your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes, do not 

try to tap into your vehicle’s brake system. If you do, 

both brake systems won’t work well, or at all. 

Driving with a Trailer 

{CAUTION: 

If you have a rear-most window open and you 

pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon 

monoxide (CO) could come into your vehicle. 

You can’t see or smell CO. It can cause 

unconsciousness or death. See “Engine 

Exhaust” in the Index. To maximize your safety 

when towing a trailer: 

• Have your exhaust system inspected for 

leaks, and make necessary repairs before 

starting on your trip. 

• Keep the rear-most windows closed. 

• If exhaust does come into your vehicle 

through a window in the rear or another 

opening, drive with your front, main 

heating or cooling system on and with the 

fan on any speed. This will bring fresh, 

outside air into your vehicle. Do not use 

the climate control setting for maximum air 

because it only recirculates the air inside 

your vehicle. See “Climate Controls” in the 

Index. 

4-38

Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. 

Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get 

to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of 

handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer. 

And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are 

driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as 

responsive as your vehicle is by itself. 

Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform 

(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector, 

lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has 

electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and 

then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be 

sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your 

electrical connection at the same time. 

During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the 

load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer 

brakes are still working. 

Following Distance 

Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as 

you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. 

This can help you avoid situations that require 

heavy braking and sudden turns. 

Passing 

You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when 

you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal 

longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the 

passed vehicle before you can return to your lane. 

Backing Up 

Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. 

Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand 

to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your 

hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, 

have someone guide you. 

4-39

Making Turns 

Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering 

could cause the trailer to come in contact with the 

vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid 

making very sharp turns while trailering. 

When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns 

than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike 

soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. 

Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in 

advance. 

Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer 

When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have extra 

wiring. 

The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever 

you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, 

the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers 

you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop. 

When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument 

panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer 

are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind 

you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s 

important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer 

bulbs are still working. 

Driving On Grades 

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start 

down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift 

down, you might have to use your brakes so much that 

they would get hot and no longer work well. 

If you are towing a trailer that weighs more than 

1,000 lbs. (450 kg), drive in THIRD (3) instead of 

AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) (or, as you need to, a 

lower gear). This will minimize heat build-up and extend 

the life of your transaxle. 

Parking on Hills 

{CAUTION: 

You really should not park your vehicle, with a 

trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes 

wrong, your rig could start to move. People 

can be injured, and both your vehicle and the 

trailer can be damaged. 

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s 

how to do it: 

1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into 

PARK (P) yet. 

4-40

2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer 

wheels. 

3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the 

regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load. 

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your 

parking brake, and then shift to PARK (P). 

5. Release the regular brakes. 

When You Are Ready to Leave After 

Parking on a Hill 

1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down 

while you: 

• start your engine, 

• shift into a gear, and 

• release the parking brake. 

2. Let up on the brake pedal. 

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. 

4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the 

chocks. 

Maintenance When Trailer Towing 

Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re 

pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more 

on this. Things that are especially important in trailer 

operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill), 

engine oil, belts, cooling system and brake system. 

Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index 

will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering, 

it’s a good idea to review these sections before you 

start your trip. 

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts 

are tight. 

Trailer Wiring Harness 

Your vehicle may have a trailer wiring harness located 

at the rear of your vehicle. To use the trailer wiring 

harness you need a converter kit. Contact your dealer 

for more information. 

4-41

✍ NOTES 

4-42

Section 5 

Service and Appearance Care 

Service ............................................................5-3 

Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-3 

Adding Equipment to the Outside of 

Your Vehicle ..............................................5-4 

Fuel ................................................................5-4 

Gasoline Octane ............................................5-4 

Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5 

California Fuel ...............................................5-5 

Additives .......................................................5-5 

Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-6 

Filling Your Tank ............................................5-6 

Filling a Portable Fuel Container .......................5-8 

Checking Things Under 

the Hood ......................................................5-8 

Hood Release ................................................5-9 

Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-10 

Engine Oil ...................................................5-11 

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-16 

Automatic Transaxle Fluid ..............................5-18 

Engine Coolant .............................................5-20 

Radiator Pressure Cap ..................................5-23 

Engine Overheating .......................................5-23 

Cooling System ............................................5-26 

Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-33 

Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-34 

Brakes ........................................................5-35 

Battery ........................................................5-38 

Jump Starting ...............................................5-39 

All-Wheel Drive ..............................................5-43 

Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-45 

Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-45 

Headlamps ..................................................5-45 

Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and 

Parking Lamps ..........................................5-47 

Taillamps, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps ........5-48 

Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-49 

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-49 

Tires ..............................................................5-50 

Inflation -- Tire Pressure ................................5-50 

Check Tire Pressure System ..........................5-51 

Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-53 

When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-55 

Buying New Tires .........................................5-55 

Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-56 

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-58 

Wheel Replacement ......................................5-58 

Tire Chains ..................................................5-59 

Accessory Inflator .........................................5-60 

If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-61 

Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-62 

Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-82 

5-1

Section 5 

Service and Appearance Care 

Appearance Care ............................................5-83 

Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-84 

Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-86 

Weatherstrips ...............................................5-86 

Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle ..............5-86 

Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-88 

Finish Damage .............................................5-88 

Underbody Maintenance ................................5-89 

Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-89 

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-89 

Vehicle Identification ......................................5-90 

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-90 

Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-91 

Electrical System ............................................5-91 

Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-91 

Headlamp Wiring ..........................................5-91 

Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-91 

Power Windows and Other 

Power Options ..........................................5-91 

Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-92 

Capacities and Specifications ..........................5-98 

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........5-99 

5-2

Service 

Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to 

be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer 

for all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts 

and GM-trained and supported service people. 

We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM. 

Genuine GM parts have one of these marks: 

Doing Your Own Service Work 

If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll 

want to use the proper service manual. It tells you 

much more about how to service your vehicle than this 

manual can. To order the proper service manual, 

see Service Publications Ordering Information on 

page 7-10. 

Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting 

to do your own service work, see Servicing Your Air 

Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-68. 

You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list 

the mileage and the date of any service work you 

perform. See Part E: Maintenance Record on page 6-16. 

{CAUTION: 

You can be injured and your vehicle could be 

damaged if you try to do service work on a 

vehicle without knowing enough about it. 

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge, 

experience, the proper replacement parts 

and tools before you attempt any vehicle 

maintenance task. 


5-3

CAUTION: 

(Continued) 

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and 

other fasteners. “English” and “metric” 

fasteners can be easily confused. If you 

use the wrong fasteners, parts can later 

break or fall off. You could be hurt. 


Your Vehicle 

Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can 

affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind 

noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check 

with your dealer before adding equipment to the 

outside of your vehicle. 

Fuel 

Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the 

proper maintenance of your vehicle. 

Gasoline Octane 

Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane 

of 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may 

get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this 

occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as 

soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage 

your engine. A little pinging noise when you accelerate 

or drive uphill is considered normal. This does not 

indicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel is 

necessary. If you are using 87 octane or higher-octane 

fuel and hear heavy knocking, your engine needs 

service. 

5-4

Gasoline Specifications 

It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications 

which were developed by the American Automobile 

Manufacturers Association and endorsed by the 

Canadian Vehicle Manufacturers Association for better 

vehicle performance and engine protection. Gasoline 

meeting these specifications could provide improved 

driveability and emission control system performance 

compared to other gasoline. 

Canada Only 

In Canada, look for the 

“Auto Makers’ Choice” 

label on the pump. 

California Fuel 

If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission 

Standards (see the underhood emission control label), 

it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California 

specifications. If this fuel is not available in states 

adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle 

will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal 

specifications, but emission control system performance 

may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may 

turn on (see Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-35) 

and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this 

occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for 

diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused 

by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered 


Additives 

To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States 

are now required to contain additives that will help 

prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming, 

allowing your emission control system to work 

properly. You should not have to add anything to your 

fuel. Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as 

ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be 

available in your area to contribute to clean air. 

General Motors recommends that you use these 

gasolines, particularly if they comply with the 

specifications described earlier. 

5-5

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that 

contains methanol. Don’t use fuel containing 

methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel 

system and also damage the plastic and rubber 

parts. That damage wouldn’t be covered under your 

warranty. 

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low 

emissions may contain an octane-enhancing 

additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese 

tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you 

buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. General 

Motors does not recommend the use of such gasolines. 

Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark 

plugs and the performance of the emission control 

system may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp 

may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized 

GM dealer for service. 

Filling Your Tank 

{CAUTION: 

Fuel vapor is highly flammable. It burns 

violently, and that can cause very bad injuries. 

Don’t smoke if you’re near fuel or refueling 

your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking 

materials away from fuel. 

The fuel cap is located 

on the driver’s side of 

the vehicle. 

Fuels in Foreign Countries 

If you plan on driving in another country outside the 

United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard 

to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel 

not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly 

repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be 

covered by your warranty. 

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or 

contact a major oil company that does business in the 

country where you’ll be driving. 

5-6

While refueling, let the fuel 

cap hang by the tether as 

shown. 

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left 

(counterclockwise). The fuel cap has spring in it; if you let 

go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to the right. 

{CAUTION: 

If you get fuel on yourself and then something 

ignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuel can 

spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too 

quickly. This spray can happen if your tank is 

nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. 

Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any “hiss” 

noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way. 

Be careful not to spill fuel. Clean fuel from painted 

surfaces as soon as possible. See Cleaning the Outside 

of Your Vehicle on page 5-86. 

When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to the right 

(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make 

sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can 

determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly 

installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the 

atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on 

page 3-35. 

The malfunction indicator lamp (SERVICE ENGINE 

SOON or CHECK ENGINE light) will come on if the fuel 

cap is not properly installed. 

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get 

the right type. Your dealer can get one for you. 

If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly. 

This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to 

light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions 

system. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the 

Index. 

5-7

Filling a Portable Fuel Container 

{CAUTION: 

Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in 

your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from 

the container can ignite the gasoline vapor. 

You can be badly burned and your vehicle 

damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to 

you and others: 

• Dispense gasoline only into approved 

containers. 

• Do not fill a container while it is inside a 

vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or 

on any surface other than the ground. 

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the 

inside of the fill opening before operating 

the nozzle. Contact should be maintained 

until the filling is complete. 

• Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline. 

Checking Things Under 

the Hood 

{CAUTION: 

An electric fan under the hood can start up 

and injure you even when the engine is not 

running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away 

from any underhood electric fan. 

{CAUTION: 

Things that burn can get on hot engine parts 

and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, 

oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and 

other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or 

others could be burned. Be careful not to drop 

or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine. 

5-8

Hood Release 

To open the hood, do the following: 

1. Pull the hood release handle, located on the 

driver’s side under the instrument panel. 

2. Go to the front of the vehicle and slide the 

secondary hood release from left to right. 

3. Lift the hood. 

4. If your vehicle has a prop rod, place it in the slot 

on the underside of the hood. 

Before closing the hood be sure all filler caps are on 

properly, then let the hood down and close it firmly. 

5-9

Engine Compartment Overview 

When you lift the hood, you’ll see these items: 

5-10

A. Underhood Fuse Block. See Fuses and Circuit 

Breakers on page 5-92. 

B. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on 

page 5-39. 

C. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering 

Fluid on page 5-33. 

D. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick. See Automatic 

Transaxle Fluid on page 5-18. 

E. Brake Master Cylinder. See Brakes on page 5-35. 

F. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Windshield 

Washer Fluid on page 5-34. 

G. Battery. See Battery on page 5-38. 

H. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure Cap 

on page 5-23. 

I. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil on page 5-11. 

J. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil on page 5-11. 

K. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air 

Cleaner/Filter on page 5-16. 

L. Coolant Recovery Tank. See Engine Coolant on 

page 5-20. 

Engine Oil 

If the low engine oil level message appears on the 

instrument cluster, it means you need to check your 

engine oil level right away. For more information, 

see Low Engine Oil Level Message on page 3-42. 

You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is 

an added reminder. 

5-11

Checking Engine Oil 

It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you 

get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil 

must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground. 

The engine oil dipstick is 

located at the front of the 

engine compartment, 

near the center. The 

dipstick handle has a 

bright, yellow loop design 

for easy identification. 

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-10 for 

more information on location. 

Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to 

drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil 

dipstick might not show the actual level. 

Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or 

cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, 

keeping the tip down, and check the level. 

5-12

When to Add Engine Oil 

If the oil is at or below the cross-hatched area at the tip 

of the dipstick, then you’ll need to add at least one 

quart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This part 

explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase 

capacity, see Capacities and Specifications on 

page 5-98. 

Notice: Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has 

so much oil that the oil level gets above the 

cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating 

range, your engine could be damaged. 

The engine oil fill cap is 

located just behind the 

engine oil dipstick. 



Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in 

the proper operating range in the cross-hatched 

area. Push the dipstick all the way back in when you’re 

through. 

5-13

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use 

Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by 

looking for the starburst symbol. 

This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by 

the American Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use 

any oil which does not carry this starburst symbol. 

If you choose to perform 

the engine oil change 

service yourself, be sure 

the oil you use has 

the starburst symbol on 

the front of the oil 

container. If you have your 

oil changed for you, be 

sure the oil put into 

your engine is American 

Petroleum Institute certified 

for gasoline engines. 

You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your 

vehicle, as shown in the viscosity chart. 

5-14

As in the chart shown previously, SAE 5W-30 is the 

only viscosity grade recommended for your vehicle. You 

should look for and use only oils which have the API 

Starburst symbol and which are also identified as 

SAE 5W-30. If you cannot find such SAE 5W-30 oils, 

you can use an SAE 10W-30 oil which has the API 

Starburst symbol, if it’s going to be 0°F (−18°C) 

or above. Do not use other viscosity grade oils, such as 

SAE 10W-40 or SAE 20W-50 under any conditions. 

Notice: Use only engine oil with the American 

Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines 

starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended 

oil can result in engine damage not covered by 


GM Goodwrench ® oil meets all the requirements for 

your vehicle. 

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the 

temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is 

recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30 

synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide 

easier cold starting and better protection for your 

engine at extremely low temperatures. 

Engine Oil Additives 

Don’t add anything to your oil. The recommended 

oils with the starburst symbol are all you will need for 

good performance and engine protection. 

When to Change Engine Oil 

(GM Oil Life System) 

Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know 

when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on 

engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on 

mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at 

which an oil change will be indicated can vary 

considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you 

must reset the system every time the oil is changed. 

When the system has calculated that oil life has been 

diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary. 

A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message will come on. Change 

your oil as soon as possible within the next two times you 

stop for fuel. It is possible that, if you are driving under the 

best conditions, the oil life system may not indicate that 

an oil change is necessary for over a year. However, your 

engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year 

and at this time the system must be reset. Your dealer 

has GM-trained service people who will perform this work 

using genuine GM parts and reset the system. It is also 

important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the 

proper level. 

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must 

change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your 

last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system 

whenever the oil is changed. 

5-15

How to Reset the Change Engine Oil 

Message 

The GM Oil Life System calculates when to change your 

engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime your 

oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate when 

the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs where 

you change your oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL 

message being turned on, reset the system. 

If your vehicle does not have the optional Driver 

Information Center (DIC), do the following: 

1. With the ignition key in ON but the engine off, fully 

push and release the accelerator pedal slowly three 

times within five seconds. 

2. Turn the key to OFF. 

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes back 

on, the engine oil life monitor has not reset. 

Repeat the procedure. 

If your vehicle has the optional DIC, do the following: 

1. Turn the ignition to ON with the engine off. 

2. Press the MODE button until the DIC reads OIL 

LIFE LEFT/HOLD SET TO RESET. 

3. Press and hold the SET button until 100% is 

displayed. 

You will hear three chimes and the CHANGE 

ENGINE OIL message will go off. If the CHANGE 

ENGINE OIL message comes back on, the monitor 

has not reset. Repeat the procedure. 

What to Do with Used Oil 

Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be 

unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer. 

Don’t let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean 

your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good 

hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or 

rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s 

warnings about the use and disposal of oil products. 

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you 

change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the 

filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in 

the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into 

streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it 

to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem 

properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, 

a service station or a local recycling center for help. 

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 


the location of the engine air cleaner/filter. 

When to Inspect the Engine Air 

Cleaner/Filter 

Inspect the air cleaner/filter every 15,000 miles 

(25 000 km) and replace every 30,000 miles 

(50 000 km). If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, 

inspect the filter at every oil change. 

5-16

How to Inspect the Engine Air 

Cleaner/Filter 

To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from 

the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release 

loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains “caked” with dirt, 

a new filter is required. 

To inspect or replace the air cleaner/filter, do the 

following: 

4. Remove and replace the engine air cleaner/filter. 

5. Align the tabs located on the bottom of the 

panel with the slots at the bottom of the housing. 

6. Latch the hooks to secure the panel in place. If the 

panel moves easily, check that the tabs are seated 

correctly in the slots. 

7. Put the duct back on and reinstall the clamps. 

{CAUTION: 

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter 

off can cause you or others to be burned. The 

air cleaner not only cleans the air, it helps to 

stop flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t there 

and the engine backfires, you could be burned. 

Don’t drive with it off, and be careful working on 

the engine with the air cleaner/filter off. 

1. Remove the two clamps on the duct. 

2. Remove the duct. 

3. Unlatch the two hooks on top of the engine air 

cleaner/filter housing. 

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can 

cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can 

easily get into your engine, which will damage it. 

Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when 

you’re driving. 

5-17

Automatic Transaxle Fluid 

When to Check and Change Automatic 

Transaxle Fluid 

A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid 

level is when the engine oil is changed. 

Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles 

(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or 

more of these conditions: 

• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature 

regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher. 

• In hilly or mountainous terrain. 

• When doing frequent trailer towing. 

• Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery 

service. 

If you do not use your vehicle under any of 

these conditions, change the fluid and filter at 

100,000 miles (166 000 km). 

See Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services on 

page 6-4. 

How to Check Automatic Transaxle 

Fluid 

Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may 

choose to have this done at the dealership service 

department. 

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions 

here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick. 

Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage 

your transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the 

fluid could come out and fall on hot engine or 

exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid 

could cause the transaxle to overheat. Be sure 

to get an accurate reading if you check your 

transaxle fluid. 

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle 

fluid level if you have been driving: 

• When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C). 

• At high speed for quite a while. 

• In heavy traffic - especially in hot weather. 

To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal 

operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F 

(82°C to 93°C). 

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 

15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are 

above 50°F (10°C). If it’s colder than 50°F (10°C), 

you may have to drive longer. 

5-18

Checking the Fluid Level 

Prepare your vehicle as follows: 

• Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine 

running. 

• With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever 

in PARK (P). 

• With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift 

lever through each gear range, pausing for about 

three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift 

lever in PARK (P). 

• Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes. 

Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps: 

The dipstick is located 

toward the back of the 

engine compartment, 

next to the brake master 

cylinder. 

The dipstick handle is a bright red loop. See Engine 

Compartment Overview on page 5-10 for more 

information on location. 

1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or 

paper towel. 

2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and 

then pull it back out again. 

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the 

lower level. The fluid level must be in the 

cross-hatched area. 

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push 

the dipstick back in all the way. 

5-19

How to Add Automatic Transaxle Fluid 

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine 

what kind of transaxle fluid to use. See Part D: 

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-15. 

If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper 

fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on 

the dipstick. 

1. Pull out the dipstick. 

2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the 

dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level. 

It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than one 

pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill. 

Notice: We recommend you use only fluid labeled 

DEXRON ® -III, because fluid with that label is 

made especially for your automatic transmission. 

Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON ® -III 

is not covered by your new vehicle warranty. 

3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as 

described under “How to Check.” 

4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the 

dipstick back in all the way. 

Engine Coolant 

The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with 

DEX-COOL ® engine coolant. This coolant is designed 

to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles 

(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add 

only DEX-COOL ® extended life coolant. 

The following explains your cooling system and how to 

add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem 

with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on 

page 5-23. 

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and 

DEX-COOL ® coolant will: 

• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C). 

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C). 

• Protect against rust and corrosion. 

• Help keep the proper engine temperature. 

• Let the warning messages and gages work as 

they should. 

5-20

Notice: When adding coolant, it is important that 

you use only DEX-COOL ® (silicate-free) coolant. 

If coolant other than DEX-COOL ® is added to 

the system, premature engine, heater core or 

radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine 

coolant will require change sooner — at 30,000 miles 

(50,000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. 

Damage caused by the use of coolant other 

than DEX-COOL ® is not covered by your new 

vehicle warranty. 

What Coolant to Use 

Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and 

one-half DEX-COOL ® coolant which won’t damage 

aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, 

you don’t need to add anything else. 

{CAUTION: 

Adding only plain water to your cooling 

system can be dangerous. Plain water, or 

some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil 

before the proper coolant mixture will. Your 

vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the 

proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the 

wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot 

but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning. 

Your engine could catch fire and you or others 

could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, 

drinkable water and DEX-COOL ® coolant. 

Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your 

engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The 

repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. 

Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack 

the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. 

If you have to add coolant more than four times a year, 

have your dealer check your cooling system. 

Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you don’t 

have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim 

to improve the system. These can be harmful. 

5-21

Checking Coolant 

Adding Coolant 

If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL ® 

coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank. 

{CAUTION: 

Turning the radiator pressure cap when the 

engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and 

scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly. 

With the coolant recovery tank, you will almost 

never have to add coolant at the radiator. 

Never turn the radiator pressure cap — even a 

little — when the engine and radiator are hot. 

The coolant recovery tank is located on the driver’s side 

of the vehicle, above the engine air cleaner/filter. See 

Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-10 for 


The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your 

engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the 

FULL COLD mark, or a little higher. When your engine 

is warm, the level should be above the FULL COLD 

mark or a little higher. 

Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be careful 

not to spill it. 

5-22

{CAUTION: 

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot 

engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol, 

and it will burn if the engine parts are hot 

enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine. 

Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator. 

For information on how to add coolant to the radiator, 

see Cooling System on page 5-26. 

Radiator Pressure Cap 

Notice: Your radiator cap is a pressure-type cap 

and must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss 

and possible engine damage from overheating. 

Be sure the arrows on the cap line up with the 

overflow tube on the radiator filler neck. 

The radiator pressure cap is located at the front of the 

engine compartment on the passenger’s side of the 

vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on 

page 5-10 for more information on location. 

Engine Overheating 

You will find an engine coolant temperature gage on 

your vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant 

Temperature Gage on page 3-35. You also have 

an engine coolant temperature warning message on 

your instrument panel. See Engine Coolant Temperature 

Warning Message on page 3-40. 

Overheated Engine Protection 

Operating Mode 

This emergency operating mode allows your vehicle to 

be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation. 

If an overheated engine condition exists, an overheat 

protection mode which alternates firing groups of 

cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode, 

you will notice a significant loss in power and engine 

performance. The temperature gage will indicate 

an overheat condition exists. Driving extended 

miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the overheat 

protection mode should be avoided. 

Notice: After driving in the overheated engine 

protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage, 

allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair. 

The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair the 

cause of coolant loss, change the oil and reset the oil 

life system. See “Engine Oil” in the Index. 

5-23

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine 

{CAUTION: 

Steam from an overheated engine can burn 

you badly, even if you just open the hood. 

Stay away from the engine if you see or hear 

steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get 

everyone away from the vehicle until it cools 

down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or 

coolant before you open the hood. 

If you keep driving when your engine is 

overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. 

You or others could be badly burned. Stop 

your engine if it overheats, and get out of the 

vehicle until the engine is cool. 

See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating 

Mode” in the Index for information on driving 

to a safe place in an emergency. 

Notice: If your engine catches fire because you keep 

driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly 

damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by 

your warranty. See “Overheated Engine Protection 

Operating Mode” in the Index for information on 

driving to a safe place in an emergency. 

5-24

If No Steam Is Coming From Your 

Engine 

If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear 

no steam, the problem may not be too serious. 

Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you: 

• Climb a long hill on a hot day. 

• Stop after high-speed driving. 

• Idle for long periods in traffic. 

• Tow a trailer. 

If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam, 

try this for a minute or so: 

1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off. 

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan 

speed and open the window as necessary. 

3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N); 

otherwise, shift to the highest gear while 

driving – AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D). 

If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can 

drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes. 

If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive 

normally. 

If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your 

vehicle right away. 

If there’s still no sign of steam, idle the engine for three 

minutes while you’re parked. If you still have the 

warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of the 

vehicle until it cools down. Also, see “Overheated 

Engine Protection Operating Mode” listed previously in 

this section. 

You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service 

help right away. 

5-25

Cooling System 

When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what 

you’ll see: 

{CAUTION: 

An electric engine cooling fan under the hood 

can start up even when the engine is not 

running and can injure you. Keep hands, 

clothing and tools away from any underhood 

electric fan. 

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling, 

don’t do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle 

should be parked on a level surface. 

A. Radiator Pressure Cap 

B. Electric Engine Cooling Fans 

C. Coolant Recovery Tank 

5-26

CAUTION: 

(Continued) 

Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you run 

the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could 

cause an engine fire, and you could be burned. 

Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle. 

The coolant level should be at or above the FULL COLD 

mark. If it isn’t, you may have a leak at the pressure cap 

or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water 

pump or somewhere else in the cooling system. 

{CAUTION: 

Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine 

parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them. If you 

do, you can be burned. 


If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check 

to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running. 

If the engine is overheating, both fans should be 

running. If they aren’t, your vehicle needs service. 

Notice: Engine damage from running your engine 

without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty. 

See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating 

Mode” in the Index for information on driving to 

a safe place in an emergency. 

Notice: When adding coolant, it is important that 

you use only DEX-COOL ® (silicate-free) coolant. If 

coolant other than DEX-COOL ® is added to the 

system, premature engine, heater core or radiator 

corrosion may result. In addition, the engine coolant 

will require change sooner — at 30,000 miles 

(50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. 

Damage caused by the use of coolant other than 

DEX-COOL ® is not covered by your new vehicle 

warranty. 

5-27

How to Add Coolant to the Coolant 

Recovery Tank 

If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level 

isn’t at or above the FULL COLD mark, add a 

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL ® 

engine coolant at the coolant recovery tank. See 

Engine Coolant on page 5-20 for more information. 

{CAUTION: 

Adding only plain water to your cooling 

system can be dangerous. Plain water, or 

some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil 

before the proper coolant mixture will. Your 

vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the 

proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the 

wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot 

but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning. 

Your engine could catch fire and you or others 

could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, 

drinkable water and DEX-COOL ® coolant. 

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack 

the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. 

Use the recommended coolant and the proper 

coolant mixture. 

{CAUTION: 


engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol 



When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at or 

above the FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle. 

5-28

If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more 

thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant 

mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling 

system is cool before you do it. 

{CAUTION: 

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling 

system can blow out and burn you badly. They 

are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator 

pressure cap — even a little — they can come 

out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the 

cooling system, including the radiator pressure 

cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and 

radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have 

to turn the pressure cap. 

How to Add Coolant to the Radiator 

Notice: Your engine has a specific radiator 

fill procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could 

cause your engine to overheat and be severely 

damaged. 

5-29

1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when 

the cooling system, including the radiator pressure 

cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. 

Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until 

it first stops. (Don’t press down while turning the 

pressure cap.) 

If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss 

means there is still some pressure left. 

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push 

down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap. 

{CAUTION: 


engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol 



5-30

Bypass Tube 

Housing 

3. After the engine cools, open the coolant air bleed 

valves. 

There are two bleed valves. One is located on the 

thermostat housing. The other is located on the 

thermostat bypass tube. 

4. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL ® 

coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler 

neck. See Engine Coolant on page 5-20 for more 

information about the proper coolant mixture. 

If you see a stream of coolant coming from an air 

bleed valve, close the valve. Otherwise, close 

the valves after the radiator is filled. 

5. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engine 

and the compartment. 

5-31

6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the 

upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the 

engine cooling fans. 

7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator 

filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add 

more of the proper DEX-COOL ® coolant mixture 

through the filler neck until the level reaches 

the base of the filler neck. 

8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during 

this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the 

filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure 

the arrows on the pressure cap line up like this. 

5-32

Power Steering Fluid 

9. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the FULL 

COLD mark. 

10. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank. 

The power steering fluid reservoir is located to the right 

of the windshield washer fluid reservoir, at the back 

of the engine compartment. 

When to Check Power Steering Fluid 

It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid 

unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or 

you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system 

could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected 

and repaired. See Engine Compartment Overview 

on page 5-10 for reservoir location. 

5-33

How to Check Power Steering Fluid 

Turn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down, 

wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then 

unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. 

Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then 

remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on 

the dipstick. 

When the engine compartment is hot, the level 

should be at the H (hot) mark. When it’s cold, the level 

should be at the C (cold) mark. If the fluid is at the 

ADD mark, you should add fluid. 

What Power Steering Fluid to Use 

To determine what kind of fluid to use, see Part D: 

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-15. 

Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper 

fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals. 

Windshield Washer Fluid 

What Washer Fluid to Use 

When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read 

the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be 

operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature 

may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient 

protection against freezing. See Engine Compartment 

Overview on page 5-10 for reservoir location. 

Adding Washer Fluid 

Open the cap with the 

washer symbol on it. 

Add washer fluid until 

the tank is full. 

5-34

Notice: 

• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow 

the manufacturer’s instructions for adding 

water. 

• Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. 

Water can cause the solution to freeze and 

damage your washer fluid tank and other parts 

of the washer system. Also, water doesn’t 

clean as well as washer fluid. 

• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters 

full when it’s very cold. This allows for 

expansion if freezing occurs, which could 

damage the tank if it is completely full. 

• Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your 

windshield washer. It can damage your 

washer system and paint. 

Brakes 

Brake Fluid 

Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT-3 

brake fluid. See Engine Compartment Overview on 

page 5-10 for the location of the reservoir. 

5-35

There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in 

the reservoir might go down. The first is that the 

brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during 

normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, 

the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is 

that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you 

should have your brake system fixed since a leak 

means that sooner or later your brakes won’t work well, 

or won’t work at all. 

So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid. 

Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid 

when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too 

much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should 

add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when 

work is done on the brake hydraulic system. 

{CAUTION: 

United States 


When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake 

warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning 

Light on page 3-33. 

What to Add 

When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake 

fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container 

only. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 

on page 6-15. 

If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on 

the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is 

hot enough. You or others could be burned, 

and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake 

fluid only when work is done on the brake 

hydraulic system. 

5-36

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area 

around the cap before removing it. This will help 

keep dirt from entering the reservoir. 

{CAUTION: 

With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake 

system, your brakes may not work well, or they 

may not even work at all. This could cause a 

crash. Always use the proper brake fluid. 

Notice: 

• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake 

system parts. For example, just a few drops of 

mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your 

brake system can damage brake system 

parts so badly that they’ll have to be replaced. 

Don’t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid. 

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted 

surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. 

Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your 

vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately. 

See “Appearance Care” in the Index. 

Brake Wear 

Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes. 

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make 

a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads 

are worn and new pads are needed. The sound 

may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle 

is moving (except when you are pushing on the 

brake pedal firmly). 

{CAUTION: 

The brake wear warning sound means that 

soon your brakes won’t work well. That could 

lead to an accident. When you hear the brake 

wear warning sound, have your vehicle 

serviced. 

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake 

pads could result in costly brake repair. 

Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake 

squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly 

applied. This does not mean something is wrong with 

your brakes. 

5-37

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help 

prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect 

brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in 

the proper sequence to GM torque specifications. 

Brake linings should always be replaced as complete 

axle sets. 

See Brake System Inspection on page 6-14. 

Brake Pedal Travel 

See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to 

normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in 

pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble. 

Brake Adjustment 

Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the 

vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear. 

Replacing Brake System Parts 

The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many 

parts have to be of top quality and work well together 

if the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle 

was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake 

parts. When you replace parts of your braking 

system — for example, when your brake linings wear 

down and you need new ones put in — be sure you 

get new approved GM replacement parts. If you 

don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. 

For example, if someone puts in brake linings that 

are wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your 

front and rear brakes can change — for the worse. 

The braking performance you’ve come to expect can 

change in many other ways if someone puts in the 

wrong replacement brake parts. 

Battery 

Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free 

ACDelco ® battery. When it’s time for a new battery, get 

one that has the replacement number shown on the 

original battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco ® 

battery. See Engine Compartment Overview on 

page 5-10 for battery location. 

Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related 

accessories contain lead and lead compounds, 

chemicals known to the State of California to cause 

cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after 

handling. 

5-38

Vehicle Storage 

If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or 

more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from 

the battery. This will help keep your battery from 

running down. 

{CAUTION: 

Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas 

that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you 

aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” next for 

tips on working around a battery without 

getting hurt. 

Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your 

vehicle for longer storage periods. 

Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent 

Feature on page 3-106. 

Jump Starting 

If your battery has run down, you may want to use 

another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your 

vehicle. Be sure to follow the steps below to do it safely. 

{CAUTION: 

Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous 

because: 

• They contain acid that can burn you. 

• They contain gas that can explode or 

ignite. 

• They contain enough electricity to 

burn you. 

If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some 

or all of these things can hurt you. 

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly 

damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered 


Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it 

won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle. 

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt 

battery with a negative ground system. 

5-39

Notice: If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system 

with a negative ground, both vehicles can be 

damaged. 

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables 

can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching 

each other. If they are, it could cause a ground 

connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to 

start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could 

damage the electrical systems. 

To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set 

the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in 

the jump starting procedure. Put an automatic 

transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle 

in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake. 

Notice: If you leave your radio on, it could be badly 

damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by 


3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug 

unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette 

lighter or in the accessory power outlet(s). Turn 

off the radios and all lamps that aren’t needed. This 

will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. 

And it could save your radio! 

4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the 

positive (+) and negative (−) terminals on each 

vehicle. 

You will not need to access your battery for jump 

starting. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump 

starting terminal for that purpose. The terminal is 

located under a tethered cap at the front of the 

underhood fuse and relay center. See Engine 

Compartment Overview on page 5-10 for more 

information on location. 

Flip the cap up to access the remote positive (+) 

terminal. You should always use the remote 

positive (+) terminal instead of the positive (+) 

terminal on the battery. 

{CAUTION: 

An electric fan can start up even when the 

engine is not running and can injure you. 

Keep hands, clothing and tools away from 

any underhood electric fan. 

5-40

{CAUTION: 

Using a match near a battery can cause battery 

gas to explode. People have been hurt doing 

this, and some have been blinded. Use a 

flashlight if you need more light. 

Be sure the battery has enough water. You 

don’t need to add water to the ACDelco ® 

battery installed in your new vehicle. But if a 

battery has filler caps, be sure the right 

amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water 

to take care of that first. If you don’t, explosive 

gas could be present. 

Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. 

Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in 

your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with 

water and get medical help immediately. 

{CAUTION: 

Fans or other moving engine parts can injure 

you badly. Keep your hands away from moving 

parts once the engine is running. 

5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or 

missing insulation. If they do, you could get a 

shock. The vehicles could be damaged too. 

Before you connect the cables, here are some 

basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to 

positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if 

the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy, 

unpainted metal engine part or to a remote 

negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one. 

Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you’ll 

get a short that would damage the battery and 

maybe other parts too. And don’t connect the 

negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on 

the dead battery because this can cause sparks. 

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) 

terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote 

positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 

5-41

7. Don’t let the other end 

touch metal. Connect it 

to the positive (+) 

terminal of the good 

battery. Use a remote 

positive (+) terminal 

if the vehicle has one. 

8. Now connect the black 

negative (−) cable to 

the negative (−) 

terminal of the good 

battery. Use a remote 

negative (−) terminal 

if the vehicle has one. 

Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next 

step. The other end of the negative (−) cable doesn’t 

go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted 

metal engine part or to a remote negative (−) 

terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery. 

9. Connect the other end 

of the negative (−) 

cable at least 18 inches 

(45 cm) away from the 

dead battery, but not 

near engine parts that 

move. The electrical 

connection is just as 

good there, and the 

chance of sparks 

getting back to the 

battery is much less. 

10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run 

the engine for a while. 

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. 

If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs 

service. 

5-42

Notice: Damage to your vehicle may result from 

electrical shorting if jumper cables are removed 

incorrectly. To prevent electrical shorting, take care 

that the cables don’t touch each other or any 

other metal. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by 


Jumper Cable Removal 

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote 

Negative (−) Terminal 

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote 

Negative (−) Terminals 

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal 

To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, 


1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the 

vehicle that had the dead battery. 

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the 

vehicle with the good battery. 

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the 

vehicle with the good battery. 

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other 

vehicle. 

5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover to its 

original position. 

All-Wheel Drive 

If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure to 

perform the lubricant checks described in this section. 

However, they have two additional systems that 

need lubrication. 

Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit) 

When to Check Lubricant 

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how 

often to check the lubricant. See Part C: Periodic 

Maintenance Inspections on page 6-13. 

5-43

How to Check Lubricant 

Carrier Assembly-Differential (Rear 

Drive Module) 

When to Check and Change Lubricant 

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how 

often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See 

Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services on page 6-4. 

How to Check Lubricant 

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a 

level surface. 

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, 

you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant 

to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. 

What to Use 

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what 

kind of lubricant to use. See Part D: Recommended 

Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-15. 

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a 

level surface. 

5-44

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, 

you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant 

to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. 

A fluid loss could indicate a problem; check and have it 

repaired, if needed. 

What to Use 

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what 

kind of lubricant to use. See Part D: Recommended 


Bulb Replacement 

For the type of bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on 

page 5-49. 

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this 

section, contact your dealer. 

Headlamps 

1. Open the hood. 

2. Push in on the 

headlamp and lift up 

the headlamp retaining 

clip partway, but do 

not remove. 

Halogen Bulbs 

{CAUTION: 

3. Unsnap the headlamp assembly by pulling it 

forward, away from the vehicle. 

4. Disconnect the electrical connector by pulling back 

on the locking tab, located on the electrical 

connector, to separate the two connectors. 

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and 

can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or 

others could be injured. Be sure to read and 

follow the instructions on the bulb package. 

5-45

5. Remove the bulb 

access cover. 

6. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter of a turn 

clockwise. 

7. Pull the bulb assembly out from the lamp housing. 8. Unhook the electrical connector by lifting up the 

gray tabs and separate the connector from the 

bulb base. 

9. Install the new bulb into the electrical connector. 

Push the bulb firmly enough so that the gray tabs 

hook over the tab on the bulb. 

10. Put the bulb assembly back into the lamp housing 

and turn the bulb socket one-quarter of a turn 

counterclockwise. 

11. Reinstall the bulb access cover making sure it is 

in place. 

5-46

12. Align the retaining clips on the back of the headlamp 

with the rectangular holes in the mounting panel. 

13. Push firmly on both ends of the headlamp to snap it 

into position. 

14. Push the retaining clip down to its original position. 

3. Unsnap the lamp assembly by lifting straight up. 

4. Pull the lamp assembly away from the vehicle. 

Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker 

and Parking Lamps 

1. Open the hood. 

2. Remove the two inboard screws attaching the lamp 

to the fender bracket. 

5. Unscrew the bulb socket from the lamp assembly 

by pressing the tab while turning it 


6. Replace the bulb by pulling the old one out and 

gently pushing the new one into the lamp socket. 

7. Line up the tabs on the socket with the gaps in the 

socket holes and screw the bulb socket back into 

the lamp housing until a click is heard (the tab 

popping back out). 

5-47

8. To reinstall the lamp assembly, align the tapered 

pin on the bottom of the lamp with the plastic 

socket on the fender bracket. Push down until the 

pin snaps into the socket. 

9. Reinstall the two screws that were removed in 

Step 2. 

Taillamps, Stoplamps and Back-up 

Lamps 

1. Open the liftgate and the tailgate. 

2. Remove the two 

screws from the 

taillamp housing. 

3. Turn the lamp outboard, then pull the assembly 

firmly rearward. 

A. Stop/Taillamps 

B. Back-up Lamps 

4. Unscrew the bulb socket from the lamp assembly 

by pressing the tab while turning the bulb socket 


5. Replace the bulb by pulling the old one out and 

gently pushing the new one into the bulb socket. 

6. Line up the tabs on the bulb socket with the gaps in 

the socket holes and screw the bulb socket back 

into the lamp housing. You will hear a click. 

7. To reinstall, align the pins on the back of the lamp 

with the sockets on the outboard side of the lamp 

opening. 

8. Push forward until the pins snap into the socket. 

9. Reinstall the screws removed in Step 2. 

5-48

Replacement Bulbs 

Lamp 

Bulb Number 

Back-up Lamps (Bottom) 

3155K 

Headlamps High-beam 9005 

Headlamps Low-beam 9006 

Front Turn Signal/Parking/ 

Sidemarker Lamps 

3057 

Stop/Taillamps (Top) 

3057K 

Windshield Wiper Blade 

Replacement 

Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least 

twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Wiper Blade 

Check” under Part B: Owner Checks and Services on 

page 6-9 for more information. 

Replacement blades come in different types and are 

removed in different ways. For proper type and length, 

see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on 

page 5-99. 

Here’s how to remove the wiper blades: 

1. Turn the wipers on to the lowest intermittent setting. 

2. Turn off the ignition while the wipers are at the 

outer positions of the wipe pattern. The blades 

are more accessible for removal/replacement while 

in this position. 

3. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the 

windshield or backglass. 

4. While holding the wiper arm away from the glass, 

push the release clip from under the blade. 

5. Push the release clip, located at the connecting 

point of the blade and the arm, in the up position. 

Then, pull the blade assembly down toward 

the glass to remove it from the wiper arm. 

6. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper 

arm until you hear the release clip “click” into 

place. 

5-49

Tires 

Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by 

a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions 

about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, 

see your Pontiac Warranty booklet for details. 

{CAUTION: 

Poorly maintained and improperly used tires 

are dangerous. 

• Overloading your tires can cause 

overheating as a result of too much 

friction. You could have an air-out and a 

serious accident. See “Loading Your 

Vehicle” in the Index. 

• Underinflated tires pose the same danger 

as overloaded tires. The resulting accident 

could cause serious injury. Check all tires 

frequently to maintain the recommended 

pressure. Tire pressure should be checked 

when your tires are cold. 


CAUTION: 

(Continued) 

• Overinflated tires are more likely to be 

cut, punctured or broken by a sudden 

impact — such as when you hit a pothole. 

Keep tires at the recommended pressure. 

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If 

your tread is badly worn, or if your tires 

have been damaged, replace them. 

Inflation -- Tire Pressure 

The Certification/Tire label, which is on the rear edge of 

the driver’s door, shows the correct inflation pressures 

for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means your 

vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven 

no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). 

5-50

Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation 

or overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires 

don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get 


• Too much flexing 

• Too much heat 

• Tire overloading 

• Bad wear 

• Bad handling 

• Bad fuel economy 

If your tires have too much air (overinflation), 

you can get the following: 

• Unusual wear 

• Bad handling 

• Rough ride 

• Needless damage from road hazards 

When to Check 

Check your tires once a month or more. 

Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be at 

60 psi (420 kPa). 

How to Check 

Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire 

pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated 

simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look 

properly inflated even when they’re underinflated. 

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. 

They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and 

moisture. 

Check Tire Pressure System 

Your vehicle may have a check tire pressure system 

that can alert you to a large change in the pressure of 

one tire. The system won’t alert you before you drive 

that a tire is low or flat. You must begin driving before 

the system will work properly. 

5-51

The TIRE PRESSURE LOW: CHECK TIRES message 

will appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC) 

and the LOW TIRE PRESSURE message will come on 

the message center if pressure difference (low 

pressure) is detected in one tire. In the following 

conditions, the LOW TIRE PRESSURE may not come 

on even if the tire pressure is low, or it may come 

on when the tire pressure is actually normal if: 

• more than one tire is low, 

• only one tire is replaced with a new tire during 

service, 

• the vehicle is moving faster than 70 mph (113 km/h), 

• the system is not yet calibrated, 

• the tire treadwear is uneven, 

• the compact spare tire is installed, 

• tire chains are being used, or 

• the vehicle is being driven on a rough or 

frozen road. 

If the anti-lock brake system warning light comes on, 

the check tire pressure system may not be working 

properly. See your dealer for service. Also, see 

Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light on page 3-34. 

The check tire pressure system detects differences 

in tire rotation speeds that are caused by changes 

in tire pressure. The system can alert you about a low 

tire — but it doesn’t replace normal tire maintenance. 

See Tires on page 5-50. 

When the TIRE PRESSURE LOW: CHECK TIRES 

message appears on the Driver Information Center and 

the LOW TIRE PRESSURE message comes on the 

message center, you should stop as soon as you can 

and check all your tires for damage. If a tire is flat, 

see If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-61. Also check the 

tire pressure in all four tires as soon as you can. 

See Inflation -- Tire Pressure on page 5-50. 

Any time you adjust a tire’s pressure or have one or more 

tires repaired or replaced, you’ll need to reset (calibrate) 

the check tire pressure system. You’ll also need to reset 

the system whenever you rotate the tires, buy new tires 

and install or remove the compact spare. 

Don’t reset the check tire pressure system without first 

correcting the cause of the problem and checking 

and adjusting the pressure in all four tires. If you reset 

the system when the tire pressures are incorrect, 

the check tire pressure system will not work properly 

and may not alert you when a tire is low or high. 

5-52

To reset the system: 

1. Turn the ignition to ON with the engine off. 

2. Press the MODE button until the DIC reads 

TIRE PRESSURE LOW: CHECK TIRES. 

3. Press and hold the SET button until TIRE 

PRESSURE NORMAL is displayed. 

You will hear three chimes and the LOW TIRE 

PRESSURE message will go off and the DIC will return 

to TIRE PRESSURE NORMAL. If the LOW TIRE 

PRESSURE message comes back on, the check tire 

pressure system has not reset. Repeat the procedure. 

The system completes the calibration process during 

driving. The system “learns” the pressure at each tire 

throughout the operating speed range of your vehicle. 

The system normally takes between 30 and 60 minutes of 

driving to learn the tire pressures. The system normally 

takes 10 to 20 minutes of driving in each speed range to 

“learn” tire pressures. The speed ranges are 20 to 

40 mph (32 to 64 km/h), 40 to 60 mph (64 to 96 km/h) 

and above 60 mph (96 km/h). This time may be longer 

depending on your individual driving habits. The learning 

process does not need to be completed during a single 

trip. Once learned, the system will remember the tire 

pressures until the system is reset. 

Tire Inspection and Rotation 

Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12 500 km). 

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires 

as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also 

check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time 

for New Tires on page 5-55 and Wheel Replacement 

on page 5-58 for more information. 

Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull, 

and then try to rotate or turn the tire, If it moves, 

use the folding wrench to tighten the cable. See “Storing 

a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools” in Changing a Flat 

Tire on page 5-62. 

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more 

uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation 

is the most important. See “Part A: Scheduled 

Maintenance Services,” in Section 6, for scheduled 

rotation intervals. 

5-53

{CAUTION: 

When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation 

pattern shown here. 

Don’t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation. 

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and 

rear inflation pressures as shown on the 

Certification/Tire label. 

Reset the check tire pressure system, if equipped. 

See Check Tire Pressure System on page 5-51. 

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. 

See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and 

Specifications on page 5-98. 

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to 

which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts 

become loose after a time. The wheel could 

come off and cause an accident. When you 

change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from 

places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. 

In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a 

paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a 

scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to 

get all the rust or dirt off. See “Changing a 

Flat Tire” in the Index. 

5-54

When It Is Time for New Tires 

One way to tell when it’s 

time for new tires is to 

check the treadwear 

indicators, which will 

appear when your tires 

have only 1/16 inch 

(1.6 mm) or less of tread 

remaining. 

You need a new tire if any of the following statements 

are true: 

• You can see the indicators at three or more places 

around the tire. 

• You can see cord or fabric showing through the 

tire’s rubber. 

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged 

deep enough to show cord or fabric. 

• The tire has a bump, bulge or split. 

• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that 

can’t be repaired well because of the size or 

location of the damage. 

Buying New Tires 

To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at 

the Certification/Tire label. 

The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had 

a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) 

number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires, 

get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way 

your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed 

to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating, 

traction, ride and other things during normal service on 

your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread 

design, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS” 

(for mud and snow). 

5-55

If you ever replace your tires with those not having a 

TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, 

load range, speed rating and construction type (bias, 

bias-belted or radial) as your original tires. 

{CAUTION: 

Mixing tires could cause you to lose control 

while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes 

or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the 

vehicle may not handle properly, and you 

could have a crash. Using tires of different 

sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle. 

Be sure to use the same size and type tires on 

all wheels. It’s all right to drive with your 

compact spare temporarily, it was developed 

for use on your vehicle. See “Compact Spare 

Tire” in the index. 

{CAUTION: 

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the 

wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after 

many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel 

could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only 

radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle. 

Uniform Tire Quality Grading 

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the 

tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum 

section width. For example: 

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A 

The following information relates to the system 

developed by the United States National Highway 

Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by 

treadwear, traction and temperature performance. 

(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.) 

The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most 

passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading 

system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type 

snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, 

tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches 

(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires. 

5-56

While the tires available on General Motors passenger 

cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these 

grades, they must also conform to federal safety 

requirements and additional General Motors Tire 

Performance Criteria (TPC) standards. 

Treadwear 

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on 

the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled 

conditions on a specified government test course. 

For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and 

a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as 

a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires 

depends upon the actual conditions of their use, 

however, and may depart significantly from the norm 

due to variations in driving habits, service practices and 

differences in road characteristics and climate. 

Traction – AA, A, B, C 

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, 

B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability 

to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled 

conditions on specified government test surfaces of 

asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor 

traction performance. Warning: The traction grade 

assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking 

traction tests, and does not include acceleration, 

cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. 

Temperature – A, B, C 

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, 

representing the tire’s resistance to the generation 

of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested 

under controlled conditions on a specified indoor 

laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can 

cause the material of the tire to degenerate and 

reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to 

sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a 

level of performance which all passenger car tires must 

meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 

No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of 

performance on the laboratory test wheel than the 

minimum required by law. 

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is 

established for a tire that is properly inflated and not 

overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or 

excessive loading, either separately or in combination, 

can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. 

5-57

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance 

The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced 

carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life 

and best overall performance. 

Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are 

not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or 

your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment 

may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle 

vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels 

may need to be rebalanced. 

Wheel Replacement 

Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted 

or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the 

wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. 

If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some 

aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). 

See your dealer if any of these conditions exist. 

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need. 

Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying 

capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted 

the same way as the one it replaces. 

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts 

or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM 

original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to 

have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts 

for your vehicle. 

{CAUTION: 

Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel 

bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be 

dangerous. It could affect the braking and 

handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose 

air and make you lose control. You could have 

a collision in which you or others could be 

injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel 

bolts and wheel nuts for replacement. 

Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems 

with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or 

odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, 

vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain 

clearance to the body and chassis. 

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-62 for more 

information. 

5-58

Used Replacement Wheels 

{CAUTION: 

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is 

dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used 

or how far it’s been driven. It could fail 

suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to 

replace a wheel, use a new GM original 

equipment wheel. 

Tire Chains 

{CAUTION: 

If your vehicle has P215/70R16 or P235/55R17 

size tires, don’t use tire chains, there’s not 

enough clearance. 

Tire chains used on a vehicle without the 

proper amount of clearance can cause damage 

to the brakes, suspension or other vehicle 


CAUTION: 

(Continued) 

parts. The area damaged by the tire chains 

could cause you to lose control of your vehicle 

and you or others may be injured in a crash. 

Use another type of traction device only if its 

manufacturer recommends it for use on your 

vehicle and tire size combination and road 

conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s 

instructions. To help avoid damage to your 

vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the 

device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t 

spin your wheels. 

If you do find traction devices that will fit, 

install them on the front tires for 

front-wheel-drive vehicles. If your vehicle has 

all-wheel drive, install traction devices on 

either the front tires or all four tires, but never 

on the rear tires only. 

5-59

Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size smaller than 

P215/705R16 or P235/55R17 size tires, use tire 

chains only where legal and only when you must. 

Use only SAE Class ″S″ type chains that are the 

proper size for your tires. Install them on the front 

tires, or for all-wheel-drive vehicles, the front or 

all four (but never rear only) tires and tighten them 

as tightly as possible with the ends securely 

fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain 

manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the 

chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten 

them. If the contact continues, slow down until 

it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with 

chains on will damage your vehicle. 

Accessory Inflator 

Your vehicle may have an accessory inflator. With it, 

you can inflate things like air mattresses and 

basketballs, and you can also use it to bring your tires 

up to the proper pressure. 

The accessory inflator is located in the rear 

compartment on the driver’s side. To remove the cover, 

pull the tab on the cover and pull it off. 

This is the symbol on the 

accessory inflator switch. 

There may be an accessory inflator kit stored in the 

glove box. It includes a 20-foot (6 m) hose with an air 

pressure gage and nozzle adapters. 

{CAUTION: 

Inflating something too much can make it 

explode, and you or others could be injured. Be 

sure to read the inflator instructions, and inflate 

any object only to its recommended pressure. 

5-60

To use your accessory inflator system, do the following: 

1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or ON. 

2. Attach the appropriate nozzle adapter, if required, 

to the end of the hose that has the pressure gage. 

3. Attach that end of the hose to the object you wish 

to inflate. 

4. Remove the protective cap covering the outlet. 

5. Attach the other end of the hose to the outlet. 

6. Press the accessory inflator switch. The light in the 

switch will come on to show the system is working. 

If the accessory inflator system does not turn on or the 

light does not come on, the fuse may be blown or 

installed incorrectly. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on 

page 5-92 or see your dealer for service. 

Your accessory inflator will automatically shut off after 

about 10 minutes. The light in the switch will blink. After 

about one minute you can use the system again. Press 

the inflator switch and the indicator light will come on. 

Notice: Don’t run your accessory inflator for longer 

than 30 minutes at one time. If you do, you may 

damage the system. 

After running the accessory inflator for 30 minutes, wait at 

least 10 minutes before restarting the accessory inflator. 

To turn off the inflator, do the following: 

1. Press the switch and detach the hose, first from the 

inflated object, then from the outlet. 

2. Put the protective cap back on. 

3. Place the inflator kit tools in the pouch, and store in 

the glove box. 

To put the cover back on, line up the tabs at the back of 

the cover and put it in place. Push down the tab to 

secure the cover. 

If a Tire Goes Flat 

It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving, 

especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes 

out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly. 

But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few 

tips about what to expect and what to do: 

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that 

pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the 

accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. 

Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to 

a stop well out of the traffic lane. 

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a 

skid and may require the same correction you’d use 

in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the 

accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by 

steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be 

very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently 

brake to a stop, well off the road if possible. 

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your 

jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely. 

5-61

Changing a Flat Tire 

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage 

by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your 

hazard warning flashers. 

{CAUTION: 

Changing a tire can cause an injury. The 

vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you 

or other people. You and they could be badly 

injured. Find a level place to change your tire. 

To help prevent the vehicle from moving: 

1. Set the parking brake firmly. 

2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P). 

3. Turn off the engine. 

To be even more certain the vehicle won’t 

move, you can put blocks at the front and rear 

of the tire farthest away from the one being 

changed. That would be the tire on the other 

side of the vehicle, at the opposite end. 

The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and 

change a tire. 

5-62

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 

The equipment you’ll need 

is located in the storage 

compartment at the rear of 

the vehicle, on the 

passenger’s side. 

1. Remove the side convenience net. 

2. Open the jack storage compartment by lifting up the 

tab and pulling the cover off. 

A. Jack 

B. Wing Bolt 

C. Jacking Instructions 

D. Folding Wrench 

3. Remove the jack and jacking tools by turning the 

wing bolt counterclockwise. Slightly lift up the jack 

from the bracket tab and then take it out of the 

storage compartment. 

4. Separate the jack and remove the folding wrench 

from the jack. 

5-63

The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A), folding 

wrench (B), extension tube (C), wing nut (D), and 

J-Hook (E). 

Removing the Spare Tire (Vehicles without 

the Sliding Rear Convenience Tray) 

The compact spare tire is located under the vehicle, 

ahead of the rear bumper. Use the spare tire hoist 

to raise, lower and store the compact spare. See 

Compact Spare Tire on page 5-82 for more information 

about the compact spare. 

A. Hoist Shaft 

B. Folding Wrench 

C. Hoist Assembly 

D. Retainer 

E. Spring 

F. Compact 

Spare Tire 

1. Flip the rear cargo area carpet cut out, to expose 

the hoist shaft. 

2. Attach the folding wrench into the hoist shaft. 

3. Turn the folding wrench counterclockwise to lower 

the compact spare tire to the ground. Continue 

turning the wrench until the spare tire can be pulled 

out from under the vehicle. 

5-64

4. To remove the spare tire from the cable, tilt the 

retainer and slip it through the wheel opening. 

5. After removing the spare tire, turn the wrench 

clockwise to raise the cable back up. 

Do not store a full-size or a flat road tire under the 

vehicle. See “Storing a Flat (Vehicles without 

the Sliding Rear Convenience Tray)” and “Storing a 

Flat (Vehicles with the Sliding Rear Convenience 

Tray)” later in this section. 

To continue changing the flat tire see “Removing the 

Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire” later in this 

section. 

If the spare tire will not lower, the secondary latch 

may be engaged causing the tire not to lower. Do the 

following to check the cable: 

1. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable is 

visible. 

2. If it’s not visible, see “Secondary Latch System” 

later in this section. 

If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning 

the folding wrench clockwise until you hear two 

clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot over-tighten 

the cable. 

5-65

3. Then loosen the cable by turning the wrench 

counterclockwise three or four turns. 

4. If the spare tire has not lowered, tighten the cable 

all the way and then loosen it at least two times. 

If the spare tire did lower to the ground, continue 

with Step 4 under “Removing the Spare Tire 

(Vehicles without the Sliding Rear Convenience 

Tray)” earlier in this section. 

5. If you still cannot lower the spare tire to the ground, 

see “Secondary Latch System” later in this section. 

Removing the Spare Tire (Vehicles with 

the Sliding Rear Convenience Tray) 

The compact spare tire is located under the vehicle, 

ahead of the rear bumper. Use the spare tire hoist 

to raise, lower and store the compact spare. See 

Compact Spare Tire on page 5-82 for more information 

about the compact spare. 

A. Sliding Rear 


B. Storage 

Compartment 

Cap Hole 

C. Folding Wrench 

D. Extension Tube 

E. Retainer 

F. Compact 

Spare Tire 

G. Spring 

H. Hoist Shaft 

Assembly 

I. Hoist Shaft 

5-66

1. Push the release lever located in front of the handle 

of the sliding rear tray to release the pin from the 

floor track assembly. 

2. Pull the sliding rear tray toward you without lifting 

it up. 

3. You will hear a click when the sliding rear tray is 

locked into the extended position. This is where 

the sliding rear tray needs to be in order to be able 

to remove the compact spare tire. 

4. Open the driver’s side storage compartment door of 

the sliding rear tray. 

5. Remove the cap on the bottom of the storage 

compartment and flip the carpet cut out, to 

expose the hoist shaft. 

6. Remove the extension tube that is attached at the 

front of the storage compartment. 

7. Insert one end of the extension tube to the hoist 

shaft and attach the folding wrench to the other 

end of the extension tube. 

8. Turn the folding wrench counterclockwise to lower 

the spare tire to the ground. Continue turning the 

wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out 

from under the vehicle. 

9. To remove the compact spare tire from the cable, 

tilt the retainer and slip it through the wheel 

opening. 

10. After removing the spare tire, turn the wrench 

clockwise to raise the cable back up. 

Do not store a full-size or a flat road tire under the 

vehicle. See “Storing a Flat (Vehicles without 

the Sliding Rear Convenience Tray)” and “Storing a 

Flat (Vehicles with the Sliding Rear Convenience 

Tray)” later in this section. 

To continue changing the flat tire see “Removing the 

Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire” later in this 

section. 

5-67

If the spare tire will not lower, the secondary latch may 

be engaged causing the tire not to lower. Do the 

following to check the cable: 

1. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable is 

visible. 

2. If it’s not visible, see “Secondary Latch System” 

following. 

If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning 

the folding wrench clockwise until you hear two 

clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot over-tighten 

the cable. 

3. Then loosen the cable by turning the wrench 

counterclockwise three or four turns. 

4. If the spare tire has not lowered, tighten the cable 

all the way and then loosen it at least two times. 

If the spare tire did lower to the ground, continue 

with Step 9 under “Removing the Spare Tire 

(Vehicles without the Sliding Rear Convenience 

Tray)” earlier in this section. 

5. If you still cannot lower the spare tire to the ground, 

see “Secondary Latch System” following. 

5-68

Secondary Latch System 

Your vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist 

assembly equipped with a secondary latch system. 

It’s designed to stop the compact spare tire from 

suddenly falling off your vehicle if the cable holding the 

spare tire is damaged. For the secondary latch to 

work, the tire must be stowed with the valve stem 

pointing down. See “Storing the Spare Tire and Tools” 

later in this section for instructions on storing the 

compact spare tire correctly. 

{CAUTION: 

Before beginning this procedure read all the 

instructions. Failure to read and follow the 

instructions could damage the hoist assembly 

and you and others could get hurt. Read and 

follow the instructions listed below. 

Front-Wheel Drive 

To release the spare tire from the secondary latch, 


{CAUTION: 

Someone standing too close during the 

procedure could be injured by the jack. If the 

spare tire does not slide off the jack completely, 

make sure no one is behind you or on either 

side of you as you pull the jack out from the 

spare. 

5-69

If the cable is not visible, start this procedure at Step 2. 

1. Turn the wrench counterclockwise until 

approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed. 

2. Attach the folding wrench to the jack and raise the 

jack at least 10 turns. 

3. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of the rear 

bumper. Position the center lift point of the jack 

under the center of the spare tire. 

4. Turn the folding wrench clockwise to raise the jack 

until it lifts the secondary latch spring. 

5. Keep raising the jack until the spare tire stops 

moving upward and is held firmly in place, this 

lets you know that the secondary latch has released 

and the spare tire is balancing on the jack. 

5-70

6. Lower the jack by turning the folding wrench 

counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until 

the spare tire slides off the jack. 

7. Disconnect the wrench from the jack and carefully 

remove the jack. Use one hand to push against the 

spare while firmly pulling the jack out from under 

the spare tire with the other hand. 

8. When the spare tire has been completely lowered, 


opening. 

9. If the cable is hanging, turn the wrench clockwise to 

raise the cable back up. 

Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can. 

You will not be able to store a spare tire using the 

hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced. 

5-71


To release the spare tire from the secondary latch, 


{CAUTION: 

Someone standing too close during the 

procedure could be injured by the jack. If the 

spare tire does not slide off the jack completely, 

make sure no one is behind you or on either 

side of you as you pull the jack out from the 

spare. 

If the cable is not visible, start this procedure at Step 2. 

1. Turn the wrench counterclockwise until 

approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed. 

2. Attach the folding wrench to the jack and raise the 

jack at least 10 turns. 

3. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of the rear 

bumper. Position the center lift point of the jack 

under the center of the spare tire. 

5-72

4. Turn the folding wrench clockwise to raise the jack 

until it lifts the secondary latch spring. 

5. Keep raising the jack until the spare tire stops 

moving upward and is held firmly in place, this 

lets you know that the secondary latch has 

released. 

6. Lower the jack by turning the folding wrench 

counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until 

the spare tire is resting on the folding wrench. 

5-73

Removing the Flat Tire and Installing 

the Spare Tire 

1. If there is a wheel cover, loosen the plastic nut 

caps with the wheel wrench. They won’t come 

off. Then, using the flat end of the wheel wrench, 

pry along the edge of the cover until it comes off. 

Be careful; the edges may be sharp. Don’t try 

to remove the cover with your bare hands. 

If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, remove the 

wheel nut caps using the wheel wrench. 

7. Grasp the spare tire with both hands and pull it out 

from under the vehicle. 

8. Reach under the vehicle and remove the folding 

wrench and jack. 

9. When the spare tire has been completely lowered, 


opening. 

10. If the cable is hanging, turn the wrench clockwise to 

raise the cable back up. 

Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can. 

You will not be able to store a spare tire using the 

hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced. 

2. Loosen the wheel 

nuts — but do not 

remove them — using 

the folding wrench. 

(Turn the handle about 

180 degrees, then 

flip the handle back to 

the starting position. 

This avoids taking 

the wrench off the lug 

nut for each turn.) 

For wheels with a wheel lock key, use the wheel lock 

key between the lock nut and folding wrench. The 

key is supplied in the front passenger door pocket. 

5-74

Notice: To help avoid damage to lock nut or 

wheel lock key, do not use an impact wrench with 

this key. 

3. Near each wheel, 

there is a notch in 

the vehicle’s body. 

Position the jack and 

raise the jack head until 

it fits firmly into the 

notch in the vehicle’s 

frame nearest the 

flat tire. 

Notice: Do not place the jack under the rear axle 

control arms or you may damage your vehicle. 

Only use the areas shown for proper jack location. 

Do not raise the vehicle yet. Put the compact spare 

tire near you. 

{CAUTION: 

Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is 

dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you 

could be badly injured or killed. Never get 

under a vehicle when it is supported only 

by a jack. 

{CAUTION: 

Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly 

positioned can damage the vehicle and even 

make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal 

injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the 

jack lift head into the proper location before 

raising the vehicle. 

5-75

4. Attach the folding 

wrench to the jack, 

and turn the wrench 

clockwise to raise 

the jack head 

3 inches (7.6 cm). 

5. Raise the vehicle by turning the folding wrench 

clockwise in the jack. Raise the vehicle far 

enough off the ground so there is enough room for 

the spare tire to fit under the wheel well. 

6. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire. 

7. Remove any rust or dirt 

from the wheel bolts, 

mounting surfaces 

and spare wheel. 

{CAUTION: 

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to 

which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts 

become loose after a time. The wheel could 

come off and cause an accident. When you 

change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from 

the places where the wheel attaches to the 

vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth 

or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use 

a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to 

get all the rust or dirt off. 

{CAUTION: 

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you 

do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel 

could fall off, causing a serious accident. 

8. Install the spare tire and put the wheel nuts back on 

with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel. 

Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held 

against the hub. 

5-76

{CAUTION: 

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened 

wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become 

loose and even come off. This could lead to an 

accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel 

nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to 

get new GM original equipment wheel nuts. 

Stop somewhere as soon as you can and 

have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench 

to 100 lb-ft (140 Y). 

9. Lower the vehicle by attaching the folding wheel 

wrench to the jack and turning the wrench 

counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely. 

10. Tighten the wheel nuts 

firmly in a crisscross 

sequence, as shown. 

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead 

to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid 

expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel 

nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper 

torque specification. 

11. Don’t try to put a wheel cover on the compact spare 

tire. It won’t fit. Store the wheel cover securely in 

the rear of the vehicle until you have the flat 

tire repaired or replaced. 

Notice: Wheel covers won’t fit on your compact 

spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on your 

compact spare, you could damage the cover or the 

spare. 

5-77

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools 

CAUTION: 

(Continued) 

{CAUTION: 

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in 

the passenger compartment of the vehicle 

could cause injury. In a sudden stop or 

collision, loose equipment could strike 

someone. Store all these in the proper place. 

{CAUTION: 

The underbody-mounted spare tire needs to 

be stored with the valve stem pointing down. 

If the spare tire is stored with the valve stem 

pointing upwards, its secondary latch won’t 

work properly and the spare tire could loosen 


and suddenly fall from your vehicle. If this 

happened when your vehicle was being 

driven, the tire might contact a person or 

another vehicle, causing injury and, of course, 

damage to itself as well. Be sure the 

underbody-mounted spare tire is stored with 

its valve stem pointing down. 

Storing the Spare Tire and Tools 

1. Lay the compact spare tire on the ground at the 

rear of the vehicle. Position the compact spare 

tire so the valve stem is pointed down facing the 

rear of the vehicle. 

2. Lower the cable to the ground. See “Removing the 

Spare Tire without the Sliding Rear Convenience 

Tray” or “Removing the Spare Tire with the Sliding 

Rear Convenience Tray” earlier in this section. 

3. Tilt the retainer downward and slip it through the 

center hole of the spare tire. 

Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the 

underside of the wheel. 

5-78

4. Attach the folding wrench to the hoist shaft. 

Use the extension tube if you have the sliding 

rear convenience tray. 

5. Turn the folding wrench clockwise to lift the 

spare tire. 

For all-wheel-drive vehicles, when the tire reaches 

the stabilizer bar, move the tire over the bar, 

then continue to turn the folding wrench clockwise 

to lift the spare tire. 

6. When the tire is almost in the stored position, turn 

the tire so the valve stem is towards the rear of the 

vehicle. 

This will help when you check and maintain tire 

pressure in the spare. 

7. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the 

vehicle. Continue turning the folding wrench until 

you feel more than two clicks. This indicates that the 

compact spare tire is secure and the cable is 

tight. The spare tire hoist cannot be overtightened. 

A. Push and Pull 

B. Rotate Tire 

8. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull, 

and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If the tire 

moves, use the folding wrench to tighten the cable. 

5-79

Put back all tools as they were stored in the jack 

storage compartment and put the compartment cover 

back on. 

To put the cover back on, slip the tabs on the bottom of 

the cover into the bottom of the cover opening. Push 

the cover in place and push down the tab on the top of 

the cover so that it rests in the groove. This secures 

the cover in place. 

When you replace the compact spare with a full-size 

tire, reinstall the bolt-on wheel covers or the center cap, 

which ever your vehicle has. Tighten them “hand 

tight” over the wheel nuts, using the folding wrench. 

Storing the Flat Tire without the Sliding 

Rear Convenience Tray 

A. D-ring 

B. Wing Nut 

C. J-hook 

D. Valve Stem 

E. Full-size Tire 

1. Flip up the D-ring located in the rear cargo area. 

2. Lay the tire in the rear cargo area of the vehicle with 

the valve stem up with the center hole of the tire 

over the D-ring. 

For vehicles with aluminum wheels, remove the 

center cap by tapping the back of the cap with the 

folding wrench. 

5-80

3. Remove the J-hook and the wing nut from the back 

of the jack access door. Assemble the wing nut and 

the J-hook. 

4. Install the wing nut and the J-hook to the D-ring 

through the center hole of the tire. 

5. Tighten the wing nut to secure the tire to the floor. 

Push and pull on the tire to make sure the tire is 

secure and does not move. 

6. Put back all tools as they were stored in the jack 

storage compartment. Attach the wrench back to 

the jack. Put the jack base on the bracket tab 

and sit the jack properly between the two “ears” of 

the bracket. Use the bolt to tighten the jack. 

7. Put the compartment cover back on, slip the tabs 

on the bottom of the cover into the bottom of the 

cover opening. Push the cover in place and 

push down the tab on the top of the cover so that it 

rests in the groove. This secures the cover in 

place. 

Storing the Flat Tire with the Sliding 

Rear Convenience Tray 

A. D-ring 

B. Sliding Rear 


C. Wing Nut 

D. J-hook 

E. Full-size Tire 

F. Storage 

Compartment 

Cap Hole 

1. Push the sliding rear tray forward to the stored 

position. 

2. Open the driver’s side storage compartment door 

of the sliding rear tray. 

5-81

3. Remove the rear cap on the bottom of the storage 

compartment and flip the D-ring up. 

4. Lay the tire on top of the driver’s side storage 

compartment with the valve stem down. Make 

sure you can see the D-ring through the center hole 

of the tire. 

5. Remove the J-hook and the wing nut from the back 

of the jack access door. Assemble the wing nut and 

the J-hook. 

6. Install the wing nut and the J-hook to the D-ring 

through the center hole of the tire. 

7. Tighten the wing nut to secure the tire to the floor. 

Push and pull on the tire to make sure the tire is 

secure and does not move. 

8. Put back all tools as they were stored in the 

storage compartment. Attach the wrench back to the 

jack. Put the jack base on the bracket tab and sit 

the jack properly between the two “ears” of the 

bracket. Use the bolt to tighten the jack. 

9. Put the compartment cover back on, slip the tabs on 

the bottom of the cover into the bottom of the cover 

opening. Push the cover in place and push down the 

tab on the top of the cover so that it rests in the 

groove. This secures the cover in place. 

Compact Spare Tire 

Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when 

your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time. 

Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be 

60 psi (420 kPa). 

After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you 

should stop as soon as possible and make sure your 

spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is 

made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) 

for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can 

finish your trip and have your full-size tire repaired or 

replaced where you want. Of course, it’s best to replace 

your spare with a full-size tire as soon as you can. Your 

spare will last longer and be in good shape in case you 

need it again. 

Notice: When the compact spare is installed, don’t 

take your vehicle through an automatic car wash 

with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught 

on the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel, 

and maybe other parts of your vehicle. 

Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles. 

And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with 

other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare tire 

and its wheel together. 

Notice: Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare. 

Using them can damage your vehicle and can 

damage the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on 

your compact spare. 

5-82


After installing a compact spare tire on a vehicle with 

all-wheel drive you will need to drive with light to 

moderate acceleration, for 10 seconds, in a straight line. 

This action will allow the vehicle to detect the compact 

spare tire and disable the all-wheel drive system. 

The AWD DISABLE message will come on indicating 

that the all-wheel drive system is off. You may detect a 

slight pull during this time, but this is normal. 

Notice: You may damage your vehicle’s all-wheel 

drive system if your vehicle is driven for an 

extended period with a compact spare tire installed 

and the all-wheel drive system in operation. See 

“All-Wheel Drive System” and “AWD Disable 

Warning Message” in the Index for more 

information. 

Appearance Care 

Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some 

are toxic. Others can burst into flames if you strike a 

match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are 

dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed 

space. When you use anything from a container to clean 

your vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s 

warnings and instructions. And always open your doors 

or windows when you’re cleaning the inside. 

Never use these to clean your vehicle: 

• Gasoline 

• Benzene 

• Naphtha 

• Carbon Tetrachloride 

• Acetone 

• Paint Thinner 

• Turpentine 

• Lacquer Thinner 

• Nail Polish Remover 

They can all be hazardous – some more than 

others – and they can all damage your vehicle, too. 

Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can. 

In many uses, these will damage your vehicle: 

• Alcohol 

• Laundry Soap 

• Bleach 

• Reducing Agents 

5-83

Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle 

Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and 

loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted 

surfaces with a clean, damp cloth. 

Cleaning Fabric/Carpet 

Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric and 

carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains very well. 

You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your 

dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on 

page 5-89. 

Here are some cleaning tips: 

• Always read the instructions on the cleaner label. 

• Clean up stains as soon as you can – before 

they set. 

• Carefully scrape off any excess stain. 

• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean 

area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are 

stubborn. 

• If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean 

the entire area immediately or it will set. 

Using Cleaner on Fabric 

1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any 

loose dirt. 

2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. 

Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines. 

3. Follow the directions on the container label. 

4. Apply cleaner with a clean sponge. Don’t saturate 

the material and don’t rub it roughly. 

5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a 

sponge to remove any excess cleaner. 

6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water-dampened 

towel or cloth. 

7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry. 

Special Fabric Cleaning Problems 

Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black), 

egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine 

and blood can be removed as follows: 

1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the 

soiled area with cool water. 

2. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions 

described earlier. 

3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, 

treat the area with a water/baking soda solution: 

1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) 

of lukewarm water. 

4. Let dry. 

5-84

Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili 

sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows: 

1. Carefully scrape off excess stain. 

2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely. 

3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions 

described earlier. 

Cleaning Vinyl 

Use warm water and a clean cloth. 

• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You 

may have to do this more than once. 

• Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if 

you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth 

and vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product. 

Cleaning Leather 

Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or 

saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let 

the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry. 

• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. 

• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive 

cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather. 

• Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned 

immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish, 

it can harm the leather. 

Cleaning the Top of the Instrument 

Panel 

Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces 

of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones 

or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the 

windshield and even make it difficult to see through the 

windshield under certain conditions. 

Cleaning Interior Plastic Components 

Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth 

or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the 

surface finish. 

Cleaning Glass Surfaces 

Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a 

liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal 

tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See 

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-89. 

Notice: Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, 

because they may cause scratches. Avoid placing 

decals on the inside rear window, since they 

may have to be scraped off later. If abrasive cleaners 

are used on the inside of the rear window, an 

electric defogger element may be damaged. Any 

temporary license should not be attached across the 

defogger grid. 

5-85

Care of Safety Belts 

Keep belts clean and dry. 

{CAUTION: 

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, 

it may severely weaken them. In a crash, 

they might not be able to provide adequate 

protection. Clean safety belts only with mild 

soap and lukewarm water. 

Weatherstrips 

Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last 

longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply 

silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six 

months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent 

application may be required. See Part D: Recommended 


Cleaning the Outside of Your 

Vehicle 

The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth 

of color, gloss retention and durability. 

Washing Your Vehicle 

The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it 

clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water. 

Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun. 

Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps 

or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle 

well, removing all soap residue completely. You can get 

GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. 

See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-89. 

Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, 

or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents 

should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the 

surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, 

clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface 

scratches and water spotting. 

High pressure car washes may cause water to enter 

your vehicle. 

5-86

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses 

Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car 

washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. 

Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.” 

Finish Care 

Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by 

hand may be necessary to remove residue from the 

paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products 

from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance 

Materials on page 5-89. 

If your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. 

The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored 

basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are 

non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint 

finish. 

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive 

polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may 

dull the finish or leave swirl marks. 

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other 

salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird 

droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., 

can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain 

on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as 

possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that 

are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove 

foreign matter. 

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather 

and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a 

period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish 

looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered 

whenever possible. 

Cleaning Windshield and Wiper Blades 

If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield 

washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, 

wax, sap or other material may be on the blade 

or windshield. 

Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength 

glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads do 

not form when you rinse it with water. 

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades 

and affect their performance. Clean the blade by 

wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength 

windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade 

with water. 

Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary; 

replace blades that look worn. 

5-87

Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome-Plated 

Wheels 

Your vehicle may be equipped with either aluminum or 

chrome-plated wheels. 

Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with 

mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After 

rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax 

may then be applied. 

The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted 

surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps, 

chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, 

cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on 

them because you could damage the surface. Do not 

use chrome polish on aluminum wheels. 

Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but 

avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off 

immediately after application. 

Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash 

that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These 

brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels. 

Cleaning Tires 

To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner. 

Notice: When applying a tire dressing, always take 

care to wipe off any overspray or splash from all 

painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the 

vehicle. Petroleum-based products may damage the 

paint finish and tires. 

Sheet Metal Damage 

If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal 

repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop 

applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or 

replaced to restore corrosion protection. 

Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the 

corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty. 

Finish Damage 

Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish 

should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode 

quickly and may develop into major repair expense. 

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up 

materials avaliable from your dealer. Larger areas of 

finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s 

body and paint shop. 

5-88

Underbody Maintenance 

Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust 

control can collect on the underbody. If these are not 

removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on 

the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan 

and exhaust system even though they have corrosion 

protection. 

At least every spring, flush these materials from the 

underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud 

and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of 

the frame should be loosened before being flushed. 

Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can 

do this for you. 

Chemical Paint Spotting 

Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a 

chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and 

attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage 

can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, 

and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint 

surface. 

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will 

repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of 

new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 

12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase, 

whichever occurs first. 

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials 

See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing 

the following products. 


Description 

Usage 

Polishing Cloth 

Wax-Treated 

Tar and Road Oil 

Remover 

Chrome Cleaner and 

Polish 

White Sidewall Tire 

Cleaner 

Vinyl Cleaner 

Glass Cleaner 

Chrome and Wire Wheel 

Cleaner 

Finish Enhancer 

Interior and exterior 

polishing cloth. 

Removes tar, road oil and 

asphalt. 

Use on chrome or 

stainless steel. 

Removes soil and black 

marks from whitewalls. 

Cleans vinyl tops, 

upholstery and 

convertible tops. 

Removes dirt, grime, 

smoke and fingerprints. 

Removes dirt and grime 

from chrome wheels and 

wire wheel covers. 

Removes dust, 

fingerprints, and surface 

contaminants, Spray on 

wipe off. 

5-89


(cont’d) 

Description 

Usage 

Removes swirl marks, 

fine scratches and other 

Swirl Remover Polish 

light surface 

contamination. 

Removes light scratches 

Cleaner Wax 

and protects finish. 

Foaming Tire Shine 

Low Gloss 

Wash Wax Concentrate 

Spot Lifter 

Odor Eliminator 

Cleans, shines and 

protects in one easy step, 

no wiping necessary. 

Medium foaming 

shampoo. Cleans and 

lightly waxes. 

Biodegradable and 

phosphate free. 

Quickly and easily 

removes spots and stains 

from carpets, vinyl and 

cloth upholstery. 

Odorless spray odor 

eliminator used on 

fabrics, vinyl, leather and 

carpet. 

See your General Motors parts department for these 

products. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and 

Lubricants on page 6-15. 

Vehicle Identification 

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on 

a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on 

the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the 

windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also 

appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts 

labels and the certificates of title and registration. 

Engine Identification 

The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This 

code will help you identify your engine, specifications 

and replacement parts. 

5-90

Service Parts Identification Label 

You’ll find this label on the inside of the access panel 

located on the driver’s side of the rear of the vehicle. 

It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts. 

On this label is: 

• your VIN, 

• the model designation, 

• paint information and 

• a list of all production options and special 

equipment. 

Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle. 

Electrical System 

Add-On Electrical Equipment 

Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle 

unless you check with your dealer first. Some 

electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and 

the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. 

Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other 

components from working as they should. 

Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting 

to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see 

Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-68. 

Headlamp Wiring 

The headlamp wiring is protected by different fuses 

located in the underhood fuse block. An electrical 

overload may cause the lamps to go off and remain that 

way. If this happens, replace the right fuse with one 

of the same kind and amperage. 

Windshield Wiper Fuses 

The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal 

circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to 

heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor 

cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical 

problem, be sure to get it fixed. 

Power Windows and Other Power 

Options 

Circuit breakers in the floor console fuse block protect 

the power windows and other power accessories. 

When the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker 

opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the 

problem is fixed. 

5-91

Fuses and Circuit Breakers 

The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from 

short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers 

and fusible thermal links. 

Look at the silver-colored L-Band inside the fuse. 

If the L-Band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. 

Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the 

identical size and rating. 

If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t 

have a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the 

same amperage or use one of the spare fuses in 

the underhood fuse and relay center. Just pick 

some feature of your vehicle that you can get along 

without — like the radio or cigarette lighter — and use 

its fuse, if it is the right amperage. Replace it as soon 

as you can. 

There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: the floor 

console fuse block and the underhood fuse block. 

Floor Console Fuse Block 

The floor console fuse 

block is located to the 

right of the shift lever. 

The fuses marked spare are available if a replacement 

fuse is needed. 

Pull the door open to access the fuse block. 

5-92

Fuse 

Usage 

1 Fuse Puller 

2 Steering Wheel Radio Controls 

3 Power Door Locks 

4 Spare 

5 Spare 

6 Spare 

7 Spare 

8 Spare 

9 Spare 

Turn Signal and Hazard Lamp 

10 

Flashers 

Fuse 

Usage 

11 Power Seats 

12 

Electronic Level Control (ELC) 

Compressor 

13 Liftgate and Endgate 

14 Rear Auxiliary Power Outlet 

Electronic Level Control (ELC) 

15 Compressor Relay and Height 

Sensor 

16 Heated Mirrors 

17 Power Mirrors 

18 Ignition 1 Module 

19 

Turn Signal Switch and NSBU 

Switch 

21 Rear Defogger 

22 Air Bag Module 

24 

Canister Vent Solenoid and 

TCC Switch 

25 HVAC Blower Motor 

26 

HVAC Mode and Temperature 

Motors and Head-Up Display 

28 Not Used 

29 Windshield Wipers and Washer 

Instrument Panel Cluster, BCM, 

30 

PASS-Key ® III 

31 Park Lock Ignition Key Solenoid 

5-93

Fuse 

Usage 

32 Not Used 

34 Power Sunroof 

35 Power Windows 

36 

Map Lamps, Courtesy Lamps and 

Instrument Panel Lights 

37 Radio 

38 UQ3 Radio Amplifier 

39 Head-Up Display 

40 Hazard Flashers 

Instrument Panel Cluster, HVAC 

41 Control, Security LED and Remote 

Keyless Entry Module 

42 PASS-Key ® III 

43 Accessory Diode 

44 Body Control Module (BCM) 

Relay 

Usage 

20 Rear Defogger Relay 

23 IGN3 Relay 

27 Accessory Relay 

33 Retained Accessory Power Relay 

45 Back-Up Lamps 

Underhood Fuse Block 

This fuse block is located in the engine compartment, 

on top of the windshield washer fluid reservoir. 



The fuses marked spare are available if a replacement 

fuse is needed. 

To remove the cover, press the two tabs in and lift up 

the cover. 

5-94

Fuse 

Usage 

1 Fuel Pump 

2 Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch 

3 Horn 

4 

Engine Controls – Emissions and 

Sensors 

5 

Power Control 

Module (PCM) – Battery Power 

6 

Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS) Control 

Module 

Fuse 

Usage 

7 Transaxle Solenoids 

8 Spare 

9 ABS Solenoid Valves 

10 

Oxygen Sensors – Emissions 

Control 

11 Injectors 

12 Spare 

13 Engine Controls 

14 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) 

15 

Passenger’s Low-Beam 

Headlamp 

16 Spare 

17 Driver’s Low-Beam Headlamp 

18 Driver’s High-Beam Headlamp 

19 Ignition Switch Battery Power 

20 Parking Lamps – Front and Rear 

21 Air Pump – Emissions Controls 

22 Spare 

23 Passenger’s High-Beam Headlamp 

24 Spare 

25 DVD 

26 Front Fog Lamps 

5-95

Fuse 

Usage 

27 

Ignition Relay, Neutral Start Switch, 

Powertrain Control Module (PCM) 

28 

Body Control Module – Battery 

Power 

29 Remote Digital Radio Receiver 

30 All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Module 

31 Cruise Control 

32 

Front Power Outlets/Lights, 

OnStar ® 

33 

Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock 

Control System 

34 Spare 

35 Starter Solenoid Battery Fuse 

36 ABS Motor 

37 Spare 

38 Spare 

39 Engine Cooling Fan 

40 Engine Cooling Fan 

Main Battery Fuse for Retained 

41 Accessory Power Relay and 

Accessory Relay 

42 

Main Battery Fuse for 

Heated Seats, Air 

Fuse 

Usage 

43 Spare 

44 Spare 

Main Battery Fuse for Power 

45 Outlets, Level Control, Power Seats 

and Mirrors and Body computer 

46 Spare 

47 

Main Battery Fuse for HVAC Blower 

and Ignition 3 Relay 

Main Battery Fuse for Ignition 

Switch, Radio, Heads-Up Display, 

48 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), 

Instrument Cluster, Air Conditioning 

and Body Computer 

64 Spare 

65 Spare 

66 Spare 

67 Spare 

68 Spare 

69 Spare 

70 Fuse Puller 

§ 

Diode for Air Conditioning 

Compressor Clutch 

5-96

Circuit Breaker 

49 Spare 

Usage 

Relay 

Usage 

50 Horn 

51 Fuel Pump 

52 Air Conditioning Clutch 

53 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) 

54 Low-Beam Headlamps 

55 Parking Lamps 

Relay 

Usage 

56 High-Beam Headlamps 

57 Fog Lamps 

58 Starter Relay 

59 Cooling Fan 

60 Ignition 1 Relay 



63 Air Pump 

5-97

Capacities and Specifications 

The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. 

Please refer to Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-15 for more information. 

Capacities 

Application 

English 

Metric 

Air Conditioning Refrigerant (R134a) 1.7 lbs. 0.8 kg 

Automatic Transaxle 

Pan Removal and Replacement 

Complete Overhaul 

7.4 quarts 

10.0 quarts 

7.0 L 

9.5 L 

AWD Automatic Transaxle 

Pan Removal and Replacement 

Complete Overhaul 

8.7 quarts 

10.8 quarts 

8.3 L 

10.3 L 

Cooling System with A/C 9.6 quarts 9.1 L 

Engine Oil with Filter 4.5 quarts 4.3 L 

Fuel Capacity 18.0 gallons 68.1 L 

Rear Differential Fluid Capacity 2.1 quarts 1.9 L 

Transfer Case Fluid Capacity 0.6 pints 290 ml 

Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 Y 

5-98

Engine Specifications 

Engine VIN Code Transaxle Spark Plug Gap 

V6 E Automatic 0.060 inches (1.52 mm) 

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts 

Part 

Number 

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 1208C* 

Engine Oil Filter PF 47* 

Spark Plugs 41–101* 

Windshield Wiper Blades 

Driver’s Side Length 

Passenger’s Side Length 

Type 

*ACDelco ® part number. 

24.0 inches (60.0 cm) 

22.0 inches (55.0 cm) 

Shepherd’s Hook 

5-99

✍ NOTES 

5-100

Section 6 

Maintenance Schedule 

Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2 

Introduction ...................................................6-2 

Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2 

Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2 

How This Section is Organized .........................6-3 

Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services ...........6-4 

Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-4 

Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-5 

Part B: Owner Checks and Services .................6-9 

At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-9 

At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9 

At Least Twice a Year ...................................6-10 

At Least Once a Year ...................................6-10 

Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections ...........6-13 

Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle 

Boot and Seal Inspection ............................6-13 

Exhaust System Inspection ............................6-13 

Fuel System Inspection ..................................6-13 

Engine Cooling System Inspection ...................6-13 

Throttle System Inspection .............................6-14 

All-Wheel Drive Inspection ..............................6-14 

Brake System Inspection ................................6-14 

Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....6-15 

Part E: Maintenance Record ...........................6-16 

6-1

Maintenance Schedule 

Introduction 

Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and 

change as recommended. 

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan 

supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your 

Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer 

for details. 

Your Vehicle and the Environment 

Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your 

vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the 

environment. Improper vehicle maintenance can 

even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper 

fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase 

the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect 

our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good 

condition, be sure to maintain your vehicle properly. 

Maintenance Requirements 

Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and 

recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this 

manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good 

working condition. Any damage caused by failure 

to follow scheduled maintenance may not be covered 

by warranty. 

6-2

How This Section is Organized 

This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts: 

“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” explains 

what to have done and how often. Some of these 

services can be complex, so unless you are technically 

qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should 

let your GM dealer’s service department do these jobs. 

Your GM dealer has GM-trained and supported service 

people that will perform the work using genuine 

GM parts. 

{CAUTION: 

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle 

can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, 

you can be seriously injured. Do your own 

maintenance work only if you have the 

required know-how and the proper tools and 

equipment for the job. If you have any doubt, 

have a qualified technician do the work. 

“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what 

should be checked and when. It also explains what 

you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good 

condition. 

“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains 

important inspections that your dealer’s service 

department can perform for you. 

“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists 

some recommended products necessary to help 

keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products, 

or their equivalents, should be used whether you do 

the work yourself or have it done. 

“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for you to 

record and keep track of the maintenance performed on 

your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts. They 

may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty 

repairs. 

If you want to get the service information, see Service 

Publications Ordering Information on page 7-10. 

6-3

Part A: Scheduled Maintenance 

Services 

This part contains engine oil and chassis lubrication 

scheduled maintenance which explains the engine oil life 

system and how it indicates when to change the 

engine oil and filter. Lubricate chassis components with 

each oil change. Also, listed are scheduled maintenance 

services which are to be performed at the mileage 

intervals specified. 

Using Your Maintenance Schedule 

We at General Motors want to help you to keep 

your vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t 

know exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive 

short distances only a few times a week. Or you may 

drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty 

weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. 

Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many 

other ways. 

Because of all the different ways people use their 

vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more 

frequent checks and replacements. So please read 

the following and note how you drive. If you have any 

questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition, 

see your dealer. 

This part tells you the maintenance services you should 

have done and when to schedule them. 

When you go to your dealer for your service needs, 

you’ll know that GM-trained and supported service 

people will perform the work using GM parts. 

The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in 

Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses 

them. All parts should be replaced and all necessary 

repairs done before you or anyone else drives the 

vehicle. 

This schedule is for vehicles that: 

• carry passengers and cargo within recommended 

limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s 

Certification/Tire label. See Loading Your Vehicle 

on page 4-32. 

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within 

driving limits. 

• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane 

on page 5-4. 

6-4

Scheduled Maintenance 

The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles 

(166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles 

(166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of 

this vehicle. The services shown at 150,000 miles 

(240 000 km) should be repeated at the same interval 

after 150,000 miles (240 000 km) for the life of this 

vehicle. 

See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 

and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on 

page 6-13. 

Footnotes 

† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the 

California Air Resources Board has determined that the 

failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify 

the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to 

the completion of the vehicle ’s useful life. We, however, 

urge that all recommended maintenance services be 

performed at the indicated intervals and the 

maintenance be recorded. 

@ Whenever the tires are rotated, the Check Tire 

Pressure System (if equipped) must be reset. 

+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire 

rotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-14. 

Engine Oil Scheduled Maintenance 

Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the 

GM Oil Life System (or every 12 months, whichever 

occurs first). Reset the system. 

Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know 

when to change the engine oil and filter. This is 

based on engine revolutions and engine temperature, 

and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions, 

the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can 

vary considerably. For the oil life system to work 

properly, you must reset the system every time the oil is 

changed. 

When the system has calculated that oil life has been 

diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is 

necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message will 

come on. Change your oil as soon as possible within 

the next two times you stop for fuel. It is possible that, 

if you are driving under the best conditions, the oil 

life system may not indicate that an oil change is 

necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil and 

filter must be changed at least once a year and at 

this time the system must be reset. Your dealer has 

GM-trained service people who will perform this 

work using genuine GM parts and reset the system. 

It is also important to check your oil regularly and keep 

it at the proper level. 

6-5

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must 

change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your 

last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system 

whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil on 

page 5-11 for information on resetting the system. 

An Emission Control Service. 

See the mileage intervals following for additional services 

that may be performed with an engine oil change. After 

the services are performed, record the date, odometer 

reading and who performed the service on the 

maintenance record pages in Part E of this schedule. 

7,500 Miles (12 500 km) 

❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on 

page 5-53 for proper rotation pattern and additional 

information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.) 

15,000 Miles (25 000 km) 

❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace 

the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty conditions, 

inspect filter at every engine oil change. See 

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-16 for more 

information. An Emission Control Service. 

(See footnote †.) 




22,500 Miles (37 500 km) 




30,000 Miles (50 000 km) 




❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air 

Cleaner/Filter on page 5-16 for more information. 


37,500 Miles (62 500 km) 




45,000 Miles (75 000 km) 










6-6

50,000 Miles (83 000 km) 

❑ Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the 

vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of 

these conditions: 

− In heavy city traffic where the outside 

temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) 

or higher. 

− In hilly or mountainous terrain. 

− When doing frequent trailer towing. 

− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery 

service. 

If you do not use your vehicle under any of these 

conditions, change the fluid and filter at 

100,000 miles (166 000 km). 

52,500 Miles (87 500 km) 




60,000 Miles (100 000 km) 







67,500 Miles (112 500 km) 




75,000 Miles (125 000 km) 










82,500 Miles (137 500 km) 



information.(See footnote @.) (See footnote +.) 

90,000 Miles (150 000 km) 







6-7

97,500 Miles (162 500 km) 




100,000 Miles (166 000 km) 

❑ Inspect spark plug wires. An Emission Control 

Service. 

❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service. 

❑ Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the 

vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of 

these conditions: 

− In heavy city traffic where the outside 

temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) 

or higher. 

− In hilly or mountainous terrain. 

− When doing frequent trailer towing. 

− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery 

service. 

❑ If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service 

conditions listed previously and, therefore, haven’t 

changed your automatic transaxle fluid, change both 

the fluid and filter. 

150,000 Miles (240 000 km) 

❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 

60 months since last service, whichever occurs first). 

See Engine Coolant on page 5-20 for what to use. 

Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure 

cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling system 

and pressure cap. An Emission Control Service. 

❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission 

Control Service. 

6-8

Part B: Owner Checks and Services 

Listed in this part are owner checks and services 

which should be performed at the intervals specified to 

help ensure the safety, dependability and emission 

control performance of your vehicle. 

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. 

Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your 

vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown 

in Part D. 

At Each Fuel Fill 

It is important for you or a service station attendant to 

perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill. 

Engine Oil Level Check 

Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if 

necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-11 for further 

details. 

Engine Coolant Level Check 

Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL ® 

coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant 

on page 5-20 for further details. 

Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check 

Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield 

washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary. 

See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-34 for further 

details. 

At Least Once a Month 

Tire Inflation Check 

Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures. 

Don’t forget to check your spare tire. See Tires on 

page 5-50 for further details. 

Cassette Tape Player Service 

Clean cassette tape player. Cleaning should be done 

every 50 hours of tape play. See Audio System(s) 

on page 3-59 for further details. 

6-9

At Least Twice a Year 

Restraint System Check 

Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your 

belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages 

are working properly. Look for any other loose or 

damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything 

that might keep a safety belt system from doing its 

job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts 

replaced. 

Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings, 

and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag 

system does not need regular maintenance.) 

Wiper Blade Check 

Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace 

blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that 

streak or miss areas of the windshield. Also see 

Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-86. 

Spare Tire Check 

At least twice a year, after the monthly inflation check of 

the spare tire determines that the spare is inflated to 

the correct tire inflation pressure, make sure that 

the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and then try 

to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves, use the folding 

wrench to tighten the cable. See Changing a Flat Tire 

on page 5-62. 

6-10 

Weatherstrip Lubrication 

Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last 

longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply 

silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold, 

damp weather more frequent application may be 

required. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and 

Lubricants on page 6-15. 

Automatic Transaxle Check 

Check the transaxle fluid level; add if needed. See 

Automatic Transaxle Fluid on page 5-18. A fluid loss 

may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair 

if needed. 

At Least Once a Year 

Key Lock Cylinders Service 

Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant 

specified in Part D. 

Body Lubrication Service 

Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch assemblies, 

secondary latches, pivots, spring anchor and release 

pawl, hood and door hinges, rear folding seats and 

liftgate hinges. Part D tells you what to use. More 

frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to 

a corrosive environment.

Starter Switch Check 

{CAUTION: 

When you are doing this check, the vehicle 

could move suddenly. If it does, you or others 

could be injured. Follow the steps below. 

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room 

around the vehicle. 

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular 

brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-25 if 

necessary. 

Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to 

turn off the engine immediately if it starts. 

3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter 

should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). 

If the starter works in any other position, your 

vehicle needs service. 

Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control 

System Check 

{CAUTION: 

When you are doing this check, the vehicle 

could move suddenly. If it does, you or others 

could be injured. Follow the steps below. 

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room 

around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level 

surface. 

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake 

on page 2-25 if necessary. 

Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if 

the vehicle begins to move. 

3. With the engine off, turn the key to the ON position, 

but don’t start the engine. Without applying the 

regular brake, try to move the shift lever out 

of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever 

moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service. 

6-11

Ignition Transaxle Lock Check 

While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn 

the ignition key to OFF in each shift lever position. 

• The key should turn to OFF only when the shift lever 

is in PARK (P). 

• The key should come out only in OFF. 

Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle 

Park (P) Mechanism Check 

{CAUTION: 

When you are doing this check, your vehicle 

could begin to move. You or others could be 

injured and property could be damaged. Make 

sure there is room in front of your vehicle in 

case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the 

regular brake at once should the vehicle begin 

to move. 

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. 

Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking 

brake. 

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With the 

engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N), 

slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake 

pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking 

brake only. 

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability: 

With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then 

release the parking brake followed by the regular 

brake. 

Underbody Flushing Service 

At least every spring, use plain water to flush any 

corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to 

clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris 

can collect. 

6-12

Part C: Periodic Maintenance 

Inspections 

Listed in this part are inspections and services which 

should be performed at least twice a year (for instance, 

each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s 

service department do these jobs. Make sure any 

necessary repairs are completed at once. 

Proper procedures to perform these services may be 

found in a service manual. See Service Publications 

Ordering Information on page 7-10. 

Steering, Suspension and Front 

Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection 

Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering 

system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of 

wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering 

lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, 

cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive 

axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace 

seals if necessary. 

Exhaust System Inspection 

Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body 

near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged, 

missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams, 

holes, loose connections or other conditions which 

could cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let 

exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust 

on page 2-29. 

Fuel System Inspection 

Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks. 

Engine Cooling System Inspection 

Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they 

are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes, 

fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the 

outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser. 

To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of 

the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended 

at least once a year. 

6-13

Throttle System Inspection 

Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding, 

and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts 

as needed. Replace any components that have high 

effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator 

and cruise control cables. 

All-Wheel Drive Inspection 

Inspect the transfer case (power transfer unit) and 

carrier assembly-differential (rear drive module) every 

12 months or at engine oil change intervals, check rear 

differential and transfer case and add lubricant when 

necessary. A fluid loss could indicate a problem; check 

and have it repaired, if needed. Check vent hoses at 

transfer case and differential for kinks and proper 

installation. 

Brake System Inspection 

Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and 

hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, 

chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors 

for surface condition. For vehicles with rear drum 

brakes, also inspect drum brake linings for wear and 

cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including drums, 

wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc. Check 

parking brake adjustment. You may need to have your 

brakes inspected more often if your driving habits or 

conditions result in frequent braking. 

6-14

Part D: Recommended Fluids and 

Lubricants 

Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part 

number or specification may be obtained from your 

dealer. 

Usage 

Fluid/Lubricant 

Engine oil with the American 

Petroleum Institute Certified for 

Gasoline Engines starburst symbol 

Engine Oil of the proper viscosity. To determine 

the preferred viscosity for your 

vehicle’s engine, see Engine Oil 

on page 5-11. 

50/50 mixture of clean, 

drinkable water and use only 

Engine Coolant 

DEX-COOL ® Coolant. See Engine 

Coolant on page 5-20. 

Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or 

System equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid. 

Windshield GM Optikleen ® Washer Solvent or 

Washer Solvent equivalent. 

Power Steering 

GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part 

System 

No. U.S. 1052884, in Canada 

993294, or equivalent). 

Usage 

Automatic 

Transaxle 

Key Lock 

Cylinders 

Carrier 

Assembly — 

Differential 

(Rear Drive 

Module) and 

Transfer Case 

(Power Transfer 

Unit) 

Hood Latch 

Assembly, 

Secondary 

Latch, Pivots, 

Spring Anchor 

and Release 

Pawl 

Hood and Door 

Hinges, Rear 

Folding Seat 

Weatherstrip 

Conditioning 

Fluid/Lubricant 

DEXRON ® -III Automatic 

Transmission Fluid. 

Mulit-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube 

(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in 

Canada 10953474, or equivalent). 

VERSATRAK Fluid (GM Part No. 

U.S. 12378514, in Canada 

88901045). 

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM 

Part No. U.S. 12346293, in Canada 

992723, or equivalent) or lubricant 

meeting requirements of NLGI #2, 

Category LB or GC-LB. 

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube 

(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in 

Canada 10953474, or equivalent). 

Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part 

No. U.S. 12345579, in Canada 

10953014, or equivalent). 

6-15

Part E: Maintenance Record 

After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service and 

any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” on the following record 

pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts. 

Date 

Odometer 

Reading 

Maintenance Record 

Serviced By 


6-16

Date 

Odometer 

Reading 

Maintenance Record (cont’d) 

Serviced By 


6-17

Date 

Odometer 

Reading 

Maintenance Record (cont’d) 

Serviced By 


6-18

Section 7 

Customer Assistance Information 

Customer Assistance Information ......................7-2 

Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2 

Online Owner Center ......................................7-3 

Customer Assistance for Text 

Telephone (TTY) Users ................................7-4 

Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4 

GM Mobility Program for Persons with 

Disabilities ..................................................7-5 

Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-6 

Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7 

Reporting Safety Defects ..................................7-9 

Reporting Safety Defects to the United States 

Government ...............................................7-9 

Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian 

Government ...............................................7-9 

Reporting Safety Defects to 

General Motors .........................................7-10 

Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-10 

7-1

Customer Assistance 

Information 

Customer Satisfaction Procedure 

Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to 

your dealer and to Pontiac. Normally, any concerns with 

the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle 

will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service 

departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best 

intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can 

occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your 

satisfaction, the following steps should be taken: 

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of 

dealership management. Normally, concerns can 

be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has 

already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts 

manager, contact the owner of the dealership or 

the general manager. 

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership 

management, it appears your concern cannot be 

resolved by the dealership without further help, contact 

the Pontiac Customer Assistance Center by calling 

1-800-762-2737. In Canada, contact GM of Canada 

Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling 

1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). 

We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order 

to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have 

the following information available to give the Customer 

Assistance Representative: 

• Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from 

the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the 

top left of the instrument panel and visible through 

the windshield.) 

• Dealership name and location 

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage 

When contacting Pontiac, please remember that your 

concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That 

is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you 

have a concern. 

STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer 

are committed to making sure you are completely 

satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue 

to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure 

outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the 

GM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional 

rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to 

your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information 

booklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle 

Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). 

7-2

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program 

administered by the Council of Better Business 

Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle 

repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle 

Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to 

resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to 

filing a court action, use of the program is free of 

charge and your case will generally be heard within 

40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in 

your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other 

venue for relief available to you. 

You may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone 

number or write them at the following address: 

BBB Auto Line 

Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc. 

4200 Wilson Boulevard 

Suite 800 

Arlington, VA 22203-1804 

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 

This program is available in all 50 states and the District 

of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, 

mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the 

right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue 

its participation in this program. 

Online Owner Center 

The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership 

needs. You can find your specific vehicle information 

all in one place. 

The Owner Center allows you to: 

• Get e-mail service reminders. 

• Access information about your specific vehicle, 

including tips and videos and an electronic 

version of this owner’s manual. (United States only) 

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and 

maintenance schedule. 

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide. 

• Receive special promotions and privileges only 

available to members. (United States only) 

Refer to the web for updated information. 

To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com. 

(United States) or My GM Canada within 

www.gmcanada.com (Canada). 

7-3

Customer Assistance for Text 

Telephone (TTY) Users 

To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or 

speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs), 

Pontiac has TTY equipment available at its Customer 

Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with 

Pontiac by dialing: 1-800-833-PONT (7668). (TTY 

users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.) 

Customer Assistance Offices 

Pontiac encourages customers to call the toll-free 

number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to 

write to Pontiac, the letter should be addressed to 

Pontiac’s Customer Assistance Center. 

United States – Customer Assistance 


P.O. Box 33172 

Detroit, MI 48232-5172 

1-800-762-2737 or 

1-800-833-7668 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)) 

Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743) 

Fax Number: 313-381-0022 

From Puerto Rico: 

1-800-496-9992 (English) 

1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) 

Fax Number: 313-381-0022 

From U.S. Virgin Islands: 

1-800-496-9994 

Fax Number: 313-381-0022 

7-4

Canada – Customer Assistance 





1-800-263-3777 (English) 

1-800-263-7854 (French) 

1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)) 

Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800 

Overseas – Customer Assistance 

Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit. 

Mexico, Central America and 

Caribbean Islands/Countries 

(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin 

Islands) – Customer Assistance 

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V. 

Customer Assistance Center 

Paseo de la Reforma # 2740 

Col. Lomas de Bezares 

C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F. 

01-800-508-0000 

Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800 

GM Mobility Program for Persons 

with Disabilities 

This program, available to 

qualified applicants, can 

reimburse you up to 

$1,000 toward aftermarket 

driver or passenger 

adaptive equipment you 

may require for your 

vehicle (hand controls, 

wheelchair/scooter 

lifts, etc.). 

This program can also provide you with free resource 

information, such as area driver assessment centers and 

mobility equipment installers. The program is available 

for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle 

purchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or call 

the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935. 

Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935. 

GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call 

1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. All TTY users 

call 1-800-263-3830. 

7-5

Roadside Assistance Program 

Security While You Travel 

1-800-ROADSIDE (1-800-762-3743) 

As the proud owner of a new Pontiac vehicle, you are 

automatically enrolled in the Pontiac Roadside 

Assistance program. This value-added service is 

intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive 

in the city or travel the open road. 

Pontiac’s Roadside Assistance toll-free number is 

staffed by a team of technically trained advisors, who 

are available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 

We take anxiety out of uncertain situations by providing 

minor repair information over the phone or making 

arrangements to tow your vehicle to the nearest Pontiac 

dealer. 

We will provide the following services for 

3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km), at no expense to you: 

• Fuel delivery 

• Lock-out service (identification required) 

• Tow to nearest dealership for warranty service 

• Change a flat tire 

• Jump starts 

We have quick, easy access to telephone numbers of 

the following additional services depending on your 

needs: 

• Hotels 

• Glass replacement 

• Tire repair facilities 

• Rental vehicle or taxis 

• Airports or train stations 

• Police, fire departments or hospitals 

In many instances, mechanical failures are covered 

under Pontiac’s comprehensive warranty. However, 

when other services are utilized, our advisors will explain 

any payment obligations you might incur. 

For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please 

provide the following information to give the advisor: 

• Location of vehicle 

• Telephone number of your location 

• Vehicle model, year and color 

• Mileage of vehicle 

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 

• Vehicle license plate number 

7-6

Pontiac reserves the right to limit services or 

reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in Pontiac’s 

judgement, the claims become excessive in frequency 

or type of occurrence. 

While we hope you never have the occasion to use our 

service, it is added security while traveling for you 

and your family. Remember, we’re only a phone call 

away. Pontiac Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE 

or 1-800-762-3743, text telephone (TTY) users, call 

1-888-889-2438. 

Canadian Roadside Assistance 

Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive 

Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere 

in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the 

Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book. 

Courtesy Transportation 

Pontiac has always exemplified quality and value in its 

offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownership 

experience, we and our participating dealers are 

proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer 

support program for new vehicles. 

The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail 

purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the 

Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New 

Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options 

are available when warranty repairs are required. 

This will reduce your inconvenience during warranty 

repairs. 

Plan Ahead When Possible 

When your vehicle requires warranty service, you 

should contact your dealer and request an appointment. 

By scheduling a service appointment and advising 

your service consultant of your transportation needs, 

your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience. 

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service 

department immediately, keep driving it until it can be 

scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is 

safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let 

them know this, and ask for instructions. 

If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle 

off for service, you are urged to do so as early in 

the work day as possible to allow for same day repair. 

7-7

Transportation Options 

Warranty service can generally be completed while you 

wait. However, if you are unable to wait Pontiac 

helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several 

transportation options. Depending on the circumstances, 

your dealer can offer you one of the following: 

Shuttle Service 

Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle 

service to get you to your destination with minimal 

interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a one 

way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from 

the dealership. 

Public Transportation or Fuel 

Reimbursement 

If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, 

reimbursement up to $30 per day (five days maximum) 

may be available for the use of public transportation 

such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange 

transportation through a friend or relative, 

reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to 

$10 per day (five day maximum) may be available. 

Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be 

supported by original receipts. 

Courtesy Rental Vehicle 

When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight 

warranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide 

you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a 

rental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to a 

maximum of $30.00 per day supported by receipts. This 

requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement 

and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider 

requirements. Requirements vary and may include 

minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit 

card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges 

and may also be responsible for taxes, levies, 

usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond 

the completion of the repair. 

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a 

courtesy rental. 

Additional Program Information 

Courtesy Transportation is available during the 

Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but 

it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 

A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner 

Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle 

provides detailed warranty coverage information. 

7-8

Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating 

dealers and all program options, such as shuttle 

service, may not be available at every dealer. Please 

contact your dealer for specific information about 

availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements 

will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel. 

Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during 

the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General 

Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited warranty, 

alternative transportation may be available under the 

Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult 

your dealer for details. 

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify, 

change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at 

any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility 

pursuant to terms and conditions described herein 

at its sole discretion. 

Reporting Safety Defects 

Reporting Safety Defects to the 

United States Government 

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could 

cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you 

should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic 

Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying 

General Motors. 

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an 

investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in 

a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy 

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in 

individual problems between you, your dealer or 

General Motors. 

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety 

Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in 

the Washington, D.C. area) or write to: 

NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation 

Washington, D.C. 20590 

You can also obtain other information about motor 

vehicle safety from the hotline. 


Canadian Government 

If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle 

has a safety defect, you should immediately notify 

Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General 

Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to: 

Transport Canada 

330 Sparks Street 

Tower C 

Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5 

7-9


General Motors 

In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in 

a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us. 

Please call us at 1-800-762-2737, or write: 


P.O. Box 33172 

Detroit, MI 48232-5172 

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English) 

or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write: 





Service Publications Ordering 

Information 

Service Manuals 

Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair 

information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, 

brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc. 

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00 

Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer 

Case Unit Repair Manual 

This manual provides information on unit repair service 

procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM 

transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases. 


7-10

Service Bulletins 

Service Bulletins give technical service information 

needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars 

and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to 

assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle. 

In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service 

Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General 

Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE 

(1-800-463-7483). 

Owner’s Information 

Owner publications are written specifically for owners 

and intended to provide basic operational information 

about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include 

the Maintenance Schedule for all models. 

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and 

Warranty Booklet. 


Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only. 


Current and Past Model Order Forms 

Service Publications are available for current and 

past model GM vehicles. To request an order form, 

please specify year and model name of the vehicle. 

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123 

Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM 

Eastern Time 

For Credit Card Orders Only 

(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the 

World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com 

Or you can write to: 

Helm, Incorporated 

P. O. Box 07130 

Detroit, MI 48207 

Prices are subject to change without notice and without 

incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery. 

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are 

quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make 

checks payable in U.S. funds. 

7-11

✍ NOTES 

7-12

A 

About Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 0-2 

Accessory Inflator ........................................... 5-60 

Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-20 

Adding Washer Fluid ....................................... 5-34 

Additional Program Information ........................... 7-8 

Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-5 

Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-91 

Adjusting the Speakers 

(Balance/Fade) ............................ 3-63, 3-73, 3-85 

Air Bag Systems ............................................. 1-59 

How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .................... 1-66 

Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 1-68 

What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .................... 1-65 

What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates? ...... 1-66 

When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ................... 1-64 

Where Are the Air Bags? .............................. 1-62 

Air Bag ......................................................... 3-32 

Readiness Light .......................................... 3-32 

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-16 

All-Wheel Drive Disable Warning Message .......... 3-45 

All-Wheel Drive ...................................... 5-43, 5-83 

All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System ......................... 4-11 

AM ............................................................. 3-108 

Antenna, Integrated Windshield ....................... 3-110 

Antenna, XM Satellite Radio 

Antenna System ........................................ 3-110 

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ............................ 4-8 

Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-34 

Appearance Care ............................................ 5-83 

Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-86 

Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-89 

Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................ 5-84 

Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle .............. 5-86 

Finish Damage ............................................ 5-88 

Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-88 

Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-89 

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................ 5-89 

Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-86 

Arming with the Power Lock Switch ................... 2-16 

Arming with the Remote Keyless Entry 

Transmitter ................................................. 2-16 

Ashtrays ........................................................ 3-21 

Audio Speakers .............................................. 3-96 

Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-59 

Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................... 3-107 

Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ............... 3-108 

Care of Your CD and DVD Player ................ 3-109 

Care of Your CDs and DVDs ....................... 3-109 

Integrated Windshield Antenna ..................... 3-110 

Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-70 

Radio with CD ............................................ 3-60 

Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-82 

Rear Audio Controller (RAC) ........................ 3-106 

Setting the Time .......................................... 3-60 

Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................... 3-106 

Understanding Radio Reception ................... 3-108 

XM Satellite Radio Antenna System ........... 3-110 

Auto Door Lock/Unlock .................................... 3-55 

1

Automatic Door Lock/Unlock ............................. 2-47 

Automatic Headlamp System ............................ 3-13 

Automatic Level Control ................................... 4-34 

Automatic Transaxle Check .............................. 6-10 

Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control 

System Check ............................................. 6-11 

Automatic Transaxle ........................................ 5-18 

Fluid .......................................................... 5-18 

Operation ................................................... 2-22 

B 

Backing Up .................................................... 4-39 

Battery Replacement ......................................... 2-7 

Battery Run-Down Protection ............................ 3-17 

Battery .......................................................... 5-38 

Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-23 

Before You Drive ............................................ 3-94 

Bench Seat, Split ............................................. 1-6 

Body Lubrication Service .................................. 6-10 

Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-35 

Brake Wear ................................................... 5-37 

Brake ............................................................ 3-46 

Low Fluid Warning Message ......................... 3-46 

Parking ...................................................... 2-25 

System Inspection ....................................... 6-14 

System Warning Light .................................. 3-33 

Brakes .......................................................... 5-35 

Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-9 

Braking ........................................................... 4-7 

Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-18 

Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-45 


Parking Lamps ......................................... 5-47 

Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-45 

Headlamps ................................................. 5-45 

Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-49 

Taillamps, Stoplamps and Back-Up Lamps ...... 5-48 

Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-55 

C 

California Fuel .................................................. 5-5 

Canada – Customer Assistance .......................... 7-5 

Canadian Owners ................................................ ii 

Canadian Roadside Assistance ........................... 7-7 

Canceling the Rear Door Security Locks ............ 2-11 

Capacities and Specifications ............................ 5-98 

Carbon Monoxide ................... 4-26, 4-34, 2-11, 2-29 

Care of ......................................................... 5-86 

Safety Belts ................................................ 5-86 

Your Cassette Tape Player .......................... 3-108 

Your CD and DVD Player ........................... 3-109 

Your CDs and DVDs .................................. 3-109 

Cargo Cover .................................................. 2-40 

Cargo Lamp ................................................... 3-17 

2

Cargo Net System .......................................... 2-40 

Carrier Assembly-Differential 

(Rear Drive Module) .................................... 5-44 

Cassette Tape Messages ................................. 3-79 

Cassette Tape Player Service ............................. 6-9 

CD Adapter Kits ............................................. 3-79 

Center Rear Passenger Position, 

Safety Belts ................................................ 1-29 

Chains, Tires .................................................. 5-59 

Change Engine Oil Message ............................ 3-43 

Charging System Indicator Message .................. 3-41 

Checking Coolant ............................................ 5-22 

Checking Engine Oil ........................................ 5-12 

Checking Things Under the Hood ....................... 5-8 

Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................... 1-68 

Check ........................................................... 3-35 

Engine Light ............................................... 3-35 

Tire Pressure System ................................... 5-51 

Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-89 

Child Restraints .............................................. 1-43 

Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-43 

Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-39 

Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for 

Children (LATCH System) .......................... 1-49 

Older Children ............................................. 1-36 

Securing a Child Restraint Designed 

for the LATCH System .............................. 1-51 


Center Rear Seat Position ......................... 1-54 

Child Restraints (cont.) 


Rear Outside Seat Position ........................ 1-52 


Right Front Seat Position .......................... 1-56 

Top Strap Anchor Location ............................ 1-48 

Top Strap ................................................... 1-47 

Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-46 

Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-21 

Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ..... 5-88 

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ....................... 5-87 

Cleaning Fabric/Carpet .................................... 5-84 

Cleaning Glass Surfaces .................................. 5-85 

Cleaning Interior Plastic Components ................. 5-85 

Cleaning Leather ............................................ 5-85 

Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel ........... 5-85 

Cleaning Tires ................................................ 5-88 

Cleaning Vinyl ................................................ 5-85 

Cleaning Windshield and Wiper Blades .............. 5-87 

Cleaning ........................................................ 5-84 

Inside of Your Vehicle .................................. 5-84 

Outside of Your Vehicle ................................ 5-86 

Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-89 

Video Screen ............................................ 3-110 

Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-86 

Your DVD Player ....................................... 3-110 

Climate Control System ................................... 3-21 

Dual .......................................................... 3-24 

Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-27 

3

Compact Disc Messages ................. 3-69, 3-81, 3-94 

Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-82 

Compass Variance .......................................... 3-49 

Console/Cooler ............................................... 2-35 

Content Theft-Deferrent .................................... 2-15 

Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-6 

Convenience Net ............................................ 2-39 

Convenience Tray, Sliding Rear ........................ 2-41 

Coolant ......................................................... 3-35 

Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-35 

Engine Temperature Warning Message ........... 3-40 

Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-21 

Cooling System .............................................. 5-26 

Cruise Control ................................................ 3-10 

Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-33 

Current and Past Model Order Forms ................ 7-11 

Customer Assistance Information ........................ 7-7 

Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7 

Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) 

Users ....................................................... 7-4 

Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4 

Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2 


Disabilities ................................................ 7-5 


General Motors ........................................ 7-10 


Canadian Government ................................ 7-9 

Customer Assistance Information (cont.) 

Reporting Safety Defects to the United States 

Government .............................................. 7-9 

Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-6 

Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-10 

D 

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ......................... 3-12 

Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-3 

Defogging and Defrosting ......................... 3-23, 3-26 

Delayed Lighting ............................................. 3-15 

Delayed Locking ............................... 2-9, 2-48, 3-56 

Dinghy Towing ................................................ 4-32 

Disarming with the Remote Keyless 

Entry Transmitter ......................................... 2-16 

Disarming with Your Key .................................. 2-16 

Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-3 

Dolly Towing .................................................. 4-32 

Door ............................................................. 3-44 

Ajar Warning Message ................................. 3-44 

Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-9 

Locks .......................................................... 2-8 

Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-9 

Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 2-9 

Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-10 

Driver Behavior ................................................ 4-2 

4

Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-49 

DIC Controls and Displays ............................ 3-50 

DIC Vehicle Personalization .......................... 3-52 

Driver ............................................................ 1-16 

Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-16 

Driving On Grades .......................................... 4-40 

Driving on Snow or Ice .................................... 4-26 

Driving Through Deep Standing Water ............... 4-20 

Driving Through Flowing Water ......................... 4-20 

Driving with a Trailer ....................................... 4-38 

Driving .......................................................... 4-17 

At Night ..................................................... 4-17 

City ........................................................... 4-21 

Defensive ..................................................... 4-3 

Drunken ....................................................... 4-3 

Environment ................................................. 4-2 

Freeway ..................................................... 4-22 

Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-24 

In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-18 

Winter ........................................................ 4-26 

Dual Climate Control System ............................ 3-24 

DVD Messages .............................................. 3-99 

DVD Player .................................................... 3-97 

DVD ............................................................ 3-110 

Cleaning the Video Screen .......................... 3-110 

Cleaning Your DVD Player .......................... 3-110 

Distortion .................................................. 3-108 

Rear Seat Entertainment System ................... 3-94 

E 

Electrical System ............................................ 5-91 

Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-91 

Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-92 

Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 5-91 

Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-91 

Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-91 

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance 

Programs ................................................... 3-38 

Engine Coolant Level Check .............................. 6-9 

Engine Oil Additives ........................................ 5-15 

Engine Oil Level Check ..................................... 6-9 

Engine Oil Scheduled Maintenance ..................... 6-5 

Engine Specifications ...................................... 5-99 

Engine .......................................................... 5-16 

Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-16 

Battery ....................................................... 5-38 

Change Oil Message ................................... 3-43 

Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-35 

Compartment Overview ................................ 5-10 

Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-21 

Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-35 

Coolant Temperature Warning Message .......... 3-40 

Coolant ...................................................... 5-20 

Cooling System Inspection ............................ 6-13 

Exhaust ..................................................... 2-29 

Low Oil Level Message ................................ 3-42 

5

Engine (cont.) 

Oil ............................................................. 5-11 

Overheating ................................................ 5-23 

Starting ...................................................... 2-20 

Entering Programming Mode .................... 2-46, 3-52 

Entertainment System .................................... 3-110 

Cleaning the Video Screen .......................... 3-110 

Cleaning Your DVD Player .......................... 3-110 

DVD Distortion .......................................... 3-108 

Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-15 

Exit Lighting ................................................... 3-16 

Exiting Programming Mode ....................... 2-51, 3-59 

Express-Down Window .................................... 2-14 

Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-36 

Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-12 

F 

Filter ............................................................. 5-16 

Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-16 

Finding a PTY Station 

(RDS and XM) ......................... 3-63, 3-73, 3-85 

Finding a Station ............................ 3-62, 3-71, 3-83 

Finish Care .................................................... 5-87 

Finish Damage ............................................... 5-88 

Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-9 

Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-62 

Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-61 

Floor Console Fuse Block ................................ 5-92 

Fluid ............................................................. 5-18 

Automatic Transaxle ..................................... 5-18 

Power Steering ........................................... 5-33 

Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-34 

FM Stereo .................................................... 3-108 

Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-13 

Folding or Reclining the Seatbacks ..................... 1-6 

Following Distance .......................................... 4-39 

Footnotes ........................................................ 6-5 

Front Door Utility Packs ................................... 2-34 

Front Reading Lamps ...................................... 3-17 

Fuel ............................................................... 5-4 

Additives ...................................................... 5-5 

California Fuel .............................................. 5-5 

Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..................... 5-8 

Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-6 

Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-6 

Gage ......................................................... 3-38 

Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-4 

Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5 

Low Warning Message ................................. 3-46 

System Inspection ....................................... 6-13 

Fuses ........................................................... 5-92 

Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-92 

Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-91 

6

G 

Gage ............................................................ 3-35 

Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-35 

Fuel .......................................................... 3-38 

Speedometer .............................................. 3-30 

Tachometer ................................................. 3-31 

Garage Door Opener Compartment ................... 2-33 

Gasoline ......................................................... 5-4 

Octane ........................................................ 5-4 

Specifications ............................................... 5-5 

Glove Box ..................................................... 2-32 


Disabilities .................................................... 7-5 

H 

Hatch Ajar Warning Message ............................ 3-44 

Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6 

Head Restraints ............................................... 1-5 

Headlamp Exit Delay ....................... 2-46, 3-14, 3-53 

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .................... 3-8 

Headlamp Wiring ............................................ 5-91 

Headlamps .................................................... 5-45 

Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-45 


Parking Lamps ......................................... 5-47 

Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-45 

Headphones ................................................... 3-95 

Head-Up Display (HUD) ................................... 3-18 

Heated Seats ................................................... 1-3 

Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-24 

Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-24 

Hitches .......................................................... 4-37 

Hood .............................................................. 5-8 

Checking Things Under .................................. 5-8 

Release ....................................................... 5-9 

Horn ............................................................... 3-6 

How to Add Automatic Transaxle Fluid ............... 5-20 

How to Add Coolant to the Coolant 

Recovery Tank ............................................ 5-28 

How to Add Coolant to the Radiator .................. 5-29 

How to Check Automatic Transaxle Fluid ............ 5-18 

How to Check Power Steering Fluid .................. 5-34 

How to Check ................................................ 5-51 

How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ....... 5-17 

How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii 

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-15 

Hydroplaning .................................................. 4-20 

I 

If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine .......... 5-25 

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ............... 5-24 

If the Light Is Flashing ..................................... 3-36 

If the Light Is On Steady ................................. 3-37 

If You Are Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ....... 4-30 

If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer ..................... 4-35 

7

If You’re Caught in a Blizzard ........................... 4-28 

Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-19 

Ignition Transaxle Lock Check .......................... 6-12 

Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-39 

Inflation -- Tire Pressure .................................. 5-50 

Inspection ...................................................... 6-14 

Brake System ............................................. 6-14 

Engine Cooling System ................................ 6-13 

Exhaust System .......................................... 6-13 

Fuel System ............................................... 6-13 

Part C - Periodic Maintenance ....................... 6-13 


Boot and Seal ......................................... 6-13 

Throttle System ........................................... 6-14 

Transfer Care (Power Transfer Unit) 

and Carrier Assembly-Differential 

(Rear Drive Module) All-Wheel Drive ........... 6-14 

Instrument Panel Brightness ............................. 3-14 

Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-29 

Cluster ....................................................... 3-29 

Overview ..................................................... 3-4 

Switchbank ................................................. 3-17 

Integrated Windshield Antenna ........................ 3-110 

Interior Lamps Control ..................................... 3-14 

Interior Lamps ................................................ 3-14 

Interior Lighting Delay ...................................... 3-54 

Interior Lighting On ......................................... 3-54 

J 

Jump Starting ................................................. 5-39 

K 

Key Lock Cylinders Service .............................. 6-10 

Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4 

Keys ............................................................... 2-3 

L 

Lamps on Reminder ........................................ 3-12 

Lamps ........................................................... 3-12 

Exterior ...................................................... 3-12 

Interior ....................................................... 3-14 

Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................... 1-16, 1-26, 1-29 

LATCH System ............................................... 1-49 

Child Restraints ........................................... 1-49 

Securing a Child Restraint Designed for 

the LATCH System ................................... 1-51 

Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine 

Running ..................................................... 2-27 

Leaving Your Vehicle ....................................... 2-11 

Liftgate/Tailgate Release .................................. 2-12 

Liftgate/Tailgate ............................................... 2-11 

8

Light ............................................................. 3-32 

Air Bag Readiness ....................................... 3-32 

Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-34 

Brake System Warning ................................. 3-33 

Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-35 

Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-32 

TCS Warning Light ...................................... 3-34 

Traction Control System (TCS) Warning .......... 3-34 

Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-32 

Lock Feedback ............................................... 3-58 

Locking, Delayed ............................................ 2-48 

Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-11 

Locks ............................................................. 2-9 

Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-9 

Door ........................................................... 2-8 

Leaving Your Vehicle .................................... 2-11 

Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-11 

Power Door .................................................. 2-9 

Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 2-9 

Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-10 

Loss of Control ............................................... 4-15 

Low Brake Fluid Warning Message .................... 3-46 

Low Engine Oil Level Message ......................... 3-42 

Low Fuel Warning Message ............................. 3-46 

Low Oil Pressure Message ............................... 3-41 

Low Tire Message .......................................... 3-43 

Low Washer Fluid Warning Message ................. 3-45 

Lumbar ........................................................... 1-3 

Manual Controls ............................................ 1-3 

M 

Maintenance, Normal Replacement Parts ............ 5-99 

Maintenance Schedule ...................................... 6-9 

At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-9 

At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9 

At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-10 

At Least Twice a Year .................................. 6-10 

Brake System Inspection .............................. 6-14 

Engine Cooling System Inspection ................. 6-13 

Exhaust System Inspection ........................... 6-13 

Fuel System Inspection ................................ 6-13 

How This Section is Organized ....................... 6-3 

Introduction .................................................. 6-2 

Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2 

Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ......... 6-4 

Part B - Owner Checks and Services ............... 6-9 

Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections ...... 6-13 

Part D - Recommended Fluids and 

Lubricants ............................................... 6-15 

Part E - Maintenance Record ........................ 6-16 

Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-5 


Boot and Seal Inspection .......................... 6-13 

Throttle System Inspection ............................ 6-14 

Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit) 

and Carrier Assembly-Differential 

(Rear Drive Module) All-Wheel Drive 

Inspection ............................................... 6-14 

9

Maintenance Schedule (cont.) 

Using Your ................................................... 6-4 

Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2 

Maintenance When Trailer Towing ..................... 4-41 

Making Turns ................................................. 4-40 

Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-35 

Manual Lumbar Controls .................................... 1-3 

Manual Passenger Seat .................................... 1-2 

Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle ............... 2-6 

Message ....................................................... 3-45 

All-Wheel Drive Disable Warning .................... 3-45 

Center ....................................................... 3-39 

Change Engine Oil ...................................... 3-43 

Charging System Indicator ............................ 3-41 

Door Ajar Warning ....................................... 3-44 

Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ............. 3-40 

Low Brake Fluid Warning .............................. 3-46 

Low Engine Oil Level ................................... 3-42 

Low Fuel Warning ....................................... 3-46 

Low Oil Pressure ......................................... 3-41 

Low Tire ..................................................... 3-43 

Low Washer Fluid Warning ........................... 3-45 

Park Lamp Warning ..................................... 3-48 

PASS-Key ® III Security ................................. 3-44 

Program Mode ............................................ 3-47 

Rear Hatch Ajar Warning .............................. 3-44 


Low Warning ........................................... 3-48 

Service Traction System Warning ................... 3-39 

Message (cont.) 

Service Vehicle Soon ................................... 3-47 

Traction Active ............................................ 3-40 

Mexico, Central America and Caribbean 

Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico and 

U.S. Virgin Islands) – Customer Assistance ....... 7-5 

Mirrors .......................................................... 2-30 

Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-30 

Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-31 

Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-30 

MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3 

N 

New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-18 

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 5-99 

O 

Odometer ...................................................... 3-30 

Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-14 

Oil ................................................................ 5-11 

Engine ....................................................... 5-11 

Pressure Message ....................................... 3-41 

Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-36 

Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3 

OnStar ® Personal Calling ................................. 2-32 

OnStar ® Services ............................................ 2-32 

10

OnStar ® System ............................................. 2-31 

OnStar ® Virtual Advisor .................................... 2-32 

Operation Tips ................................................ 3-27 

Operation .............................................. 3-21, 3-24 

Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6 

Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-27 

Outside ......................................................... 2-31 

Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-31 

Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-30 

Overhead Console .......................................... 2-33 

Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode ..... 5-23 

Overseas – Customer Assistance ........................ 7-5 

Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii 

Owner’s Information ........................................ 7-11 

P 

Park Lamp Warning Message ........................... 3-48 

Park (P) ........................................................ 2-28 

Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-28 

Shifting Into ................................................ 2-26 

Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle Park (P) 

Mechanism Check ........................................ 6-12 

Parking on Hills .............................................. 4-40 

Parking ......................................................... 2-25 

Brake ........................................................ 2-25 

Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-28 

Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ............ 6-4 

Part B - Owner Checks and Services .................. 6-9 

Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections .......... 6-13 

Part D - Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .... 6-15 

Part E - Maintenance Record ........................... 6-16 

Passing ................................................. 4-14, 4-39 

PASS-Key ® III Operation .................................. 2-17 

PASS-Key ® III Security Message ....................... 3-44 

PASS-Key ® III ................................................ 2-16 

Perimeter Lighting ........................................... 3-16 

Plan Ahead When Possible ................................ 7-7 

Playing a Cassette Tape .................................. 3-78 

Playing a Compact Disc .................. 3-68, 3-80, 3-90 

Playing a Specific Loaded 

Compact Disc ............................................. 3-91 

Playing the Radio ........................... 3-61, 3-70, 3-83 

Power Steering ............................................... 4-12 

Power ........................................................... 3-20 

Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-20 

Door Locks .................................................. 2-9 

Electrical System ......................................... 5-91 

Six-Way Seats .............................................. 1-2 

Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-33 

Windows .................................................... 2-14 

Program Mode Message .................................. 3-47 

Programmable Automatic Door Locks .................. 2-9 

Programmable Modes ..... 2-46, 2-47, 2-48, 2-49, 2-50 

11

Programming Mode ......................................... 2-46 

Entering ..................................................... 2-46 

Exiting ....................................................... 2-51 

Q 

Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-15 

R 

Radiator Pressure Cap .................................... 5-23 

Radio Data System (RDS) ............... 3-60, 3-70, 3-82 

Radio Messages ............................. 3-65, 3-75, 3-87 

Radios .......................................................... 3-59 

Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ............... 3-108 

Care of Your CD and DVD Player ................ 3-109 

Care of Your CDs and DVDs ....................... 3-109 

Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-70 

Radio with CD ............................................ 3-60 

Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-82 

Rear Audio Controller (RAC) ........................ 3-106 

Setting the Time .......................................... 3-60 

Theft-Deterrent .......................................... 3-106 

Understanding Reception ............................ 3-108 

RDS Messages .............................. 3-64, 3-74, 3-86 

Rear Audio Controller (RAC) ........................... 3-106 

Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-10 

Rear Hatch Ajar Warning Message .................... 3-44 

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-32 

Rear Seat Entertainment System ....................... 3-94 

Rear Seat Operation ......................................... 1-6 

Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions ............. 1-26 

Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-26 

Rear Storage Area .......................................... 2-39 

Rear Window Defogger ............................ 3-24, 3-27 

Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-30 

Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-4 

Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-31 

Remote Alarm .................................................. 2-6 

Remote Control .............................................. 3-99 

Remote Door Unlock ....................................... 3-57 

Remote Driver Unlock Control ........................... 2-49 

Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-5 

Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-4 


Low Warning Message ................................. 3-48 

Remote Lock and Unlock Confirmation ............... 2-50 

Removing the Flat Tire and Installing 

the Spare Tire ............................................. 5-74 

12

Removing the Floor Track Assembly .................. 2-43 

Removing the Sliding Rear Convenience Tray ..... 2-42 

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-63 

Removing the Split Bench Seat .......................... 1-7 

Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-49 

Replacing Brake System Parts .......................... 5-38 


After a Crash .............................................. 1-69 

Replacing the Floor Track Assembly .................. 2-43 

Replacing the Sliding Rear Convenience Tray ..... 2-44 

Replacing the Split Bench Seats ......................... 1-8 

Reporting Safety Defects ................................... 7-9 

Canadian Government ................................... 7-9 

General Motors ........................................... 7-10 

United States Government .............................. 7-9 

Restraint System Check ................................... 6-10 

Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-68 


After a Crash .......................................... 1-69 

Restraint Systems ........................................... 1-68 

Checking .................................................... 1-68 

Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-69 

Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-20 

Retro-Active Reset .......................................... 3-31 

Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-25 

Roadside ......................................................... 7-6 

Assistance Program ....................................... 7-6 

Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out ................... 4-31 

Roof Rack System .......................................... 2-36 

Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-29 

S 

Safety Belt ..................................................... 3-32 

Reminder Light ............................................ 3-32 

Safety Belts ................................................... 5-86 

Care of ...................................................... 5-86 

Center Rear Passenger Position .................... 1-29 

Driver Position ............................................ 1-16 

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-15 

Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-15 


Children and Small Adults ......................... 1-32 

Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-26 

Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-25 

Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-36 

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-24 

Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-10 

Safety Chains ................................................. 4-38 

Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii 

13

Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-5 

Seat ............................................................... 1-5 

Head Restraints ............................................ 1-5 

Seats .............................................................. 1-3 

Heated Seats ............................................... 1-3 

Manual Lumbar ............................................. 1-3 

Manual Passenger ......................................... 1-2 

Rear Seat Operation ...................................... 1-6 

Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-4 

Six-Way Power Seats .................................... 1-2 

Split Bench Seats ......................................... 1-6 

Secondary Latch System ................................. 5-69 

Securing a Child Restraint ................................ 1-54 

Center Rear Seat Position ............................ 1-54 

Designed for the LATCH System ................... 1-51 

Rear Outside Seat Position ........................... 1-52 

Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-56 

Security Message, PASS-Key ® III ...................... 3-44 

Security While You Travel .................................. 7-6 

Service Bulletins ............................................. 7-11 

Service Engine Soon Light in the United States 

or Check Engine Light in Canada .................. 3-35 

Service Manuals ............................................. 7-10 

Service ........................................................... 5-3 


Your Vehicle .............................................. 5-4 

Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-3 

Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-35 

Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-10 

Traction System Warning Message ................. 3-39 

Vehicle Soon Message ................................. 3-47 

Setting Preset PTYs 

(RDS Only) ................................ 3-64, 3-74, 3-86 

Setting Preset Stations .................... 3-62, 3-72, 3-84 

Setting the Time ............................................. 3-60 

Setting the Tone 

(Bass/Treble) .............................. 3-62, 3-72, 3-84 

Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-88 

Shift Lock Release .......................................... 2-25 

Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-26 

Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-28 

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................... 1-18 

Skidding ........................................................ 4-16 

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips ....................... 4-20 

14

Spare Tire Check ............................................ 6-10 

Special Fabric Cleaning Problems ..................... 5-84 

Specifications, Capacities ................................. 5-98 

Speedometer .................................................. 3-30 

Split Bench Seats ............................................. 1-6 

Starter Switch Check ....................................... 6-11 

Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-20 

Steering in Emergencies .................................. 4-13 


Boot and Seal Inspection .............................. 6-13 

Steering Tips .................................................. 4-12 

Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ....................... 3-107 

Steering ........................................................ 4-12 

Stereo RCA Jacks .......................................... 3-95 

Storage Areas ................................................ 2-40 

Cargo Net System ....................................... 2-40 

Console/Cooler ............................................ 2-35 

Convenience Net ......................................... 2-39 

Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-33 

Front Door Utility Packs ................................ 2-34 

Glove Box .................................................. 2-32 

Overhead Console ....................................... 2-33 

Rear Storage Area ....................................... 2-39 

Storage Areas (cont.) 

Roof Rack System ....................................... 2-36 

Sliding Rear Convenience Tray ...................... 2-41 

Storage Compartment ...................................... 2-34 

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-78 

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-30 

Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-14 

Sunglasses Storage Compartment ..................... 2-34 

Sunroof ......................................................... 2-45 

Switchbanks, Instrument Panel .......................... 3-17 

T 

Tachometer .................................................... 3-31 

Tailgate/Liftgate ............................................... 2-11 

Taillamps ....................................................... 5-48 

Stoplamps, and Back-Up Lamps .................... 5-48 

TCS Warning Light .......................................... 3-34 

Theft-Deterrent, Radio .................................... 3-106 

Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-15 

Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-15 

PASS-Key ® III Operation .............................. 2-17 

PASS-Key ® III ............................................. 2-16 

15

Throttle System Inspection ............................... 6-14 

Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-7 

Tips and Trouble ........................................... 3-103 

Tire Inflation Check ........................................... 6-9 

Tire ............................................................... 3-43 

Low Message ............................................. 3-43 

Tires ............................................................. 5-50 

Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-55 

Chains ....................................................... 5-59 

Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-62 

Check Tire Pressure System ......................... 5-51 

Compact Spare Tire ..................................... 5-82 

If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-61 

Inflation -- Tire Pressure ............................... 5-50 

Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-53 

Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-56 

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-58 

Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-58 

When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-55 

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater .................... 2-21 

Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-48 

Top Strap ...................................................... 1-47 

Torque Lock ................................................... 2-28 

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires .................. 4-37 

Towing .......................................................... 4-31 

Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-31 

Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-34 

Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-31 

Traction ......................................................... 3-40 

Active Message ........................................... 3-40 

Control System (TCS) .................................. 4-10 

Control System Warning Light ....................... 3-34 

Service Traction System Warning Message ..... 3-39 

Trailer Brakes ................................................. 4-38 

Trailer Wiring Harness ..................................... 4-41 

Transaxle Operation, Automatic ......................... 2-22 

Transaxle ....................................................... 5-18 

Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-18 

Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit) .................. 5-43 

Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Case 

Unit Repair Manual ...................................... 7-10 

Transportation Options ...................................... 7-8 

Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-30 

Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8 

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7 

Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer .................. 4-40 

16

U 

Underbody Flushing Service ............................. 6-12 

Underhood Fuse Block .................................... 5-94 

Understanding Radio Reception ....................... 3-108 

Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-56 

United States – Customer Assistance .................. 7-4 

Unlock Feedback ............................................ 3-58 

Used Replacement Wheels .............................. 5-59 

Using Cleaner on Fabric .................................. 5-84 

Using Song List Mode ..................................... 3-93 

V 

Vehicle Identification ........................................ 5-90 

Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-90 

Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-91 

Vehicle Personalization .................................... 2-45 

Automatic Door Lock/Unlock .......................... 2-47 

Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-48 

DIC ........................................................... 3-52 

Entering Programming Mode ......................... 2-46 

Exiting Programming Mode ........................... 2-51 

Headlamp Exit Delay ................................... 2-46 

Remote Driver Unlock Control ....................... 2-49 

Remote Lock and Unlock Confirmation ........... 2-50 

Vehicle Storage .............................................. 5-39 

Vehicle ............................................................ 4-6 

Control ........................................................ 4-6 

Damage Warnings ........................................... iv 

Design ......................................................... 4-2 

Loading ...................................................... 4-32 

Service Soon Message ................................. 3-47 

Symbols ......................................................... iv 

Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-27 

Video Screen ................................................. 3-97 

Visor Vanity Mirror .......................................... 2-14 

Visors ........................................................... 2-14 

W 

Warm-Up Shift ................................................ 2-23 

Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-28 

Warnings ......................................................... 3-6 

Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6 

Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6 

Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii 

Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv 

Washer Fluid Low Warning Message ................. 3-45 

Washing Your Vehicle ...................................... 5-86 

Weatherstrip Lubrication ................................... 6-10 

Weight of the Trailer Tongue ............................. 4-36 

Weight of the Trailer ........................................ 4-36 

What Coolant to Use ....................................... 5-21 

17

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use ........................ 5-14 

What Power Steering Fluid to Use .................... 5-34 

What to Do with Used Oil ................................ 5-16 

What Washer Fluid to Use ............................... 5-34 

Wheels .......................................................... 5-58 

Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-58 

Replacement ............................................... 5-58 

When to Add Engine Oil .................................. 5-13 

When to Change Engine Oil 

(GM Oil Life System) ................................... 5-15 

When to Check and Change Automatic 

Transaxle Fluid ........................................... 5-18 

When to Check Power Steering Fluid ................ 5-33 

When to Check .............................................. 5-51 

When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ..... 5-16 

When You Are Ready to Leave 

After Parking on a Hill .................................. 4-41 

Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-46 

Why Safety Belts Work .................................... 1-12 

Window Lock Out ........................................... 2-14 

Windows ....................................................... 2-13 

Power ........................................................ 2-14 

Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check ................. 6-9 

Windshield Washer ........................................... 3-9 

Fluid .......................................................... 5-34 

Windshield Wiper ............................................ 5-49 

Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-49 

Fuses ........................................................ 5-91 

Windshield Wipers ............................................ 3-9 

Winter Driving ................................................ 4-26 

Wiper Blade Check ......................................... 6-10 

X 


(USA Only) ................................. 3-61, 3-70, 3-82 

XM Satellite Radio Antenna System .............. 3-110 

XM Satellite Radio Service 

(USA Only) ............................................... 3-108 

Y 

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ............. 4-2 

Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2 

18

2003 pontiac aztek owner manual - GM Canada

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?